Renesas H8/3627 Single-chip microcomputer Datasheet

To all our customers
Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document, such as Hitachi
Electric and Hitachi XX, to Renesas Technology Corp.
The semiconductor operations of Mitsubishi Electric and Hitachi were transferred to Renesas
Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003. These operations include microcomputer, logic, analog
and discrete devices, and memory chips other than DRAMs (flash memory, SRAMs etc.)
Accordingly, although Hitachi, Hitachi, Ltd., Hitachi Semiconductors, and other Hitachi brand
names are mentioned in the document, these names have in fact all been changed to Renesas
Technology Corp. Thank you for your understanding. Except for our corporate trademark, logo and
corporate statement, no changes whatsoever have been made to the contents of the document, and
these changes do not constitute any alteration to the contents of the document itself.
Renesas Technology Home Page: http://www.renesas.com
Renesas Technology Corp.
Customer Support Dept.
April 1, 2003
Cautions
Keep safety first in your circuit designs!
1.
Renesas Technology Corporation puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but
there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire
or property damage.
Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i)
placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or
mishap.
Notes regarding these materials
1.
These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corporation
product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any
other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corporation or a third party.
2.
Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any third-party's rights,
originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained in
these materials.
3.
All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and algorithms represents
information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by Renesas Technology
Corporation without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact
Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor for the latest product
information before purchasing a product listed herein.
The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising from these
inaccuracies or errors.
Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corporation by various means, including the
Renesas Technology Corporation Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com).
4.
When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs, and
algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of
the information and products. Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other
loss resulting from the information contained herein.
5.
Renesas Technology Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used
under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an
authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for
any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea
repeater use.
6.
The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these
materials.
7.
If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a license
from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination.
Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the country of destination is
prohibited.
8.
Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation for further details on these materials or the products contained therein.
H8/3627 Series
H8/3627
H8/3626
H8/3625
H8/3624S
H8/3623S
H8/3622S
HD6433627, HD6473627
HD6433626
HD6433625
HD6433624S
HD6433623S
HD6433622S
Hardware Manual
ADE-602-174
Rev. 1.0
3/5/03
Hitachi, Ltd.
MC-Setsu
Cautions
1. Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi’s or any third party’s
patent, copyright, trademark, or other intellectual property rights for information contained in
this document. Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party’s
rights, including intellectual property rights, in connection with use of the information
contained in this document.
2. Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice. Confirm that you
have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design, purchase or
use.
3. Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability.
However, contact Hitachi’s sales office before using the product in an application that
demands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly
threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury, such as aerospace, aeronautics, nuclear
power, combustion control, transportation, traffic, safety equipment or medical equipment for
life support.
4. Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi
particularly for maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, heat radiation characteristics,
installation conditions and other characteristics. Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or
damage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges. Even within the guaranteed ranges,
consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and
employ systemic measures such as fail-safes, so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi
product does not cause bodily injury, fire or other consequential damage due to operation of
the Hitachi product.
5. This product is not designed to be radiation resistant.
6. No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate, in any form, the whole or part of this document
without written approval from Hitachi.
7. Contact Hitachi’s sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi
semiconductor products.
Preface
The H8/300L Series of single-chip microcomputers has a high-speed H8/300L CPU core, with
many necessary peripheral system functions on-chip. The H8/300L CPU instruction set is
compatible with the H8/300 CPU.
On-chip peripheral functions of the H8/3627 Series include a high-precision DTMF generator for
tone dialing, three types of timers, two serial communication interface channels, and an A/D
converter.
This manual describes the hardware of the H8/3627 Series. For details on the H8/3627 Series
instruction set, refer to the H8/300L Series Programming Manual.
Contents
Section 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Overview ...........................................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
Internal Block Diagram .....................................................................................................
Pin Arrangement and Functions ........................................................................................
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement ..................................................................................................
1.3.2 Pin Functions........................................................................................................
Section 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
CPU .....................................................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
2.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................
2.1.2 Address Space ......................................................................................................
2.1.3 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
2.2.1 General Registers..................................................................................................
2.2.2 Control Registers..................................................................................................
2.2.3 Initial Register Values ..........................................................................................
Data Formats......................................................................................................................
2.3.1 Data Formats in General Registers.......................................................................
2.3.2 Memory Data Formats..........................................................................................
Addressing Modes .............................................................................................................
2.4.1 Addressing Modes................................................................................................
2.4.2 Effective Address Calculation..............................................................................
Instruction Set....................................................................................................................
2.5.1 Data Transfer Instructions ....................................................................................
2.5.2 Arithmetic Operations ..........................................................................................
2.5.3 Logic Operations ..................................................................................................
2.5.4 Shift Operations....................................................................................................
2.5.5 Bit Manipulations .................................................................................................
2.5.6 Branching Instructions..........................................................................................
2.5.7 System Control Instructions .................................................................................
2.5.8 Block Data Transfer Instruction ...........................................................................
Basic Operational Timing..................................................................................................
2.6.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM) .........................................................
2.6.2 Access to On-Chip Peripheral Modules ...............................................................
CPU States .........................................................................................................................
2.7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
2.7.2 Program Execution State ......................................................................................
2.7.3 Program Halt State ...............................................................................................
2.7.4 Exception-Handling State ....................................................................................
1
1
5
6
6
7
11
11
11
12
12
13
13
13
15
15
16
17
18
18
20
24
26
28
29
29
31
35
37
38
40
40
41
42
42
44
44
44
i
2.8
2.9
Memory Map ..................................................................................................................... 45
Application Notes.............................................................................................................. 46
2.9.1 Notes on Data Access........................................................................................... 46
2.9.2 Notes on Bit Manipulation ................................................................................... 48
2.9.3 Notes on Use of the EEPMOV Instruction .......................................................... 54
Section 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Exception Handling........................................................................................ 55
Overview............................................................................................................................ 55
Reset .................................................................................................................................. 55
3.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 55
3.2.2 Reset Sequence..................................................................................................... 55
3.2.3 Interrupt Immediately after Reset ........................................................................ 56
Interrupts............................................................................................................................ 57
3.3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 57
3.3.2 Interrupt Control Registers ................................................................................... 59
3.3.3 External Interrupts................................................................................................ 67
3.3.4 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................. 67
3.3.5 Interrupt Operations.............................................................................................. 68
3.3.6 Interrupt Response Time ...................................................................................... 73
Application Notes.............................................................................................................. 74
3.4.1 Notes on Stack Area Use...................................................................................... 74
3.4.2 Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers............................................................. 74
Section 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Clock Pulse Generators ................................................................................. 77
Overview............................................................................................................................ 77
4.1.1 Block Diagram...................................................................................................... 77
4.1.2 System Clock and Subclock ................................................................................. 77
System Clock Generator.................................................................................................... 78
Subclock Generator ........................................................................................................... 81
Prescalers ........................................................................................................................... 82
Note on Oscillators ............................................................................................................ 82
Section 5
5.1
5.2
5.3
ii
Power-Down Modes ...................................................................................... 85
Overview............................................................................................................................
5.1.1 System Control Registers .....................................................................................
Sleep Mode........................................................................................................................
5.2.1 Transition to Sleep Mode .....................................................................................
5.2.2 Clearing Sleep Mode ............................................................................................
Standby Mode....................................................................................................................
5.3.1 Transition to Standby Mode .................................................................................
5.3.2 Clearing Standby Mode........................................................................................
5.3.3 Oscillator Settling Time after Standby Mode is Cleared......................................
5.3.4 Transition to Standby Mode and Pin States .........................................................
85
88
91
91
91
92
92
92
93
94
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
Watch Mode ......................................................................................................................
5.4.1 Transition to Watch Mode....................................................................................
5.4.2 Clearing Watch Mode ..........................................................................................
5.4.3 Oscillator Settling Time after Watch Mode is Cleared ........................................
Subsleep Mode ..................................................................................................................
5.5.1 Transition to Subsleep Mode................................................................................
5.5.2 Clearing Subsleep Mode ......................................................................................
Subactive Mode .................................................................................................................
5.6.1 Transition to Subactive Mode ..............................................................................
5.6.2 Clearing Subactive Mode .....................................................................................
5.6.3 Operating Frequency in Subactive Mode .............................................................
Active (medium-speed) Mode ...........................................................................................
5.7.1 Transition to Active (medium-speed) Mode ........................................................
5.7.2 Clearing Active (medium-speed) Mode ...............................................................
5.7.3 Operating Frequency in Active (medium-speed) Mode.......................................
Direct Transfer...................................................................................................................
5.8.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
5.8.2 Direct Transfer Time ............................................................................................
Section 6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
ROM ...................................................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
6.1.1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
PROM Mode......................................................................................................................
6.2.1 Selection of PROM Mode ....................................................................................
6.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Arrangement and Memory Map ...........................................
Programming .....................................................................................................................
6.3.1 Programming and Verification .............................................................................
6.3.2 Programming Precautions ....................................................................................
Reliability of Programmed Data........................................................................................
95
95
95
95
96
96
96
97
97
97
97
98
98
98
98
99
99
100
103
103
103
104
104
104
107
108
112
113
Section 7
7.1
RAM ................................................................................................................... 115
Overview............................................................................................................................ 115
7.1.1 Block Diagram...................................................................................................... 115
Section 8
8.1
8.2
8.3
I/O Ports ............................................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
Port 1..................................................................................................................................
8.2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
8.2.2 Register Configuration and Description...............................................................
8.2.3 Pin Functions........................................................................................................
8.2.4 Pin States ..............................................................................................................
8.2.5 MOS Input Pull-Up ..............................................................................................
Port 2..................................................................................................................................
117
117
119
119
119
123
124
125
126
iii
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
8.3.2 Register Configuration and Description...............................................................
8.3.3 Pin Functions........................................................................................................
8.3.4 Pin States ..............................................................................................................
8.3.5 MOS Input Pull-Up ..............................................................................................
Port 5..................................................................................................................................
8.4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
8.4.2 Register Configuration and Description...............................................................
8.4.3 Pin Functions........................................................................................................
8.4.4 Pin States ..............................................................................................................
8.4.5 MOS Input Pull-Up ..............................................................................................
Port 6..................................................................................................................................
8.5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
8.5.2 Register Configuration and Description...............................................................
8.5.3 Pin Functions........................................................................................................
8.5.4 Pin States ..............................................................................................................
8.5.5 MOS Input Pull-Up ..............................................................................................
Port 7..................................................................................................................................
8.6.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
8.6.2 Register Configuration and Description...............................................................
8.6.3 Pin Functions........................................................................................................
8.6.4 Pin States ..............................................................................................................
Port 8..................................................................................................................................
8.7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
8.7.2 Register Configuration and Description...............................................................
8.7.3 Pin Functions........................................................................................................
8.7.4 Pin States ..............................................................................................................
Port A.................................................................................................................................
8.8.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
8.8.2 Register Configuration and Description...............................................................
8.8.3 Pin Functions........................................................................................................
8.8.4 Pin States ..............................................................................................................
Port B .................................................................................................................................
8.9.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
8.9.2 Register Configuration and Description...............................................................
Section 9
9.1
9.2
iv
126
126
131
133
133
134
134
134
136
137
137
138
138
138
140
140
140
141
141
141
143
143
144
144
144
146
146
147
147
147
149
149
150
150
150
Timers ................................................................................................................ 151
Overview............................................................................................................................
Timer A..............................................................................................................................
9.2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
9.2.2 Register Descriptions............................................................................................
9.2.3 Timer Operation ...................................................................................................
9.2.4 Timer A Operation States.....................................................................................
151
152
152
153
155
156
9.3
9.4
Timer F ..............................................................................................................................
9.3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
9.3.2 Register Descriptions............................................................................................
9.3.3 Interface with the CPU .........................................................................................
9.3.4 Timer Operation ...................................................................................................
9.3.5 Application Notes.................................................................................................
Timer G..............................................................................................................................
9.4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................
9.4.2 Register Descriptions............................................................................................
9.4.3 Noise Canceller Circuit ........................................................................................
9.4.4 Timer Operation ...................................................................................................
9.4.5 Application Notes.................................................................................................
9.4.6 Sample Timer G Application................................................................................
157
157
159
166
169
171
173
173
175
179
180
184
188
Section 10 Serial Communication Interface ................................................................ 189
10.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 189
10.2 SCI1 ................................................................................................................................... 189
10.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 189
10.2.2 Register Descriptions............................................................................................ 191
10.2.3 Operation .............................................................................................................. 195
10.2.4 Interrupt Sources .................................................................................................. 197
10.3 SCI3 ................................................................................................................................... 198
10.3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 198
10.3.2 Register Descriptions............................................................................................ 200
10.3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................. 217
10.3.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode........................................................................ 222
10.3.5 Operation in Synchronous Mode.......................................................................... 230
10.3.6 Multiprocessor Communication Function............................................................ 238
10.3.7 Interrupts .............................................................................................................. 244
10.3.8 Application Notes................................................................................................. 245
Section 11 DTMF Generator ............................................................................................ 249
11.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
11.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................
11.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
11.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
11.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
11.2 Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
11.2.1 DTMF Control Register (DTCR) .........................................................................
11.2.2 DTMF Load Register (DTLR) .............................................................................
11.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................
11.3.1 Output Waveform.................................................................................................
11.3.2 Operation Flow.....................................................................................................
249
250
251
252
252
253
253
255
256
256
257
v
11.4 Typical Use........................................................................................................................ 258
11.5 Application Notes.............................................................................................................. 258
Section 12 A/D Converter ................................................................................................. 259
12.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
12.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................
12.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
12.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
12.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
12.2 Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
12.2.1 A/D Result Register (ADRR)...............................................................................
12.2.2 A/D Mode Register (AMR)..................................................................................
12.2.3 A/D Start Register (ADSR)..................................................................................
12.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................
12.3.1 A/D Conversion Operation...................................................................................
12.3.2 Start of A/D Conversion by External Trigger Input.............................................
12.4 Interrupts............................................................................................................................
12.5 Typical Use........................................................................................................................
12.6 Application Notes..............................................................................................................
259
259
260
260
261
261
261
262
263
264
264
264
265
265
268
Section 13 Power Supply Circuit .................................................................................... 269
13.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 269
13.2 Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit Formats.......................................................... 269
Section 14 Electrical Characteristics .............................................................................. 271
14.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings..............................................................................................
14.2 Electrical Characteristics ...................................................................................................
14.2.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range.......................................................
14.2.2 DC Characteristics................................................................................................
14.2.3 AC Characteristics................................................................................................
14.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics .............................................................................
14.2.5 DTMF Characteristics ..........................................................................................
14.3 Operation Timing ..............................................................................................................
14.4 Output Load Circuits .........................................................................................................
271
272
272
274
279
282
283
284
287
Appendix A CPU Instruction Set ................................................................................... 289
A.1
A.2
A.3
Instructions ........................................................................................................................ 289
Operation Code Map.......................................................................................................... 297
Number of Execution States.............................................................................................. 299
Appendix B On-Chip Registers ...................................................................................... 306
B.1
B.2
vi
I/O Registers (1) ................................................................................................................ 306
I/O Registers (2) ................................................................................................................ 310
Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams .......................................................................... 344
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.6
C.7
C.8
Port 1 Block Diagrams ......................................................................................................
Port 2 Block Diagrams ......................................................................................................
Port 5 Block Diagram........................................................................................................
Port 6 Block Diagram........................................................................................................
Port 7 Block Diagram........................................................................................................
Port 8 Block Diagram........................................................................................................
Port A Block Diagram .......................................................................................................
Port B Block Diagram .......................................................................................................
344
351
359
360
361
362
363
363
Appendix D Port States in the Different Processing States .................................... 364
Appendix E
Product Line-Up.......................................................................................... 365
Appendix F
Package Dimensions .................................................................................. 366
vii
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Overview
The H8/300L Series is a series of single-chip microcomputers (MCU: microcomputer unit), built
around the high-speed H8/300L CPU and equipped with peripheral system functions on-chip.
Within the H8/300L Series, the H8/3627 Series of single-chip microcomputers features a highprecision DTMF generator for tone dialing. Other on-chip peripheral functions include three types
of timers, two serial communication interface channels, and an A/D converter. The H8/3627 Series
includes six models, the H8/3627, H8/3626, H8/3625, H8/3624, H8/3623, and H8/3622, with
different amounts of on-chip memory: the H8/3627 has 60 kbytes of ROM and 2 kbytes of RAM;
the H8/3626 has 48 kbytes of ROM and 2 kbytes of RAM; the H8/3625 has 40 kbytes of ROM
and 2 kbytes of RAM; the H8/3624S has 32 kbytes of ROM and 1 kbyte of RAM; the H8/3623S
has 24 kbytes of ROM and 1 kbyte of RAM; and the H8/3622S has 16 kbytes of ROM and 1 kbyte
of RAM. In addition, thanks to the improvement of the power supply circuit, low power
consumption and low radiation noise have been realized.
The H8/3627 has a ZTAT* version with user-programmable on-chip PROM.
Table 1.1 summarizes the features of the H8/3627 Series.
Note: * ZTAT TM is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
1
Table 1.1
Features
Item
Description
CPU
High-speed H8/300L CPU
•
General-register architecture
 General registers: Sixteen 8-bit registers (can be used as eight 16-bit
registers)
•
Operating speed
 Max. operating speed: 5 MHz
 Add/subtract: 0.4 µs (operating at ø= 5 MHz)
 Multiply/divide: 2.8 µs (operating at ø= 5 MHz)
 Can run on 32.768 kHz subclock
•
Instruction set compatible with H8/300 CPU
 Instruction length of 2 bytes or 4 bytes
 Basic arithmetic operations between registers
 MOV instruction for data transfer between memory and registers
•
Instruction features
 Multiply (8 bits × 8 bits)
 Divide (16 bits ÷ 8 bits)
 Bit accumulator
 Register-indirect designation of bit position
Interrupts
Clock pulse
generators
Power-down
modes
2
29 interrupt sources
•
13 external interrupt sources: IRQ4 to IRQ 0, WKP 7 to WKP0
•
16 internal interrupt sources
Two on-chip clock pulse generators
•
System clock pulse generator: 1 MHz to 10 MHz
•
Subclock pulse generator: 32.768 kHz
Six power-down modes
•
Sleep mode
•
Standby mode
•
Watch mode
•
Subsleep mode
•
Subactive mode
•
Active (medium-speed) mode
Table 1.1
Features (cont)
Item
Description
Memory
Large on-chip memory
I/O ports
Timers
•
H8/3627:
60-kbyte ROM, 2-kbyte RAM
•
H8/3626:
48-kbyte ROM, 2-kbyte RAM
•
H8/3625:
40-kbyte ROM, 2-kbyte RAM
•
H8/3624S: 32-kbyte ROM, 1-kbyte RAM
•
H8/3623S: 24-kbyte ROM, 1-kbyte RAM
•
H8/3622S: 16-kbyte ROM, 1-kbyte RAM
53 I/O ports
•
I/O pins: 50
•
Input pins: 3
3 on-chip timers
•
Timer A: 8-bit timer with built-in interval/watch clock time base function
 Count-up timer with selection of eight internal clock signals divided from
the system clock (ø)* and four clock signals divided from the watch
clock (øw)*
•
Timer F: 16-bit timer with built-in output compare function
 Can be used as two independent 8-bit timers.
 Count-up timer with selection of four internal clock signals or event
input from external pin
 Compare-match function with toggle output
•
Timer G: 8-bit timer with built-in input capture/interval functions
 Count-up timer with selection of four internal clock signals
 Input capture function with built-in noise canceller circuit
Serial
communication
interface
Two serial communication interface channels on chip
•
SCI1: synchronous serial interface
 Choice of 8-bit or 16-bit data transfer
•
SCI3: 8-bit synchronous or asynchronous serial interface
 Built-in function for multiprocessor communication
Note: * ø and øw are defined in section 4, Clock Pulse Generators.
3
Table 1.1
Features (cont)
Item
Description
A/D converter
8-bit successive-approximations A/D converter using a resistance ladder
DTMF generator
•
2-channel analog input port
•
Conversion time: 31/ø, 62/ø or 124/ø per channel
Built-in tone dialer supporting OSC clock frequencies from 1.2 MHz to 10 MHz
in 400-kHz steps
Product lineup
4
Product Code
Mask ROM
Version
ZTAT™
Version
HD6433627H
Package
ROM/RAM Size
HD6473627H
64-pin QFP
(FP-64A)
ROM: 60 kbytes
RAM: 2 kbytes
HD6433627FP
HD6473627FP
64-pin LQFP
(FP-64E)
HD6433626H
—
64-pin QFP
(FP-64A)
HD6433626FP
—
64-pin LQFP
(FP-64E)
HD6433625H
—
64-pin QFP
(FP-64A)
HD6433625FP
—
64-pin LQFP
(FP-64E)
HD6433624SH
—
64-pin QFP
(FP-64A)
HD6433624SFP
—
64-pin LQFP
(FP-64E)
HD6433623SH
—
64-pin QFP
(FP-64A)
HD6433623SFP
—
64-pin LQFP
(FP-64E)
HD6433622SH
—
64-pin QFP
(FP-64A)
HD6433622SFP
—
64-pin LQFP
(FP-64E)
ROM: 48 kbytes
RAM: 2 kbytes
ROM: 40 kbytes
RAM: 2 kbytes
ROM: 32 kbytes
RAM: 1 kbyte
ROM: 24 kbytes
RAM: 1 kbyte
ROM: 16 kbytes
RAM: 1 kbyte
1.2
Internal Block Diagram
OSC2
OSC1
X1
X2
Subclock pulse
generator
System clock
pulse generator
Timer A
SCI1
Port A
RAM
(1 k/2 kbytes)
PA3
PA2
PA1
Port 8
ROM
16 k/24 k/
32 k/40 k/
48 k/60 k
bytes
P87
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
SCI3
Timer G
DTMF
A/D converter
TONED
Port B
VTref
Port 5
Timer F
PB6/AN6
PB7/AN7
P60
P61
P62
P63
P64
P65
P66
P67
Data bus (lower)
Port 6
P50/WKP0
P51/WKP1
P52/WKP2
P53/WKP3
P54/WKP4
P55/WKP5
P56/WKP6
P57/WKP7
CPU (8-bit)
Port 7
Port 1
P20/IRQ4/ADTRG
P21/SCK1
P22/SI1
P23/SO1
P24/SCK3
P25/RXD
P26/TXD
P27/IRQ0
Data bus (upper)
P10/TMOW
P11/TMOFL
P12/TMOFH
P13/TMIG
P14
P15/IRQ1
P16/IRQ2
P17/IRQ3/TMIF
Port 2
Address bus
VSS
VCC
CVCC
RES
TEST
Figure 1.1 shows a block diagram of the H8/3627 Series.
Figure 1.1 Block Diagram
5
1.3
Pin Arrangement and Functions
1.3.1
Pin Arrangement
P55/WKP5
P56/WKP6
P57/WKP7
P60
P61
P62
P63
P64
P65
P66
P67
P70
P71
P72
P73
P74
The H8/3627 Series pin arrangement is shown in figure 1.2.
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
29
P51/WKP1
P81
53
28
P50/WKP0
P82
54
27
PA1
P83
55
26
PA2
P84
56
25
PA3
P85
57
24
P10/TMOW
P86
58
23
P11/TMOFL
P87
59
22
P12/TMOFH
TONED
60
21
P13/TMIG
VTref
61
20
P14
PB7/AN7
62
19
P15/IRQ1
PB6/AN6
63
18
P16/IRQ2
CVCC
64
17
P17/IRQ3/TMIF
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P27/IRQ0
7
P26/TXD
6
P25/RXD
5
P24/SCK3
4
P23/SO1
3
P22/SI1
2
P21/SCK1
1
P20/IRQ4/ADTRG
52
RES
P52/WKP2
P80
VCC
30
OSC1
51
TEST
P53/WKP3
P77
OSC2
P54/WKP4
31
VSS
32
50
X2
49
P76
X1
P75
Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement (FP-64A, FP-64E: Top View)
6
1.3.2
Pin Functions
Table 1.2 outlines the pin functions.
Table 1.2
Pin Functions
Pin No.
FP-64A
FP-64E
I/O
Name and Functions
Power
VCC
source pins
7
Input
Power supply: All V CC pins should be connected to
the system power supply (+5 V)
VSS
3
Input
Ground: All V SS pins should be connected to the
system power supply (0 V)
CV CC
64
Input
Connected a 0.1 µF stabilization capacitor between
the CV CC pin and ground.
VT ref
61
Input
DTMF generator reference level: This is a power
supply pin for the reference level for DTMF.
OSC 1
5
Input
OSC 2
4
Output
System clock: These pins connect to a crystal or
ceramic oscillator, or can be used to input external
an clock. See section 4, Clock Pulse Generators, for
a typical connection diagram.
X1
1
Input
X2
2
Output
Subclock: These pins connect to a 32.768-kHz
crystal oscillator. See section 4, Clock Pulse
Generators, for a typical connection diagram.
System
control
RES
8
Input
Reset: When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset
TEST
6
Input
Test: This is a test pin, not for use in applica-tion
systems. It should be connected to VSS.
Interrupt
pins
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
16
19
18
17
9
Input
External interrupt request 0 to 4: These are input
pins for external interrupts for which there is a choice
between rising and falling edge sensing
WKP 7 to
WKP 0
35 to 28
Input
Wakeup interrupt request 0 to 7: These are input
pins for external interrupts that are detected at the
falling edge
Type
Clock pins
Symbol
7
Table 1.2
Pin Functions (cont)
Pin No.
Type
Symbol
FP-64A
FP-64E
I/O
Name and Functions
Timer pins
TMOW
24
Output
Clock output: This is an output pin for wave-forms
generated by the timer A output circuit
TMIF
17
Input
Timer F event counter input: This is an event input
pin for input to the timer F counter
TMOFL
23
Output
Timer FL output: This is an output pin for
waveforms generated by the timer FL output
compare function
TMOFH
22
Output
Timer FH output: This is an output pin for
waveforms generated by the timer FH output
compare function
TMIG
21
Input
Timer G capture input: This is an input pin for the
timer G input capture function
PB7, PB6
62 to 63
Input
Port B: This is a 2-bit input port
PA3 to
PA1
25 to 27
I/O
Port A: This is a 3-bit I/O port. Input or output can
be designated for each bit by means of port control
register A (PCRA).
P17 to
P10
17 to 24
I/O
Port 1: This is an 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can
be designated for each bit be means of port control
register 1 (PCR1).
P27
16
Input
Port 2 (bit 7): This is a 1-bit input port.
P26 to
P20
15 to 9
I/O
Port 2 (bits 6 to 0): This is a 7-bit I/O port. Input or
output can be designated for each bit by means of
port control register 2 (PCR2).
P57 to
P50
35 to 28
I/O
Port 5: This is an 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can
be designated for each bit by means of port control
register 5 (PCR5).
P67 to
P60
43 to 36
I/O
Port 6: This is an 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can
be designated for each bit by means of port control
register 6 (PCR6).
P77 to
P70
51 to 44
I/O
Port 7: This is an 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can
be designated for each bit by means of port control
register 7 (PCR7).
P87 to
P80
59 to 52
I/O
Port 8: This is an 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can
be designated for each bit by means of port control
register 8 (PCR8).
I/O ports
8
Table 1.2
Pin Functions (cont)
Pin No.
Type
Symbol
FP-64A
FP-64E
I/O
Name and Functions
Serial communication
interface
(SCI)
SI 1
11
Input
SCI1 receive data input: This is the SCI1 data input
pin
SO1
12
Output
SCI1 send data output: This is the SCI1 data
output pin
SCK 1
10
I/O
SCI1 clock I/O :This is the SCI1 clock I/O pin
RXD
14
Input
SCI3 receive data input: This is the SCI3 data input
pin
TXD
15
Output
SCI3 send data output: This is the SCI3 data
output pin
SCK 3
13
I/O
SCI3 clock I/O: This is the SCI3 clock I/O pin
AN 7, AN 6
62, 63
Input
Analog input channels 6, 7: These are analog data
input channels to the A/D converter
ADTRG
9
Input
A/D converter trigger input: This is the external
trigger input pin to the A/D converter
TONED
60
Output
DTMF signal: This is the output pin for the DTMF
signal
A/D
c onv erter
DTMF
generator
9
10
Section 2 CPU
2.1
Overview
The H8/300L CPU has sixteen 8-bit general registers, which can also be paired as eight 16-bit
registers. Its concise, optimized instruction set is designed for high-speed operation.
2.1.1
Features
Features of the H8/300L CPU are listed below.
• General-register architecture
Sixteen 8-bit general registers, also usable as eight 16-bit general registers
• Instruction set with 55 basic instructions, including:
 Multiply and divide instructions
 Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
• Eight addressing modes
 Register direct
 Register indirect
 Register indirect with displacement
 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement
 Absolute address
 Immediate
 Program-counter relative
 Memory indirect
• 64-kbyte address space
• High-speed operation
 All frequently used instructions are executed in two to four states
 High-speed arithmetic and logic operations
8- or 16-bit register-register add or subtract: 0.4 µs*
8 × 8-bit multiply:
2.8 µs*
16 ÷ 8-bit divide:
2.8 µs*
• Low-power operation modes
SLEEP instruction for transition to low-power operation
Note: * These values are at ø = 5 MHz.
11
2.1.2
Address Space
The H8/300L CPU supports an address space of up to 64 kbytes for storing program code and
data.
See 2.8, Memory Map, for details of the memory map.
2.1.3
Register Configuration
Figure 2.1 shows the register structure of the H8/300L CPU. There are two groups of registers: the
general registers and control registers.
General registers (Rn)
7
0 7
0
R0H
R0L
R1H
R1L
R2H
R2L
R3H
R3L
R4H
R4L
R5H
R5L
R6H
R7H
R6L
(SP)
SP: Stack Pointer
R7L
Control registers (CR)
15
0
PC
PC: Program Counter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CCR I U H U N Z V C
CCR: Condition Code Register
Carry flag
Overflow flag
Zero flag
Negative flag
Half-carry flag
Interrupt mask bit
User bit
User bit
Figure 2.1 CPU Registers
12
2.2
Register Descriptions
2.2.1
General Registers
All the general registers have the same functions, and can be used as both data registers and
address registers.
When used as data registers, they can be accessed as 16-bit registers (R0 to R7), or the high bytes
(R0H to R7H) and low bytes (R0L to R7L) can be accessed separately as 8-bit registers.
When used as address registers, the general registers are accessed as 16-bit registers (R0 to R7).
R7 also functions as the stack pointer (SP), used implicitly by hardware in exception handling and
subroutine calls. When it functions as the stack pointer, as indicated in figure 2.2, SP (R7) points
to the top of the stack.
Lower address side [H'0000]
Unused area
SP (R7)
Stack area
Upper address side [H'FFFF]
Figure 2.2 Stack Pointer
2.2.2
Control Registers
The CPU control registers include a 16-bit program counter (PC) and an 8-bit condition code
register (CCR).
(1) Program Counter (PC): This 16-bit register indicates the address of the next instruction the
CPU will execute. All instructions are fetched 16 bits (1 word) at a time, so the least significant bit
of the PC is ignored (always regarded as 0).
13
(2) Condition Code Register (CCR): This 8-bit register contains internal status information,
including the interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and
carry (C) flags. These bits can be read and written by software (using the LDC, STC, ANDC,
ORC, and XORC instructions). The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for
conditional branching (Bcc) instructions.
Bit 7—Interrupt Mask Bit (I): When this bit is set to 1, interrupts are masked. This bit is set to 1
automatically at the start of exception handling. The interrupt mask bit may be read and written by
software. For further details, see 3.3, Interrupts.
Bit 6—User Bit (U): Can be used freely by the user.
Bit 5—Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B
instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and is cleared to 0
otherwise.
The H flag is used implicitly by the DAA and DAS instructions.
When the ADD.W, SUB.W, or CMP.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a
carry or borrow at bit 11, and is cleared to 0 otherwise.
Bit 4—User Bit (U): Can be used freely by the user.
Bit 3—Negative Flag (N): Indicates the most significant bit (sign bit) of the result of an
instruction.
Bit 2—Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate a zero result, and cleared to 0 to indicate a non-zero
result.
Bit 1—Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other
times.
Bit 0—Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by:
• Add instructions, to indicate a carry
• Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
• Shift/rotate carry
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions.
Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged.
Refer to the H8/300L Series Programming Manual for the action of each instruction on the flag
bits.
14
2.2.3
Initial Register Values
When the CPU is reset, the program counter (PC) is initialized to the value stored at address
H'0000 in the vector table, and the I bit in the CCR is set to 1. The other CCR bits and the general
registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (R7) is not initialized. R7 initialization
should therefore be carried out immediately after a reset.
2.3
Data Formats
The H8/300L CPU can process 1-bit data, 4-bit (BCD) data, 8-bit (byte) data, and 16-bit (word)
data.
Bit manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data specified as bit n in a byte operand
(n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7).
All arithmetic and logic instructions except ADDS and SUBS can operate on byte data.
The MOV.W, ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, ADDS, SUBS, MULXU (8 bits × 8 bits), and DIVXU
(16 bits ÷ 8 bits) instructions operate on word data.
The DAA and DAS instructions perform decimal arithmetic adjustments on byte data in two-digit
4-bit BCD form.
15
2.3.1
Data Formats in General Registers
General register data formats are shown in figure 2.3.
Data Type
Register No.
Data Format
7
1-bit data
RnH
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Don’t care
7
1-bit data
RnL
Byte data
RnH
Byte data
RnL
Word data
Rn
4-bit BCD data
RnH
Don’t care
7
7
0
MSB
LSB
Don’t care
0
6
5
2
1
0
Don’t care
7
0
MSB
LSB
15
0
LSB
4
3
Upper digit
0
Lower digit
Don’t care
7
Don’t care
RnL
4
Upper digit
Legend:
RnH: Upper byte of general register
RnL: Lower byte of general register
MSB: Most significant bit
LSB: Least significant bit
Figure 2.3 Register Data Formats
16
3
MSB
7
4-bit BCD data
4
0
3
Lower digit
2.3.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.4 indicates the data formats in memory. For access by the H8/300L CPU, word data
stored in memory must always begin at an even address. In word access the least significant bit of
the address is regarded as 0. If an odd address is specified, the access is performed at the preceding
even address. This rule affects the MOV.W instruction, and also applies to instruction fetching.
Data Type
Address
Data Format
7
1-bit data
Address n
7
Byte data
Address n
MSB
Even address
MSB
Word data
Odd address
Byte data (CCR) on stack
Word data on stack
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LSB
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
LSB
Even address
MSB
CCR
LSB
Odd address
MSB
CCR*
LSB
Even address
MSB
Odd address
LSB
CCR: Condition code register
Note: * Ignored on return
Figure 2.4 Memory Data Formats
When the stack is accessed using R7 as an address register, word access should always be
performed. When the CCR is pushed on the stack, two identical copies of the CCR are pushed to
make a complete word. When they are restored, the lower byte is ignored.
17
2.4
Addressing Modes
2.4.1
Addressing Modes
The H8/300L CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.1. Each instruction uses a
subset of these addressing modes.
Table 2.1
Addressing Modes
No.
Address Modes
Symbol
1
Register direct
Rn
2
Register indirect
@Rn
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16, Rn)
4
Register indirect with post-increment
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@Rn+
@–Rn
5
Absolute address
@aa:8 or @aa:16
6
Immediate
#xx:8 or #xx:16
7
Program-counter relative
@(d:8, PC)
8
Memory indirect
@@aa:8
1. Register Direct—Rn: The register field of the instruction specifies an 8- or 16-bit general
register containing the operand.
Only the MOV.W, ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, ADDS, SUBS, MULXU (8 bits × 8 bits), and
DIVXU (16 bits ÷ 8 bits) instructions have 16-bit operands.
2. Register Indirect—@Rn: The register field of the instruction specifies a 16-bit general
register containing the address of the operand in memory.
3. Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, Rn): The instruction has a second word
(bytes 3 and 4) containing a displacement which is added to the contents of the specified general
register to obtain the operand address in memory.
This mode is used only in MOV instructions. For the MOV.W instruction, the resulting address
must be even.
18
4. Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@Rn+ or @–Rn:
• Register indirect with post-increment—@Rn+
The @Rn+ mode is used with MOV instructions that load registers from memory.
The register field of the instruction specifies a 16-bit general register containing the address of
the operand. After the operand is accessed, the register is incremented by 1 for MOV.B or 2 for
MOV.W. For MOV.W, the original contents of the 16-bit general register must be even.
• Register indirect with pre-decrement—@–Rn
The @–Rn mode is used with MOV instructions that store register contents to memory.
The register field of the instruction specifies a 16-bit general register which is decremented by
1 or 2 to obtain the address of the operand in memory. The register retains the decremented
value. The size of the decrement is 1 for MOV.B or 2 for MOV.W. For MOV.W, the original
contents of the register must be even.
5. Absolute Address—@aa:8 or @aa:16: The instruction specifies the absolute address of the
operand in memory.
The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8) or 16 bits long (@aa:16). The MOV.B and bit
manipulation instructions can use 8-bit absolute addresses. The MOV.B, MOV.W, JMP, and JSR
instructions can use 16-bit absolute addresses.
For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 8 bits are assumed to be 1 (H'FF). The address range is
H'FF00 to H'FFFF (65280 to 65535).
6. Immediate—#xx:8 or #xx:16: The instruction contains an 8-bit operand (#xx:8) in its second
byte, or a 16-bit operand (#xx:16) in its third and fourth bytes. Only MOV.W instructions can
contain 16-bit immediate values.
The ADDS and SUBS instructions implicitly contain the value 1 or 2 as immediate data. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the second or fourth byte of the
instruction, specifying a bit number.
7. Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC): This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR
instructions. An 8-bit displacement in byte 2 of the instruction code is sign-extended to 16 bits and
added to the program counter contents to generate a branch destination address. The possible
branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) from the current address. The result of
the addition should be an even number.
19
8. Memory Indirect—@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The
second byte of the instruction code specifies an 8-bit absolute address. The word located at this
address contains the branch destination address.
The upper 8 bits of the absolute address are assumed to be 0 (H'00), so the address range is H'0000
to H'00FF (0 to 255). Note that with the H8/300L Series, the lower end of the address area is also
used as a vector area. See 3.3, Interrupts, for details on the vector area.
If an odd address is specified as a branch destination or as the operand address of a MOV.W
instruction, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing word access to be performed at the
address preceding the specified address. See 2.3.2, Memory Data Formats, for further information.
2.4.2
Effective Address Calculation
Table 2.2 shows how effective addresses are calculated in each of the addressing modes.
Arithmetic and logic instructions use register direct addressing (1). The ADD.B, ADDX, SUBX,
CMP.B, AND, OR, and XOR instructions can also use immediate addressing (6).
Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative (7) and
memory indirect (8).
Bit manipulation instructions use register direct (1), register indirect (2), or 8-bit absolute
addressing (5) to specify a byte operand, and 3-bit immediate addressing (6) to specify a bit
position in that byte. The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions can also use register direct
addressing (1) to specify the bit position.
20
Table 2.2
Effective Address Calculation
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
1
Register direct, Rn
Effective Address
Calculation Method
Effective Address (EA)
3
0
rm
15
87
op
2
43
rm
rn
Operand is contents of
registers indicated by rm/rn
15
0
Contents (16 bits) of
register indicated by rm
76 43
op
3
15
0
15
0
15
0
15
0
0
rm
Register indirect with
displacement, @(d:16, Rn)
15
0
rn
0
Register indirect, @Rn
15
3
76 43
op
15
0
Contents (16 bits) of
register indicated by rm
0
rm
disp
disp
4
Register indirect with
post-increment, @Rn+
15
76 43
op
15
0
Contents (16 bits) of
register indicated by rm
0
rm
1 or 2
Register indirect with
pre-decrement, @–Rn
15
76 43
op
rm
15
0
Contents (16 bits) of
register indicated by rm
0
Incremented or
decremented by 1 if
operand is byte size, 1 or 2
and by 2 if word size
21
Table 2.2
No.
5
Effective Address Calculation (cont)
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
Effective Address
Calculation Method
Effective Address (EA)
Absolute address
@aa:8
15
87
op
15
87
0
H'FF
0
abs
@aa:16
15
15
0
0
op
abs
6
Immediate
#xx:8
15
Operand is 1- or 2-byte
immediate data
87
op
0
IMM
#xx:16
15
0
op
IMM
7
Program-counter relative
@(d:8, PC)
15
87
op
22
0
disp
15
0
PC contents
15
Sign
extension
disp
0
Table 2.2
Effective Address Calculation (cont)
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
8
Memory indirect, @@aa:8
15
87
op
Effective Address
Calculation Method
Effective Address (EA)
0
abs
15
87
H'00
0
abs
15
0
Memory contents
(16 bits)
Legend:
rm, rn: Register field
op:
Operation field
disp: Displacement
IMM: Immediate data
abs: Absolute address
23
2.5
Instruction Set
The H8/300L Series can use a total of 55 instructions, which are grouped by function in table 2.3.
Table 2.3
Instruction Set
Function
Instructions
*1
Number
*1
Data transfer
MOV, PUSH , POP
1
Arithmetic operations
ADD, SUB, ADDX, SUBX, INC, DEC, ADDS,
SUBS, DAA, DAS, MULXU, DIVXU, CMP, NEG
14
Logic operations
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
4
Shift
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR,
ROTXL, ROTXR
8
Bit manipulation
BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BAND, BIAND, BOR,
BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST
14
Branch
Bcc*2 , JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS
5
System control
RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP
8
Block data transfer
EEPMOV
1
Total: 55
Notes: 1. PUSH Rn is equivalent to MOV.W Rn, @–SP.
POP Rn is equivalent to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. The machine language is also the same.
2. Bcc is a conditional branch instruction in which cc represents a condition code.
The following sections give a concise summary of the instructions in each category, and indicate
the bit patterns of their object code. The notation used is defined next.
The functions of the instructions are shown in tables 2.4 to 2.11. The meaning of the operation
symbols used in the tables is as follows.
24
Notation
Rd
General register (destination)
Rs
General register (source)
Rn
General register
(EAd), <EAd>
Destination operand
(EAs), <EAs>
Source operand
CCR
Condition code register
N
N (negative) flag of CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag of CCR
V
V (overflow) flag of CCR
C
C (carry) flag of CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#IMM
Immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
AND logical
∨
OR logical
⊕
Exclusive OR logical
→
Move
~
Logical negation (logical complement)
:3
3-bit length
:8
8-bit length
:16
16-bit length
( ), < >
Contents of operand indicated by effective address
25
2.5.1
Data Transfer Instructions
Table 2.4 describes the data transfer instructions. Figure 2.5 shows their object code formats.
Table 2.4
Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
MOV
B/W
(EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a general
register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register.
The Rn, @Rn, @(d:16, Rn), @aa:16, #xx:16, @–Rn, and @Rn+
addressing modes are available for byte or word data. The @aa:8
addressing mode is available for byte data only.
The @–R7 and @R7+ modes require word operands. Do not specify
byte size for these two modes.
POP
W
@SP+ → Rn
Pops a 16-bit general register from the stack. Equivalent to MOV.W
@SP+, Rn.
PUSH
W
Rn → @–SP
Pushes a 16-bit general register onto the stack. Equivalent to
MOV.W Rn, @–SP.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
W: Word
Certain precautions are required in data access. See 2.9.1, Notes on Data Access, for details.
26
15
8
7
0
op
rm
15
8
8
Rm→Rn
7
0
op
15
rn
MOV
rm
rn
rm
rn
@Rm←→Rn
7
0
op
@(d:16, Rm)←→Rn
disp
15
8
7
0
op
rm
15
8
op
7
0
rn
15
@Rm+→Rn, or
Rn →@–Rm
rn
abs
8
@aa:8←→Rn
7
0
op
rn
@aa:16←→Rn
abs
15
8
op
7
0
rn
15
IMM
8
#xx:8→Rn
7
0
op
rn
#xx:16→Rn
IMM
15
8
op
7
0
1
1
1
rn
PUSH, POP
@SP+ → Rn, or
Rn → @–SP
Legend:
op:
Operation field
rm, rn: Register field
disp: Displacement
abs:
Absolute address
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.5 Data Transfer Instruction Codes
27
2.5.2
Arithmetic Operations
Table 2.5 describes the arithmetic instructions.
Table 2.5
Arithmetic Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
ADD
B/W
Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd + #IMM → Rd
SUB
ADDX
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or
addition on immediate data and data in a general register. Immediate
data cannot be subtracted from data in a general register. Word data
can be added or subtracted only when both words are in general
registers.
B
SUBX
INC
Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on byte data in
two general registers, or addition or subtraction on immediate data
and data in a general register.
B
DEC
ADDS
W
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd
Adds or subtracts immediate data to or from data in a general
register. The immediate data must be 1 or 2.
B
DAS
MULXU
Rd ± 1 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register
SUBS
DAA
Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd
Rd decimal adjust → Rd
Decimal-adjusts (adjusts to packed 4-bit BCD) an addition or
subtraction result in a general register by referring to the CCR
B
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs 8-bit × 8-bit unsigned multiplication on data in two general
registers, providing a 16-bit result
DIVXU
B
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs 16-bit ÷ 8-bit unsigned division on data in two general
registers, providing an 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder
CMP
B/W
Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another general
register or with immediate data, and the result is stored in the CCR.
Word data can be compared only between two general registers.
NEG
B
0 – Rd → Rd
Obtains the two’s complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a
general register
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
W: Word
28
2.5.3
Logic Operations
Table 2.6 describes the four instructions that perform logic operations.
Table 2.6
Logic Operation Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
AND
B
Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data
OR
B
Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data
XOR
B
Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data
NOT
B
~ Rd → Rd
Obtains the one’s complement (logical complement) of general
register contents
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
2.5.4
Shift Operations
Table 2.7 describes the eight shift instructions.
Table 2.7
Shift Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
SHAL
B
Rd shift → Rd
SHAR
SHLL
Performs an arithmetic shift operation on general register contents
B
SHLR
ROTL
Performs a logical shift operation on general register contents
B
ROTR
ROTXL
Rd shift → Rd
Rd rotate → Rd
Rotates general register contents
B
ROTXR
Rd rotate through carry → Rd
Rotates general register contents through the C (carry) bit
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
29
Figure 2.6 shows the instruction code format of arithmetic, logic, and shift instructions.
15
8
7
op
0
rm
15
8
7
0
op
15
7
op
0
rm
8
op
0
0
rm
8
AND, OR, XOR (Rm)
0
IMM
8
op
rn
7
rn
15
ADD, ADDX, SUBX,
CMP (#XX:8)
7
op
15
MULXU, DIVXU
IMM
8
op
rn
7
rn
15
ADDS, SUBS, INC, DEC,
DAA, DAS, NEG, NOT
rn
8
15
ADD, SUB, CMP,
ADDX, SUBX (Rm)
rn
AND, OR, XOR (#xx:8)
7
0
rn
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR,
ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR
Legend:
op:
Operation field
rm, rn: Register field
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.6 Arithmetic, Logic, and Shift Instruction Codes
30
2.5.5
Bit Manipulations
Table 2.8 describes the bit-manipulation instructions. Figure 2.7 shows their object code formats.
Table 2.8
Bit-Manipulation Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
BSET
B
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory to 1. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of
a general register.
BCLR
B
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory to 0. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of
a general register.
BNOT
B
~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of
a general register.
BTST
B
~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory and sets or
clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register.
BAND
B
C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the C flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory,
and stores the result in the C flag.
BIAND
B
C ∧ [~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
ANDs the C flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory, and stores the result in the C flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BOR
B
C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the C flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory,
and stores the result in the C flag.
BIOR
B
C ∨ [~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
ORs the C flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register
or memory, and stores the result in the C flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
31
Table 2.8
Bit-Manipulation Instructions (cont)
Instruction
Size*
Function
BXOR
B
C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
XORs the C flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory,
and stores the result in the C flag.
BIXOR
B
C ⊕ [~(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
XORs the C flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory, and stores the result in the C flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BLD
B
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Copies a specified bit in a general register or memory to the C flag.
BILD
B
~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Copies the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory
to the C flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BST
B
C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Copies the C flag to a specified bit in a general register or memory.
BIST
B
~ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Copies the inverse of the C flag to a specified bit in a general
register or memory.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
Certain precautions are required in bit manipulation. See 2.9.2, Notes on Bit Manipulation, for
details.
32
BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST
15
8
7
op
0
IMM
15
8
7
op
0
rm
15
8
Operand: register direct (Rn)
Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3)
rn
Operand: register direct (Rn)
Bit No.: register direct (Rm)
rn
7
0
rn
0
0
0
0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn)
IMM
0
0
0
0 Bit No.:
op
rn
0
0
0
0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn)
op
rm
0
0
0
0 Bit No.:
op
op
15
8
15
8
7
0
7
abs
IMM
15
8
0
Operand: absolute (@aa:8)
0
0
7
0 Bit No.:
immediate (#xx:3)
0
op
abs
op
register direct (Rm)
0
op
op
immediate (#xx:3)
rm
0
Operand: absolute (@aa:8)
0
0
0 Bit No.:
register direct (Rm)
BAND, BOR, BXOR, BLD, BST
15
8
7
op
0
IMM
15
8
7
op
op
15
8
Operand: register direct (Rn)
Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3)
rn
0
rn
0
0
0
0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn)
IMM
0
0
0
0 Bit No.:
7
0
op
abs
op
immediate (#xx:3)
IMM
0
Operand: absolute (@aa:8)
0
0
0 Bit No.:
immediate (#xx:3)
Legend:
op:
Operation field
rm, rn: Register field
abs:
Absolute address
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instruction Codes
33
BIAND, BIOR, BIXOR, BILD, BIST
15
8
7
op
0
IMM
15
8
7
op
op
15
8
Operand: register direct (Rn)
Bit No.: immediate (#xx:3)
rn
0
rn
0
0
0
0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn)
IMM
0
0
0
0 Bit No.:
7
0
op
abs
op
immediate (#xx:3)
IMM
0
Operand: absolute (@aa:8)
0
0
0 Bit No.:
immediate (#xx:3)
Legend:
op:
Operation field
rm, rn: Register field
abs:
Absolute address
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instruction Codes (cont)
34
2.5.6
Branching Instructions
Table 2.9 describes the branching instructions. Figure 2.8 shows their object code formats.
Table 2.9
Branching Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
Bcc
—
Branches to the designated address if the specified condition is true.
The branching conditions are given below.
Mnemonic
Description
Condition
BRA (BT)
Always (true)
Always
BRN (BF)
Never (false)
Never
BHI
High
C∨Z=0
BLS
Low or same
C∨Z=1
BCC (BHS)
Carry clear (high or same)
C=0
BCS (BLO)
Carry set (low)
C=1
BNE
Not equal
Z=0
BEQ
Equal
Z=1
BVC
Overflow clear
V=0
BVS
Overflow set
V=1
BPL
Plus
N=0
BMI
Minus
N=1
BGE
Greater or equal
N⊕V=0
BLT
Less than
N⊕V=1
BGT
Greater than
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0
BLE
Less or equal
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 1
JMP
—
Branches unconditionally to a specified address
BSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address
JSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address
RTS
—
Returns from a subroutine
35
15
8
op
7
0
cc
15
disp
8
7
op
0
rm
15
Bcc
8
0
0
0
7
0
JMP (@Rm)
0
op
JMP (@aa:16)
abs
15
8
7
0
op
abs
15
8
JMP (@@aa:8)
7
0
op
disp
15
8
7
op
0
rm
15
BSR
8
0
0
0
7
0
JSR (@Rm)
0
op
JSR (@aa:16)
abs
15
8
7
op
0
abs
15
8
7
op
Legend:
op: Operation field
cc: Condition field
rm: Register field
disp: Displacement
abs: Absolute address
Figure 2.8 Branching Instruction Codes
36
JSR (@@aa:8)
0
RTS
2.5.7
System Control Instructions
Table 2.10 describes the system control instructions. Figure 2.9 shows their object code formats.
Table 2.10
System Control Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
RTE
—
Returns from an exception-handling routine
SLEEP
—
Causes a transition from active mode to a power-down mode. See
section 5, Power-Down Modes, for details
LDC
B
Rs → CCR, #IMM → CCR
Moves immediate data or general register contents to the condition
code register
STC
B
CCR → Rd
Copies the condition code register to a specified general register
ANDC
B
CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR
Logically ANDs the condition code register with immediate data
ORC
B
CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR
Logically ORs the condition code register with immediate data
XORC
B
CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR
Logically exclusive-ORs the condition code register with immediate
data
NOP
—
PC + 2 → PC
Only increments the program counter
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
37
15
8
7
0
op
15
8
RTE, SLEEP, NOP
7
0
op
15
rn
8
7
LDC, STC (Rn)
0
op
IMM
ANDC, ORC,
XORC, LDC (#xx:8)
Legend:
op: Operation field
rn: Register field
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.9 System Control Instruction Codes
2.5.8
Block Data Transfer Instruction
Table 2.11 describes the block data transfer instruction. Figure 2.10 shows its object code format.
Table 2.11 Block Data Transfer Instruction
Instruction
Size
Function
EEPMOV
—
If R4L ≠ 0 then
repeat @R5+ → @R6+, R4L – 1 → R4L
until
R4L = 0
else next;
Block transfer instruction. Transfers the number of bytes specified by
R4L, from locations starting at the address specified by R5, to
locations starting at the address specified by R6. On completion of
the transfer, the next instruction is executed.
Certain precautions are required in using the EEPMOV instruction. See 2.9.3, Notes on Use of the
EEPMOV Instruction, for details.
38
15
8
7
0
op
op
Legend:
op: Operation field
Figure 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instruction Code
39
2.6
Basic Operational Timing
CPU operation is synchronized by a system clock (ø) or a subclock (øSUB). For details on these
clock signals see section 4, Clock Pulse Generators. The period from a rising edge of ø or øSUB to
the next rising edge is called one state. A bus cycle consists of two states or three states. The cycle
differs depending on whether access is to on-chip memory or to on-chip peripheral modules.
2.6.1
Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM)
Acess to on-chip memory takes place in two states. The data bus width is 16 bits, allowing access
in byte or word size. Figure 2.11 shows the on-chip memory access cycle.
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
ø or ø SUB
Internal address bus
Address
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
(read access)
Read data
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
(write access)
Write data
Figure 2.11 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
40
2.6.2
Access to On-Chip Peripheral Modules
On-chip peripheral modules are accessed in two states or three states. The data bus width is 8 bits,
so access is by byte size only. This means that for accessing word data, two instructions must be
used.
Two-state access to on-chip peripheral modules
Figure 2.12 shows operation timings for accessing on-chip peripheral modules in 2 states.
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
ø or ø SUB
Internal address bus
Address
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
(read access)
Read data
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
(write access)
Write data
Figure 2.12 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (2-State Access)
Three-state access to on-chip peripheral modules
Figure 2.13 shows operation timings for accessing on-chip peripheral modules in 3 states.
41
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø or ø SUB
Internal
address bus
Address
Internal
read signal
Internal
data bus
(read access)
Read data
Internal
write signal
Internal
data bus
(write access)
Write data
Figure 2.13 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access)
2.7
CPU States
2.7.1
Overview
There are four CPU states: the reset state, program execution state, program halt state, and
exception-handling state. The program execution state includes active (high-speed or mediumspeed) mode and subactive mode. In the program halt state there are a sleep mode, standby mode,
watch mode, and sub-sleep mode. These states are shown in figure 2.14.
Figure 2.15 shows the state transitions.
42
CPU state
Reset state
The CPU is initialized.
Program
execution state
Active
(high speed) mode
The CPU executes successive program
instructions at high speed,
synchronized by the system clock
Active
(medium speed) mode
The CPU executes successive
program instructions at
reduced speed, synchronized
by the system clock
Subactive mode
The CPU executes
successive program
instructions at reduced
speed, synchronized
by the subclock
Program halt state
A state in which some
or all of the chip
functions are stopped
to conserve power
Low-power
modes
Sleep mode
Standby mode
Watch mode
Subsleep mode
Exceptionhandling state
A transient state in which the CPU changes
the processing flow due to a reset or
an interrupt exception handling source.
Note: See section 5, Power-Down Modes, for details on the modes and their transitions.
Figure 2.14 CPU Operation States
43
Reset cleared
Reset state
Exception-handling state
Reset occurs
Reset
occurs
Reset
occurs
Interrupt
source
Program halt state
Exception- Exceptionhandling
handling
request
complete
Program execution state
SLEEP instruction executed
Figure 2.15 State Transitions
2.7.2
Program Execution State
In the program execution state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
There are three modes in this state, two active modes (high speed and medium speed) and one
subactive mode. Operation is synchronized with the system clock in active mode (high speed and
medium speed), and with the subclock in subactive mode. See section 5, Power-Down Modes for
details on these modes.
2.7.3
Program Halt State
In the program halt state there are four modes: sleep mode, standby mode, watch mode, and
subsleep mode. See section 5, Power-Down Modes for details on these modes.
2.7.4
Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state occurring when exception handling is started by a
reset or interrupt and the CPU changes its normal processing flow. In exception handling caused
by an interrupt, SP (R7) is referenced and the PC and CCR values are saved on the stack.
For details on interrupt handling, see 3.3, Interrupts.
44
2.8
Memory Map
Figure 2.16 shows a memory map for the H8/3627 Series.
H8/3627
60 kbytes
H'7FFF
H8/3626
48 kbytes
H8/3625
40 kbytes
H'5FFF
H8/3624
32 kbytes
On-chip ROM
H'3FFF
H8/3623
24 kbytes
H'0029
H'002A
Interrupt vectors
(42 bytes)
16 kbytes
H8/3622
H'0000
H'9FFF
H'BFFF
H'EDFF
Reserved
On-chip RAM
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF8F
H'FF90
2 kbytes
H'EB80
1 kbyte
H'F77F
H'F780
Reserved
Internal I/O registers
(112 bytes)
H'FFFF
Figure 2.16 H8/3627 Series Memory Map
45
2.9
Application Notes
2.9.1
Notes on Data Access
Access to Empty Area: The address space of the H8/300L CPU includes empty areas in addition
to the RAM, registers, and ROM areas available to the user. If these empty areas are mistakenly
accessed by an application program, the following results will occur.
• Data transfer from CPU to empty area:
The transferred data will be lost. This action may also cause the CPU to misoperate.
• Data transfer from empty area to CPU:
Unpredictable data is transferred.
Access to the Internal I/O Register: Internal data transfer to or from on-chip modules other than
the ROM and RAM areas makes use of an 8-bit data width. If word access is attempted to these
areas, the following results will occur.
• Word access from CPU to I/O register area:
Upper byte: Will be written to I/O register.
Lower byte: Transferred data will be lost.
• Word access from I/O register to CPU:
Upper byte: Will be written to upper part of CPU register.
Lower byte: Unpredictable data will be written to lower part of CPU register.
Byte size instructions should therefore be used when transferring data to or from I/O registers
other than the on-chip ROM and RAM areas.
Figure 2.17 shows the data size and number of states in which on-chip peripheral modules can be
accessed.
46
60 kbytes
H'7FFF
48 kbytes
H'5FFF
40 kbytes
On-chip ROM
H'3FFF
32 kbytes
H'0029
H'002A
Interrupt vectors
(42 bytes)
24 kbytes
H'0000
16 kbytes
Access
H8/3622S H8/3623S H8/3624S H8/3625 H8/3626 H8/3627 Word Byte States
2
H'9FFF
H'BFFF
H'EDFF
—
Reserved
—
—
On-chip RAM
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF8F
H'FF90
2 kbytes
H'FB80
1 kbyte
H'F77F
H'F780
2
Reserved
—
Internal I/O registers
(112 bytes)
×
—
—
2 or 3
H'FFFF
: Access possible
× : Not possible
Figure 2.17 Data Size and Number of States for Access to and from
On-Chip Peripheral Modules
47
2.9.2
Notes on Bit Manipulation
The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read one byte of data, modify the data,
then write the data byte again. Special care is required when using these instructions in cases
where two registers are assigned to the same address, in the case of registers that include writeonly bits, and when the instruction accesses an I/O.
Order of Operation
Operation
1
Read
Read byte data at the designated address
2
Modify
Modify a designated bit in the read data
3
Write
Write the altered byte data to the designated address
Bit Manipulation in Two Registers Assigned to the Same Address
Example 1: Bit manipulation to the timer load register and the timer counter
Figure 2.18 shows an example in which two timer registers share the same address. When a bit
manipulation instruction accesses the timer load register and timer counter of a reloadable timer,
since these two registers share the same address, the following operations take place.
Order of Operation
Operation
1
Read
Timer counter data is read (one byte)
2
Modify
The CPU modifies (sets or resets) the bit designated in the instruction
3
Write
The altered byte data is written to the timer load register
The timer counter is counting, so the value read is not necessarily the same as the value in the
timer load register. As a result, bits other than the intended bit in the timer load register may be
modified to the timer counter value.
R
Count clock
Timer counter
R: Read
W: Write
Reload
W
Timer load register
Internal bus
Figure 2.18 Timer Configuration Example
48
Example 2: Here a BSET instruction is executed designating port 6.
P6 7 and P66 are designated as input pins, with a low-level signal input at P67 and a high-level
signal at P6 6. The remaining pins, P65 to P60, are output pins and output low-level signals. In this
example, the BSET instruction is used to change pin P60 to high-level output.
[A: Prior to executing BSET]
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR6
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR6
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
[B: BSET instruction executed]
BSET
#0,
@PDR6
The BSET instruction is executed designating port 6.
[C: After executing BSET]
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR6
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR6
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
[D: Explanation of how BSET operates]
When the BSET instruction is executed, first the CPU reads port 6.
Since P67 and P66 are input pins, the CPU reads the pin states (low-level and high-level input).
P6 5 to P60 are output pins, so the CPU reads the value in PDR6. In this example PDR6 has a value
of H'80, but the value read by the CPU is H'40.
Next, the CPU sets bit 0 of the read data to 1, changing the PDR6 data to H'41. Finally, the CPU
writes this value (H'41) to PDR6, completing execution of BSET.
As a result of this operation, bit 0 in PDR6 becomes 1, and P6 0 outputs a high-level signal.
However, bits 7 and 6 of PDR6 end up with different values.
49
To avoid this problem, store a copy of the PDR6 data in a work area in memory. Perform the bit
manipulation on the data in the work area, then write this data to PDR6.
[A: Prior to executing BSET]
MOV. B
MOV. B
MOV. B
#80,
R0L,
R0L,
R0L
@RAM0
@PDR6
The PDR6 value (H'80) is written to a work area in
memory (RAM0) as well as to PDR6.
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR6
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR6
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RAM0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
[B: BSET instruction executed]
BSET
#0,
@RAM0
The BSET instruction is executed designating the PDR6
work area (RAM0).
[C: After executing BSET]
MOV. B
MOV. B
@RAM0, R0L
R0L, @PDR6
The work area (RAM0) value is written to PDR6.
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR6
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR6
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
RAM0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
50
Bit Manipulation in a Register Containing a Write-only Bit
Example 3: In this example, the port 6 control register PCR6 is accessed by a BCLR instruction.
As in the examples above, P67 and P66 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P67 and a
high-level signal at P66. The remaining pins, P65 to P60, are output pins that output low-level
signals. In this example, the BCLR instruction is used to change pin P60 to an input port. It is
assumed that a high-level signal will be input to this input pin.
[A: Prior to executing BCLR]
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR6
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR6
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
[B: BCLR instruction executed]
BCLR
#0,
@PCR6
The BCLR instruction is executed designating PCR6.
[C: After executing BCLR]
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Input/output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Input
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
PDR6
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
[D: Explanation of how BCLR operates]
When the BCLR instruction is executed, first the CPU reads PCR6. Since PCR6 is a write-only
register, the CPU reads a value of H'FF, even though the PCR6 value is actually H'3F.
Next, the CPU clears bit 0 in the read data to 0, changing the data to H'FE. Finally, this value
(H'FE) is written to PCR6 and BCLR instruction execution ends.
As a result of this operation, bit 0 in PCR6 becomes 0, making P6 0 an input port. However, bits 7
and 6 in PCR6 change to 1, so that P6 7 and P66 change from input pins to output pins.
51
To avoid this problem, store a copy of the PCR6 data in a work area in memory. Perform the bit
manipulation on the data in the work area, then write this data to PCR6.
[A: Prior to executing BCLR]
MOV. B
MOV. B
MOV. B
#3F,
R0L
@RAM0
@PCR6
R0L,
R0L,
The PCR6 value (H'3F) is written to a work area in
memory (RAM0) as well as to PCR6.
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR6
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR6
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RAM0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
[B: BCLR instruction executed]
BCLR
#0,
@RAM0
The BCLR instruction is executed designating the PCR6
work area (RAM0).
[C: After executing BCLR]
MOV. B
MOV. B
@RAM0, R0L
R0L, @PCR6
The work area (RAM0) value is written to PCR6.
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR6
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
PDR6
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RAM0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
52
Table 2.12 lists the registers with shared addresses. Table 2.13 lists the registers that contain writeonly bits.
Table 2.12 Registers with Shared Addresses
Register Name
Abbreviation
Address
Port data register 1*
PDR1
H'FFD4
Port data register 2*
PDR2
H'FFD5
Port data register 5*
PDR5
H'FFD8
Port data register 6*
PDR6
H'FFD9
Port data register 7*
PDR7
H'FFDA
Port data register 8*
PDR8
H'FFDB
Port data register A*
PDRA
H'FFDD
Note: * The port data register addresses are also assigned directly to input pins.
Table 2.13 Registers with Write-Only Bits
Register Name
Abbreviation
Address
Port control register 1
PCR1
H'FFE4
Port control register 2
PCR2
H'FFE5
Port control register 5
PCR5
H'FFE8
Port control register 6
PCR6
H'FFE9
Port control register 7
PCR7
H'FFEA
Port control register 8
PCR8
H'FFEB
Port control register A
PCRA
H'FFED
Timer control register F
TCRF
H'FFB6
53
2.9.3
Notes on Use of the EEPMOV Instruction
• The EEPMOV instruction is a block data transfer instruction. It moves the number of bytes
specified by R4L from the address specified by R5 to the address specified by R6.
R5 →
← R6
R5 + R4L →
← R6 + R4L
• When setting R4L and R6, make sure that the final destination address (R6 + R4L) does not
exceed H'FFFF. The value in R6 must not change from H'FFFF to H'0000 during execution of
the instruction.
R5 →
← R6
R5 + R4L →
54
H'FFFF
Not allowed
← R6 + R4L
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.1
Overview
Exception handling is performed in the H8/3627 Series when a reset or interrupt occurs.
Table 3.1 shows the priorities of these two types of exception handling.
Table 3.1
Exception Handling Types and Priorities
Priority
Exception Source
Time of Start of Exception Handling
High
Reset
Exception handling starts as soon as the reset state is cleared
Interrupt
When an interrupt is requested, exception handling starts after
execution of the present instruction or the exception handling
in progress is completed
Low
3.2
Reset
3.2.1
Overview
A reset is the highest-priority exception. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the onchip peripheral modules are initialized.
3.2.2
Reset Sequence
As soon as the RES pin goes low, all processing is stopped and the H8/3637 Series enters the reset
state.
To make sure the chip is reset properly, observe the following precautions.
• At power on: Hold the RES pin low until the clock pulse generator output stabilizes.
• When an external clock or ceramic oscillator is used, also, at power on the RES pin must be
held low for the crystal oscillator oscillation stabilization time shown in table 14.3 in section
14, Electrical Characteristics.
• Resetting during operation: Hold the RES pin low for at least 18 system clock cycles.
Reset exception handling begins when the RES pin is held low for a given period, then returned to
the high level. Reset exception handling takes place as follows.
• The CPU internal state and the registers of on-chip peripheral modules are initialized, with the
I bit of the condition code register (CCR) set to 1.
55
• The PC is loaded from the reset exception handling vector address (H'0000 to H'0001), after
which the program starts executing from the address indicated in PC.
When system power is turned on or off, the RES pin should be held low.
Figure 3.1 shows the reset sequence.
Reset cleared
Program initial
instruction prefetch
Vector fetch Internal
processing
RES
ø
Internal
address bus
(1)
(2)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
Internal data
bus (16-bit)
(2)
(3)
(1) Reset exception handling vector address (H'0000)
(2) Program start address
(3) First instruction of program
Figure 3.1 Reset Sequence
3.2.3
Interrupt Immediately after Reset
After a reset, if an interrupt were to be accepted before the stack pointer (SP: R7) was initialized,
PC and CCR would not be pushed onto the stack correctly, resulting in program runaway. To
prevent this, immediately after reset exception handling all interrupts are masked. For this reason,
the initial program instruction is always executed immediately after a reset. This instruction should
initialize the stack pointer (e.g. MOV.W #xx: 16, SP).
56
3.3
Interrupts
3.3.1
Overview
The interrupt sources include 13 external interrupts (WKP0 to WKP7, IRQ0 to IRQ4), and 16
internal interrupts from on-chip peripheral modules. Table 3.2 shows the interrupt sources, their
priorities, and their vector addresses. When more than one interrupt is requested, the interrupt with
the highest priority is processed.
The interrupts have the following features:
• Internal and external interrupts can be masked by the I bit of CCR. When this bit is set to 1,
interrupt request flags are set but interrupts are not accepted.
• IRQ0 to IRQ4 can each be set independently to either rising edge sensing or falling edge
sensing.
57
Table 3.2
Interrupt Sources and Priorities
Interrupt Source
Interrupt
Vector Number
Vector Address
Priority
High
RES
Reset
0
H'0000 to H'0001
IRQ0
IRQ0
4
H'0008 to H'0009
IRQ1
IRQ1
5
H'000A to H'000B
IRQ2
IRQ2
6
H'000C to H'000D
IRQ3
IRQ3
7
H'000E to H'000F
IRQ4
IRQ4
8
H'0010 to H'0011
WKP 0
WKP 0
9
H'0012 to H'0013
WKP 1
WKP 1
WKP 2
WKP 2
WKP 3
WKP 3
WKP 4
WKP 4
WKP 5
WKP 5
WKP 6
WKP 6
WKP 7
WKP 7
SCI1
SCI1 transfer complete
10
H'0014 to H'0015
Timer A
Timer A overflow
11
H'0016 to H'0017
Timer FL
Timer FL compare match
14
H'001C to H'001D
15
H'001E to H'001F
16
H'0020 to H'0021
18
H'0024 to H'0025
Timer FL overflow
Timer FH
Timer FH compare match
Timer G
Timer G input capture
Timer FH overflow
Timer G overflow
SCI3
SCI3 receive data full
SCI3 transmit data empty
SCI3 transmit end
SCI3 overrun error
SCI3 framing error
SCI3 parity error
A/D converter
A/D conversion end
19
H'0026 to H'0027
(SLEEP instruction
executed)
Direct transfer
20
H'0028 to H'0029
Low
Note: Vector addresses H'0002 to H'0007, H'0018 to H'001B, and H'0022 to H'0023 are reserved
and cannot be used.
58
3.3.2
Interrupt Control Registers
Table 3.3 lists the registers that control interrupts.
Table 3.3
Interrupt Control Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Interrupt edge select register
IEGR
R/W
H'60
H'FFF2
Interrupt enable register 1
IENR1
R/W
H'00
H'FFF3
Interrupt enable register 2
IENR2
R/W
H'01
H'FFF4
Interrupt request register 1
IRR1
R/W*
H'20
H'FFF6
Interrupt request register 2
IRR2
R/W*
H'01
H'FFF7
Wakeup interrupt request register
IWPR
R/W*
H'00
H'FFF9
Note: * Write is enabled only for writing of 0 to clear a flag.
Interrupt Edge Select Register (IEGR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
IEG4
IEG3
IEG2
IEG1
IEG0
Initial value
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IEGR is an 8-bit read/write register, used to designate whether pins IRQ0 to IRQ4 are set to rising
edge sensing or falling edge sensing.
Bit 7—Reserved Bit: Bit 7 is reserved: it is always read as 0, and should be used cleared to 0.
Bits 6 and 5—Reserved Bits: Bits 6 and 5 are reserved; they are always read as 1, and cannot be
modified.
Bit 4—IRQ4 Edge Select (IEG4): Bit 4 selects the input sensing of pin IRQ4/ADTRG.
Bit 4: IEG4
Description
0
Falling edge of IRQ4/ADTRG pin input is detected
1
Rising edge of IRQ4/ADTRG pin input is detected
(initial value)
59
Bit 3—IRQ3 Edge Select(IEG3): Bit 3 selects the input sensing of pin IRQ3/TMIF.
Bit 3: IEG3
Description
0
Falling edge of IRQ3/TMIF pin input is detected
1
Rising edge of IRQ3/TMIF pin input is detected
(initial value)
Bit 2—IRQ2 Edge Select(IEG2): Bit 2 selects the input sensing of pin IRQ2.
Bit 2: IEG2
Description
0
Falling edge of IRQ2 pin input is detected
1
Rising edge of IRQ2 pin input is detected
(initial value)
Bit 1—IRQ1 Edge Select(IEG1): Bit 1 selects the input sensing of pin IRQ1.
Bit 1: IEG1
Description
0
Falling edge of IRQ1 pin input is detected
1
Rising edge of IRQ1 pin input is detected
(initial value)
Bit 0—IRQ0 Edge Select(IEG0): Bit 0 selects the input sensing of pin IRQ0.
Bit 0: IEG0
Description
0
Falling edge of IRQ0 pin input is detected
1
Rising edge of IRQ0 pin input is detected
60
(initial value)
Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1)
IENR1 is an 8-bit read/write register that enables or disables interrupt requests.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IENTA
IENS1
IENWP
IEN4
IEN3
IEN2
IEN1
IEN0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit 7—Timer A Interrupt Enable (IENTA): Bit 7 enables or disables timer A overflow interrupt
requests.
Bit 7: IENTA
Description
0
Disables timer A interrupts
1
Enables timer A interrupts
(initial value)
Bit 6—SCI1 Interrupt Enable (IENS1): Bit 6 enables or disables SCI1 transfer complete
interrupt requests.
Bit 6: IENS1
Description
0
Disables SCI1 interrupts
1
Enables SCI1 interrupts
(initial value)
Bit 5—Wakeup Interrupt Enable (IENWP): Bit 5 enables or disables WKP7 to WKP0 interrupt
requests.
Bit 5: IENWP
Description
0
Disables interrupt requests from WKP 7 to WKP 0
1
Enables interrupt requests from WKP 7 to WKP 0
(initial value)
Bits 4 to 0: IRQ4 to IRQ0 Interrupt Enable (IEN4 to IEN0): Bits 4 to 0 enable or disable IRQ4
to IRQ0 interrupt requests.
Bits 4 to 0:
IEN4 to IEN0
Description
0
Disables interrupt requests from IRQ4 to IRQ0
1
Enables interrupt requests from IRQ4 to IRQ0
(initial value)
61
Interrupt Enable Register 2 (IENR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IENDT
IENAD
—
IENTG
IENTFH
IENTFL
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
IENR2 is an 8-bit read/write register that enables or disables interrupt requests.
Bit 7—Direct Transfer Interrupt Enable (IENDT): Bit 7 enables or disables direct transfer
interrupt requests.
Bit 7: IENDT
Description
0
Disables direct transfer interrupt requests
1
Enables direct transfer interrupt requests
(initial value)
Bit 6—A/D Converter Interrupt Enable (IENAD): Bit 6 enables or disables A/D converter end
interrupt requests.
Bit 6: IENAD
Description
0
Disables A/D converter interrupt requests
1
Enables A/D converter interrupt requests
(initial value)
Bit 5—Reserved Bit: Bit 5 is reserved: it is always read as 0, and should be used cleared to 0.
Bit 4—Timer G Interrupt Enable (IENTG): Bit 4 enables or disables timer G input capture and
overflow interrupt requests.
Bit 4: IENTG
Description
0
Disables timer G interrupts
1
Enables timer G interrupts
(initial value)
Bit 3—Timer FH Interrupt Enable (IENTFH): Bit 3 enables or disables timer FH compare
match and overflow interrupt requests.
Bit 3: IENTFH
Description
0
Disables timer FH interrupts
1
Enables timer FH interrupts
62
(initial value)
Bit 2—Timer FL Interrupt Enable (IENTFL): Bit 2 enables or disables timer FL compare
match and overflow interrupt requests.
Bit 2: IENTFL
Description
0
Disables timer FL interrupts
1
Enables timer FL interrupts
(initial value)
Bit 1—Reserved Bit: Bit 1 is reserved: it is always read as 0, and should be used cleared to 0.
Bit 0—Reserved Bit: Bit 0 is reserved: it is always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
For details of SCI3 interrupt control, see Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3), in section 10.3.2.
Interrupt Request Register 1 (IRR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRRTA
IRRS1
—
IRRI4
IRRI3
IRRI2
IRRI1
IRRI0
Initial value
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W*
R/W*
—
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
IRR1 is an 8-bit read/write register, in which the corresponding bit is set to 1 when a timer A,
SCI1, or IRQ 4 to IRQ0 interrupt is requested. The flags are not cleared automatically when an
interrupt is accepted. It is necessary to write 0 to clear each flag.
Bit 7—Timer A Interrupt Request Flag (IRRTA)
Bit 7: IRRTA
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When IRRTA = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1
[Setting conditions]
When the timer A counter value overflows (goes from H'FF to H'00)
(initial value)
Bit 6—SCI1 Interrupt Request Flag (IRRS1)
Bit 6: IRRS1
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When IRRS1 = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1
[Setting conditions]
When an SCI1 transfer is completed
(initial value)
63
Bit 5—Reserved Bit: Bit 5 is reserved; it is always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
Bits 4 to 0—IRQ4 to IRQ0 Interrupt Request Flags (IRRI4 to IRRI0)
Bits 4 to 0:
IRRI4 to IRRI0
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When IRRIn = 1, it is cleared by writing 0 to IRRIn.
(initial value)
1
[Setting conditions]
IRRIn is set when pin IRQn is set to interrupt input, and the designated signal
edge is detected.
(n = 4 to 0)
Interrupt Request Register 2 (IRR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRRDT
IRRAD
—
IRRTG
IRRTFH
IRRTFL
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W*
R/W*
—
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
—
—
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
IRR2 is an 8-bit register containing direct transfer, A/D converter, timer G, timer FH, and timer
FL, interrupt flags. When a direct transfer, A/D converter, timer G, timer FH, or timer FL,
interrupt is requested, the corresponding flag is set to 1. The flags are not cleared automatically
when an interrupt is accepted. It is necessary to write 0 to clear each flag.
Bit 7—Direct Transfer Interrupt Request Flag (IRRDT)
Bit 7: IRRDT
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When IRRDT = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1
[Setting conditions]
When DTON = 1 and a direct transfer is made immediately after a SLEEP
instruction is executed
64
(initial value)
Bit 6—A/D Converter Interrupt Request Flag (IRRAD)
Bit 6: IRRAD
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When IRRAD = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1
[Setting conditions]
When A/D conversion is completed and ADSF is reset
(initial value)
Bit 5—Reserved Bit: Bit 5 is reserved: it is always read as 0, and should be used cleared to 0.
Bit 4—Timer G Interrupt Request Flag (IRRTG)
Bit 4: IRRTG
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When IRRTG = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1
[Setting conditions]
When pin TMIG is set to TMIG input and the designated signal edge is
detected, or when TCG overflows (from H’FF to H’00) while TMG OVIE is set
to 1
(initial value)
Bit 3—Timer FH Interrupt Request Flag (IRRTFH)
Bit 3: IRRTFH
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When IRRTFH = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1
[Setting conditions]
When counter FH matches output compare register FH in 8-bit timer mode, or
when 16-bit counter F (TCFL, TCFH) matches output compare register F
(OCRFL, OCRFH) in 16-bit timer mode
(initial value)
Bit 2—Timer FL Interrupt Request Flag (IRRTFL)
Bit 2: IRRTFL
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When IRRTFL = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1
[Setting conditions]
When counter FL matches output compare register FL in 8-bit timer mode
(initial value)
Bit 1—Reserved Bit: Bit 1 is reserved: it is a always read as 0, and should be used cleared to
0.
Bit 0—Reserved Bit: Bit 0 is reserved: it is a always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
65
Wakeup Interrupt Request Register (IWPR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IWPF7
IWPF6
IWPF5
IWPF4
IWPF3
IWPF2
IWPF1
IWPF0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
IWPR is an 8-bit read/write register, in which the corresponding bit is set to 1 when pins WKP7 to
WKP0 are set to wakeup input and a pin receives a falling edge input. The flags are not cleared
automatically when an interrupt is accepted. It is necessary to write 0 to clear each flag.
Bits 7 to 0—Wakeup Interrupt Request Flags (IWPF7 to IWPF0)
Bits 7 to 0:
IWPF7 to IWPF0
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When IWPFn = 1, it is cleared by writing 0 to IWPFn.
(initial value)
1
[Setting conditions]
IWPFn is set when pin WKP n is set to wakeup interrupt input, and a falling
edge input is detected at the pin.
(n = 7 to 0)
66
3.3.3
External Interrupts
There are 13 external interrupts, WKP0 to WKP7 and IRQ 0 to IRQ4.
Interrupts WKP0 to WKP7: Interrupts WKP 0 to WKP7 are requested by falling edge inputs at
pins WKP0 to WKP7. When these pins are designated as WKP0 to WKP7 pins in port mode register
5 (PMR5) and falling edge input is detected, the corresponding bit in the wakeup interrupt request
register (IWPR) is set to 1, requesting an interrupt. Wakeup interrupt requests can be disabled by
clearing the IENWP bit in IENR1 to 0. It is also possible to mask all interrupts by setting the CCR
I bit to 1.
When an interrupt exception handling request is received for interrupts WKP0 to WKP7, the CCR I
bit is set to 1. The vector number for interrupts WKP0 to WKP7 is 9. Since all eight interrupts are
assigned the same vector number, the interrupt source must be determined by the exception
handling routine.
Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ4: Interrupts IRQ 0 to IRQ4 are requested by inputs into pins IRQ0 to IRQ4.
These interrupts are detected by either rising edge sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on
the settings of bits IEG0 to IEG4 in the edge select register (IEGR).
When these pins are designated as pins IRQ0 to IRQ4 in port mode registers 1 and 2 (PMR1 and
PMR2) and the designated edge is input, the corresponding bit in IRR1 is set to 1, requesting an
interrupt. Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ4 can be disabled by clearing bits IEN0 to IEN4 in IENR1 to 0.
All interrupts can be masked by setting the I bit in CCR to 1.
When IRQ 0 to IRQ4 interrupt exception handling is initiated, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. Vector
numbers 4 to 8 are assigned to interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ4. The order of priority is from IRQ0 (high)
to IRQ4 (low). Table 3.2 gives details.
3.3.4
Internal Interrupts
There are 16 internal interrupts that can be requested by the on-chip peripheral modules. When a
peripheral module requests an interrupt, the corresponding bit in IRR1 or IRR2 is set to 1.
Individual interrupt requests can be disabled by clearing the corresponding bit in IENR1 or IENR2
to 0. All interrupts can be masked by setting the I bit in CCR to 1. When an internal interrupt
request is accepted, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. Vector numbers 10 to 20 are assigned to these
interrupts. Table 3.2 shows the order of priority of interrupts from on-chip peripheral modules.
67
3.3.5
Interrupt Operations
Interrupts are controlled by an interrupt controller. Figure 3.2 shows a block diagram of the
interrupt controller. Figure 3.3 shows the flow up to interrupt acceptance.
External or
internal
interrupts
Priority decision logic
Interrupt controller
Interrupt
request
External
interrupts or
internal
interrupt
enable
signals
I
CCR (CPU)
Figure 3.2 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
68
Interrupt operation is described as follows.
1. When an interrupt condition is met while the interrupt enable register bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request signal is sent to the interrupt controller.
2. When the interrupt controller receives an interrupt request, it sets the interrupt request flag.
3. From among the interrupts with interrupt request flags set to 1, the interrupt controller selects
the interrupt request with the highest priority and holds the others pending. (Refer to
table 3.2 for a list of interrupt priorities.)
4. The interrupt controller checks the I bit of CCR. If the I bit is 0, the selected interrupt request is
accepted; if the I bit is 1, the interrupt request is held pending.
5. If the interrupt is accepted, after processing of the current instruction is completed, both PC
and CCR are pushed onto the stack. The state of the stack at this time is shown in figure 3.4.
The PC value pushed onto the stack is the address of the first instruction to be executed upon
return from interrupt handling.
6. The I bit of CCR is set to 1, masking all further interrupts.
7. The vector address corresponding to the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt
handling routine located at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address is
executed.
Notes: 1. When disabling interrupts by clearing bits in an interrupt enable register, or when
clearing bits in an interrupt request register, always do so while interrupts are masked
(I = 1).
2. If the above clear operations are performed while I = 0, and as a result a conflict arises
between the clear instruction and an interrupt request, exception processing for the
interrupt will be executed after the clear instruction has been executed.
69
Program execution state
No
IRRI0 = 1
Yes
No
IEN0 = 1
Yes
IRRI1 = 1
No
Yes
IEN1 = 1
Yes
No
IRRI2 = 1
No
Yes
IEN2 = 1
No
Yes
IRRDT = 1
No
Yes
IENDT = 1
Yes
No
I=0
Yes
PC contents saved
CCR contents saved
I←1
Branch to interrupt
handling routine
Legend:
PC: Program counter
CCR: Condition code register
I bit of CCR
I:
Figure 3.3 Flow up to Interrupt Acceptance
70
No
SP – 4
SP (R7)
CCR
SP – 3
SP + 1
CCR*
SP – 2
SP + 2
PCH
SP – 1
SP + 3
PCL
SP (R7)
SP + 4
Even address
Stack area
Prior to start of interrupt
exception handling
PC and CCR
saved to stack
After completion of interrupt
exception handling
Legend:
PCH: Upper 8 bits of program counter (PC)
PCL: Lower 8 bits of program counter (PC)
CCR: Condition code register
SP: Stack pointer
Notes: 1. PC shows the address of the first instruction to be executed upon
return from the interrupt handling routine.
2. Register contents must always be saved and restored by word access,
starting from an even-numbered address.
* Ignored on return from interrupt.
Figure 3.4 Stack State after Completion of Interrupt Exception Handling
Figure 3.5 shows a typical interrupt sequence where the program area is in the on-chip ROM and
the stack area is in the on-chip RAM.
71
Figure 3.5 Interrupt Sequence
72
Internal data bus
(16 bits)
Internal write
signal
Internal read
signal
Internal
address bus
ø
Interrupt
request signal
(4)
Instruction
prefetch
(3)
Internal
processing
(5)
(1)
Stack access
(6)
(7)
(9)
Vector fetch
(8)
(10)
(9)
Prefetch instruction of
Internal
interrupt-handling routine
processing
(1) Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed. Address is saved as PC contents, becoming return address.)
(2)(4) Instruction code (not executed)
(3) Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed.)
(5) SP – 2
(6) SP – 4
(7) CCR
(8) Vector address
(9) Starting address of interrupt-handling routine (contents of vector)
(10) First instruction of interrupt-handling routine
(2)
(1)
Interrupt level
decision and wait for
end of instruction
Interrupt is
accepted
3.3.6
Interrupt Response Time
Table 3.4 shows the number of wait states after an interrupt request flag is set until the first
instruction of the interrupt handler is executed.
Table 3.4
Interrupt Wait States
Item
States
Total
Waiting time for completion of executing instruction*
1 to 13
15 to 27
Saving of PC and CCR to stack
4
Vector fetch
2
Instruction fetch
4
Internal processing
4
Note: * Not including EEPMOV instruction.
73
3.4
Application Notes
3.4.1
Notes on Stack Area Use
When word data is accessed in the H8/3637 Series, the least significant bit of the address is
regarded as 0. Access to the stack always takes place in word size, so the stack pointer (SP: R7)
should never indicate an odd address. Use PUSH Rn (MOV.W Rn, @–SP) or POP Rn (MOV.W
@SP+, Rn) to save or restore register values.
Setting an odd address in SP may cause a program to crash. An example is shown in figure 3.6.
SP →
SP →
PCH
PC L
R1L
PC L
SP →
H'FEFC
H'FEFD
H'FEFF
BSR instruction
SP set to H'FEFF
MOV. B R1L, @–R7
Stack accessed beyond SP
Contents of PCH are lost
Legend:
PCH: Upper byte of program counter
PCL: Lower byte of program counter
R1L: General register R1L
SP: Stack pointer
Figure 3.6 Operation when Odd Address is Set in SP
When CCR contents are saved to the stack during interrupt exception handling or restored when
RTE is executed, this also takes place in word size. Both the upper and lower bytes of word data
are saved to the stack; on return, the even address contents are restored to CCR while the odd
address contents are ignored.
3.4.2
Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers
When a port mode register is rewritten to switch the functions of external interrupt pins, the
following points should be observed.
74
When an external interrupt pin function is switched by rewriting the port mode register that
controls these pins (IRQ4 to IRQ0, and WKP7 to WKP0), the interrupt request flag may be set to 1
at the time the pin function is switched, even if no valid interrupt is input at the pin. Be sure to
clear the interrupt request flag to 0 after switching pin functions. Table 3.5 shows the conditions
under which interrupt request flags are set to 1 in this way.
Table 3.5
Conditions under which Interrupt Request Flag is Set to 1
Interrupt Request
Flags Set to 1
Conditions
IRR1
•
When PMR2 bit IRQ4 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin IRQ4 is low and
IEGR bit IEG4 = 0.
•
When PMR2 bit IRQ4 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin IRQ4 is low and
IEGR bit IEG4 = 1.
•
When PMR1 bit IRQ3 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin IRQ3 is low and
IEGR bit IEG3 = 0.
•
When PMR1 bit IRQ3 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin IRQ3 is low and
IEGR bit IEG3 = 1.
•
When PMR1 bit IRQ2 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin IRQ2 is low and
IEGR bit IEG2 = 0.
•
When PMR1 bit IRQ2 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin IRQ2 is low and
IEGR bit IEG2 = 1.
•
When PMR1 bit IRQ1 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin IRQ1 is low and
IEGR bit IEG1 = 0.
•
When PMR1 bit IRQ1 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin IRQ1 is low and
IEGR bit IEG1 = 1.
•
When PMR2 bit IRQ0 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin IRQ0 is low and
IEGR bit IEG0 = 0.
•
When PMR2 bit IRQ0 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin IRQ0 is low and
IEGR bit IEG0 = 1.
IRRI4
IRRI3
IRRI2
IRRI1
IRRI0
IWPR
IWPF7
When PMR5 bit WKP7 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP 7 is low
IWPF6
When PMR5 bit WKP6 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP 6 is low
IWPF5
When PMR5 bit WKP5 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP 5 is low
IWPF4
When PMR5 bit WKP4 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP 4 is low
IWPF3
When PMR5 bit WKP3 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP 3 is low
IWPF2
When PMR5 bit WKP2 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP 2 is low
IWPF1
When PMR5 bit WKP1 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP 1 is low
IWPF0
When PMR5 bit WKP0 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP 0 is low
75
Figure 3.7 shows the procedure for setting a bit in a port mode register and clearing the interrupt
request flag.
When switching a pin function, mask the interrupt before setting the bit in the port mode register.
After accessing the port mode register, execute at least one instruction (e.g., NOP), then clear the
interrupt request flag from 1 to 0. If the instruction to clear the flag is executed immediately after
the port mode register access without executing an intervening instruction, the flag will not be
cleared.
An alternative method is to avoid the setting of interrupt request flags when pin functions are
switched by keeping the pins at the high level so that the conditions in table 3.5 do not occur.
CCR I bit ← 1
Interrupts masked. (Another possibility
is to disable the relevant interrupt in
interrupt enable register 1.)
Set port mode register bit
Execute NOP instruction
After setting the port mode register bit,
first execute at least one instruction
(e.g., NOP), then clear the interrupt
request flag to 0
Clear interrupt request flag to 0
CCR I bit ← 0
Interrupt mask cleared
Figure 3.7 Port Mode Register Setting and Interrupt Request Flag
Clearing Procedure
76
Section 4 Clock Pulse Generators
4.1
Overview
Clock oscillator circuitry (CPG: clock pulse generator) is provided on-chip, including both a
system clock pulse generator and a subclock pulse generator. The system clock pulse generator
consists of a system clock oscillator and system clock dividers. The subclock pulse generator
consists of a subclock oscillator circuit and a subclock divider.
4.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 4.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generators.
OSC 1
OSC 2
System clock
oscillator
ø OSC
(f OSC)
System clock
divider (1/2)
System clock øOSC/16
divider (1/8)
X1
X2
Subclock
oscillator
(f W )
Subclock
divider
(1/2, 1/4, 1/8)
Subclock pulse generator
ø
Prescaler S
(13 bits)
System clock pulse generator
øW
ø OSC
øOSC/2
øW /2
øW /4
øW /8
ø/2
to
ø/8192
øW
øSUB
Prescaler W
(5 bits)
ø W /2
ø W /4
ø W /8
to
ø W /128
Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generators
4.1.2
System Clock and Subclock
The basic clock signals that drive the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules are ø and øSUB. Four of
the clock signals have names: ø is the system clock, øSUB is the subclock, øOSC is the oscillator
clock, and ø W is the watch clock.
The clock signals available for use by peripheral modules are øOSC , ø/2, ø/4, ø/8, ø/16, ø/32, ø/64,
ø/128, ø/256, ø/512, ø/1024, ø/2048, ø/4096, ø/8192, øW, øW /2, øW /4, øW /8, øW /16, øW /32, øW /64,
and øW /128. The clock requirements differ from one module to another.
77
4.2
System Clock Generator
Clock pulse can be supplied to the system clock divider either by connecting a crystal or ceramic
oscillator, or by providing external clock input.
Connecting a Crystal Oscillator: Figure 4.2 shows a typical method of connecting a crystal
oscillator.
C1
OSC 1
Rf
R f = 1 MΩ ±20%
C1 = C 2 = 12 pF ±20%
OSC 2
C2
Figure 4.2 Typical Connection to Crystal Oscillator
Figure 4.3 shows the equivalent circuit of a crystal oscillator. An oscillator having the
characteristics given in table 4.1 should be used.
CS
LS
RS
OSC 1
OSC 2
C0
Figure 4.3 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Oscillator
Table 4.1
Crystal Oscillator Parameters
Frequency
2 MHz
4 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
RS (max)
500 Ω
100 Ω
50 Ω
30 Ω
C0 (max)
7 pF
7 pF
7 pF
7 pF
78
Connecting a Ceramic Oscillator: Figure 4.4 shows a typical method of connecting a ceramic
oscillator.
C1
OSC 1
Rf
OSC 2
C2
Rf = 1 MΩ ± 20%
C1 = 30 pF ± 10%
C2 = 30 pF ± 10%
Ceramic oscillator: Murata
Figure 4.4 Typical Connection to Ceramic Oscillator
Notes on Board Design: When generating clock pulses by connecting a crystal or ceramic
oscillator, pay careful attention to the following points.
Avoid running signal lines close to the oscillator circuit, since the oscillator may be adversely
affected by induction currents. (See figure 4.5.)
The board should be designed so that the oscillator and load capacitors are located as close as
possible to pins OSC1 and OSC2.
To be avoided
Signal A Signal B
C1
OSC 1
OSC 2
C2
Figure 4.5 Board Design of Oscillator Circuit
79
External Clock Input Method: Connect an external clock signal to pin OSC1, and leave pin
OSC2 open. Figure 4.6 shows a typical connection.
OSC 1
External clock input
OSC 2
Open
Figure 4.6 External Clock Input (Example)
Frequency
Oscillator Clock (øOSC)
Duty cycle
45% to 55%
80
4.3
Subclock Generator
Connecting a 32.768-kHz Crystal Oscillator: Clock pulses can be supplied to the subclock
divider by connecting a 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator, as shown in figure 4.7. Follow the same
precautions as noted in 4.2, Notes on Board Design.
C1
X1
X2
C1 = C 2 = 15 pF (typ.)
C2
Figure 4.7 Typical Connection to 32.768-kHz Crystal Oscillator
Figure 4.8 shows the equivalent circuit of the 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator.
CS
LS
RS
X1
X2
C0
C0 = 1.5 pF typ
RS = 14 k Ω typ
f W = 32.768 kHz
Crystal oscillator: MX38T
(Nihon Denpa Kogyo)
Figure 4.8 Equivalent Circuit of 32.768-kHz Crystal Oscillator
Pin Connection when Not Using Subclock: When the subclock is not used, connect pin X1 to
VCC and leave pin X2 open, as shown in figure 4.9.
VCC
X1
X2
Open
Figure 4.9 Pin Connection when not Using Subclock
81
4.4
Prescalers
The H8/3637 Series is equipped with two on-chip prescalers having different input clocks
(prescaler S and prescaler W). Prescaler S is a 13-bit counter using the system clock (ø) as its
input clock. Its prescaled outputs provide internal clock signals for on-chip peripheral modules.
Prescaler W is a 5-bit counter using a 32.768-kHz signal divided by 4 (øW/4) as its input clock. Its
prescaled outputs are used by timer A as a time base for timekeeping.
Prescaler S (PSS): Prescaler S is a 13-bit counter using the system clock (ø) as its input clock. It
is incremented once per clock period.
Prescaler S is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and starts counting on exit from the reset state.
In standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode, the system clock pulse
generator stops. Prescaler S also stops and is initialized to H'0000.
The CPU cannot read or write prescaler S.
The output from prescaler S is shared by the on-chip peripheral modules. The divider ratio can be
set separately for each on-chip peripheral function.
In active (medium-speed) mode the clock input to prescaler S is øOSC /16.
Prescaler W (PSW): Prescaler W is a 5-bit counter using a 32.768 kHz signal divided by 4 (øW /4)
as its input clock.
Prescaler W is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and starts counting on exit from the reset state.
Even in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode, prescaler W continues
functioning so long as clock signals are supplied to pins X1 and X2.
Prescaler W can be reset by setting 1s in bits TMA3 and TMA2 of timer mode register A (TMA).
Output from prescaler W can be used to drive timer A, in which case timer A functions as a time
base for timekeeping.
4.5
Note on Oscillators
Oscillator characteristics of both the masked ROM and ZTATTM versions are closely related to
board design and should be carefully evaluated by the user, referring to the examples shown in this
section and figure 4.10, Example of Crystal and Ceramic Oscillator Layout. Oscillator circuit
constants will differ depending on the oscillator element, stray capacitance in its interconnecting
circuit, and other factors. Suitable constants should be determined in consultation with the
oscillator element manufacturer. Design the circuit so that the oscillator element never receives
voltages exceeding its maximum rating.
82
CVCC
X1
X2
VSS
OSC2
OSC1
TEST
(VSS)
Figure 4.10 Example of Crystal and Ceramic Oscillator Layout.
83
84
Section 5 Power-Down Modes
5.1
Overview
The H8/3627 Series has seven modes of operation after a reset. These include six power-down
modes, in which power dissipation is significantly reduced.
Table 5.1 gives a summary of the seven operation modes.
Table 5.1
Operation Modes
Operating Mode
Description
Active (high-speed) mode
The CPU runs on the system clock, executing program
instructions at high speed
Active (medium-speed) mode
The CPU runs on the system clock, executing program
instructions at reduced speed
Subactive mode
The CPU runs on the subclock, executing program instructions
at reduced speed
Sleep mode
The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules continue to operate
on the system clock.
Subsleep mode
The CPU halts. Timer A, and timer G, continue to operate on
the subclock.
Watch mode
The CPU halts. The time-base function of Timer A continues to
operate on the subclock.
Standby mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules stop operating
All but the active (high-speed) mode are power-down modes.
In this section the two active modes (high-speed and medium-speed) are referred to collectively as
active mode.
Figure 5.1 shows the transitions among these operation modes. Table 5.2 indicates the internal
states in each mode.
85
Program executing
Program execution stopped
Reset state
LSON = 0, MSON = 0
Program execution stopped
ct
io
n
tru
*4
*1
SSBY = 0,
LSON = 0
ct
io
n
*3
st
ru
ct
LSON = 0,
MSON = 1
io
n
=
1
n
TO
tio
c
tru
D
ins
P
Watch mode
Sleep mode
Active
(medium-speed)
mode
*1
N
1
*3
*4
SSBY = 1,
TMA3 = 1
TO
D
=
tru
in
N
in
s
P
SL
EE
P
EE
SL
EE
P
SL
Standby mode
ct
io
n
in
s
tru
SSBY = 1,
TMA3 = 0,
LSON = 0
SL
EE
P
in
s
P ion
EE uct
SL str
in
Active (high-speed)
mode
E
LE
N
S
=
1
TO
D
*1
SL
LSON = 1,
TMA3 = 1
EE
P
in
st
ru
ct
io
n
SSBY = 0,
LSON = 1,
TMA3 = 1
SLEEP
instruction
Subactive mode
Subsleep mode
*2
→ : Transition caused by exception handling
Power-down mode
A transition between different modes cannot be made to occur simply because an interrupt request is
generated. Make sure that the interrupt is accepted and interrupt handling is performed.
Details on the mode transition conditions are given in the explanations of each mode, in sections 5.2
through 5.8.
Notes: 1. Timer A interrupt, IRQ 0 interrupt, WKP0 to WKP7 interrupts
2. Timer A interrupt, timer G interrupt, IRQ0 to IRQ4 interrupts, WKP0 to WKP7
interrupts
3. All interrupts
4. IRQ 0 interrupt, IRQ 1 interrupt, WKP0 to WKP7 interrupts
Figure 5.1 Operation Mode Transition Diagram
86
Table 5.2
Internal State in Each Operation Mode
Active Mode
Function
High
Speed
System clock oscillator
Subclock oscillator
CPU
operation
Medium
Speed
Sleep
Mode
Watch
Mode
Subactive Subsleep
Mode
Mode
Standby
Mode
Functional Functional Functional Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Functional Functional Functional Functional
Functional
Functional
Functional
Functional
Stopped
Stopped
Retained
Retained
Instructions Functional Functional Stopped
Stopped
RAM
Retained
Retained
Registers
Retained*1
I/O
External
interrupts
IRQ0
Functional Functional Functional Functional
IRQ1
Retained*4
Functional
Functional
Functional
Retained*4
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
WKP0
Functional Functional Functional Functional
Functional
Functional
Functional
WKP1
WKP2
WKP3
WKP4
WKP5
WKP6
WKP7
Peripheral
module
functions
Timer A
Functional Functional Functional Functional*3 Functional*3 Functional*3 Retained
Timer F
Retained
Timer G
SCI1
SCI3
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Retained
Retained
Functional/ Functional/
Retained*2 Retained*2
Functional Functional Functional Retained
Reset
Retained
Retained
Retained
Reset
Reset
Reset
DTMF
Functional Functional Functional Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
A/D
Functional Functional Functional Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Register contents held; high-impedance output.
Functional only if øW/2 internal clock is selected; otherwise stopped and retained.
Functional when timekeeping time-base function is selected.
External interrupt requests are ignored. The interrupt request register contents are not
affected.
87
5.1.1
System Control Registers
The operation mode is selected using the system control registers described in table 5.3.
Table 5.3
System Control Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
System control register 1
SYSCR1
R/W
H'07
H'FFF0
System control register 2
SYSCR2
R/W
H'E0
H'FFF1
System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
LSON
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
SYSCR1 is an 8-bit read/write register for control of the power-down modes.
Upon reset, SYSCR1 is initialized to H'07.
Bit 7—Software Standby (SSBY): This bit designates transition to standby mode or watch mode.
Bit 7: SSBY
Description
0
•
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active mode, a transition is
made to sleep mode.
•
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is
made to subsleep mode.
(initial value)
•
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active mode, a transition is
made to standby mode or watch mode.
•
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is
made to watch mode.
1
Bits 6 to 4—Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits designate the time the
CPU and peripheral modules wait for stable clock operation after exiting from standby mode or
watch mode to active mode due to an interrupt. The designation should be made according to the
clock frequency so that the waiting time is at least 10 ms.
88
Bit 6: STS2
Bit 5: STS1
Bit 4: STS0
Description
0
0
0
Wait time = 8,192 states
1
Wait time = 16,384 states
0
Wait time = 32,768 states
1
Wait time = 65,536 states
*
Wait time = 131,072 states
1
1
*
(initial value)
Note: * Don’t care
Bit 3—Low Speed on Flag (LSON): This bit chooses the system clock (ø) or subclock (øSUB ) as
the CPU operating clock when watch mode is cleared. The resulting operation mode depends on
the combination of other control bits and interrupt input.
Bit 3: LSON
Description
0
The CPU operates on the system clock (ø)
1
The CPU operates on the subclock (ø SUB)
(initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved Bits: These bits are reserved; they are always read as 1, and cannot be
modified.
System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
NESEL
DTON
MSON
SA1
SA0
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SYSCR2 is an 8-bit read/write register for power-down mode control.
Upon reset, SYSCR2 is initialized to H'E0.
Bits 7 to 5—Reserved Bits: These bits are reserved; they are always read as 1, and cannot be
modified.
89
Bit 4— Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select (NESEL): This bit selects the frequency
at which the watch clock signal (ø W ) generated by the subclock pulse generator is sampled, in
relation to the oscillator clock (øOSC) generated by the system clock pulse generator. When ø OSC = 2
to 10 MHz, clear NESEL to 0.
Bit 4: NESEL
Description
0
Sampling rate is ø OSC/16
1
Sampling rate is ø OSC/4
(initial value)
Bit 3—Direct Transfer on Flag (DTON): This bit designates whether or not to make direct
transitions among active (high-speed), active (medium-speed) and subactive mode when a SLEEP
instruction is executed. The mode to which the transition is made after the SLEEP instruction is
executed depends on a combination of this and other control bits.
Bit 3: DTON
Description
0
•
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active mode, a transition is
made to standby mode, watch mode, or sleep mode.
(initial value)
•
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is
made to watch mode or subsleep mode.
•
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode, a
direct transition is made to active (medium-speed) mode if SSBY = 0,
MSON = 1, and LSON = 0, or to subactive mode if SSBY = 1, TMA3 = 1,
and LSON = 1.
•
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed) mode, a
direct transition is made to active (high-speed) mode if SSBY = 0, MSON
= 0, and LSON = 0, or to subactive mode if SSBY = 1, TMA3 = 1, and
LSON = 1.
•
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a direct
transition is made to active (high-speed) mode if SSBY = 1, TMA3 = 1,
LSON = 0, and MSON = 0, or to active (medium-speed) mode if SSBY =
1, TMA3 = 1, LSON = 0, and MSON = 1.
1
Bit 2—Medium Speed on Flag (MSON): After standby, watch, or sleep mode is cleared, this bit
selects active (high-speed) or active (medium-speed) mode.
Bit 2: MSON
Description
0
Operation is in active (high-speed) mode
1
Operation is in active (medium-speed) mode
90
(initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Subactive Mode Clock Select (SA1 and SA0): These bits select the CPU clock
rate (øW /2, øW /4, or ø W /8) in subactive mode. SA1 and SA0 cannot be modified in subactive mode.
Bit 1: SA1
Bit 0: SA0
Description
0
0
øW/8
1
øW/4
*
øW/2
1
(initial value)
Note: * Don’t care
5.2
Sleep Mode
5.2.1
Transition to Sleep Mode
The system goes from active mode to sleep mode when a SLEEP instruction is executed while the
SSBY and LSON bits in system control register 1 (SYSCR1) are cleared to 0. In sleep mode CPU
operation is halted but the on-chip peripheral functions are operational. The CPU register contents
are retained.
5.2.2
Clearing Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt (timer A, timer F, timer G, IRQ0 to IRQ4, WKP0 to WKP7,
SCI1, SCI3, A/D converter) or by reset input.
Clearing by Interrupt: When an interrupt is requested, sleep mode is cleared and interrupt
exception handling starts. Operation resumes in active (high-speed) mode if MSON = 0 in
SYSCR2, or active (medium-speed) mode if MSON = 1. Sleep mode is not cleared if the I bit of
the condition code register (CCR) is set to 1 or the particular interrupt is disabled in the interrupt
enable register.
Clearing by Reset Input: When the RES pin goes low, the CPU goes into the reset state and
sleep mode is cleared.
91
5.3
Standby Mode
5.3.1
Transition to Standby Mode
The system goes from active mode to standby mode when a SLEEP instruction is executed while
the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1, the LSON bit is cleared to 0, and bit TMA3 in timer mode
register A (TMA) is cleared to 0. In standby mode the clock pulse generator stops, so the CPU and
on-chip peripheral modules stop functioning. As long as a minimum required voltage is applied,
the contents of the CPU registers and some on-chip peripheral function internal registers, and data
in the on-chip RAM, will be retained. The I/O ports go to the high-impedance state.
5.3.2
Clearing Standby Mode
Standby mode is cleared by an interrupt (IRQ0, IRQ1, WKP0 to WKP7) or by input at the RES pin.
Clearing by Interrupt: When an interrupt is requested, the system clock pulse generator starts.
After the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed, a stable system clock signal is
supplied to the entire chip, standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling starts.
Operation resumes in active (high-speed) mode if MSON = 0 in SYSCR2, or active (mediumspeed) mode if MSON = 1. Standby mode is not cleared if the I bit of CCR is set to 1 or the
particular interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register.
Clearing by RES Input: When the RES pin goes low, the system clock pulse generator starts.
After the pulse generator output has stabilized, if the RES pin is driven high, the CPU starts reset
exception handling.
Since system clock signals are supplied to the entire chip as soon as the system clock pulse
generator starts functioning, the RES pin should be kept at the low level until the pulse generator
output stabilizes.
92
5.3.3
Oscillator Settling Time after Standby Mode is Cleared
Bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 should be set as follows.
When a Crystal Oscillator is Used: Table 5.4 gives settings for various operating frequencies.
Set bits STS2 to STS0 for a waiting time of at least 10 ms.
Table 5.4
Clock Frequency and Settling Time (times are in ms)
STS2
STS1
STS0
Waiting Time
5 MHz
4 MHz
2 MHz
1 MHz
0.5 MHz
0
0
0
8,192 states
1.6
2.0
4.1
8.2
16.4
0
0
1
16,384 states
3.2
4.1
8.2
16.4
32.8
0
1
0
32,768 states
6.6
8.2
16.4
32.8
65.5
0
1
1
65,536 states
13.1
16.4
32.8
65.5
131.1
1
*
*
131,072 states
26.2
32.8
65.5
131.1
262.1
Note: * Don’t care
When an External Clock is Used: Any values may be set. Normally the minimum time (STS2 =
STS1 = STS0 = 0) should be set.
93
5.3.4
Transition to Standby Mode and Pin States
The system goes from active (high-speed) mode or active (medium-speed) mode to standby
mode when a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1, the
LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, and bit TMA3 in TMA is cleared to 0. At the same time,
pins go to the high-impedance state (except pins with MOS pull-up turned on). The timing in
this case is shown in figure 5.2.
ø
Internal
data bus
SLEEP instruction fetch
Next instruction fetch
SLEEP instruction
execution
Pins
Internal
processing
Port output
Active (high-speed) mode or active (medium-speed) mode
High impedance
Standby mode
Figure 5.2 Transition to Standby Mode and Pin States
94
5.4
Watch Mode
5.4.1
Transition to Watch Mode
The system goes from active or subactive mode to watch mode when a SLEEP instruction is
executed while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1 and bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1.
In watch mode, operation of on-chip peripheral modules other than timer A is halted. As long as a
minimum required voltage is applied, the contents of CPU registers and some registers of the onchip peripheral modules*, and the on-chip RAM contents, are retained. I/O ports keep the same
states as before the transition.
Note: * The contents of SCI3, DTMF generator registers are reset.
5.4.2
Clearing Watch Mode
Watch mode is cleared by an interrupt (timer A, IRQ 0, WKP0 to WKP7) or by a low input at the
RES pin.
Clearing by Interrupt: When watch mode is cleared by a timer A, IRQ0, or WKP0 to WKP7
interrupt request, the mode to which a transition is made depends on the settings of LSON in
SYSCR1 and MSON in SYSCR2. If both LSON and MSON are cleared to 0, transition is to active
(high-speed) mode; if LSON = 0 and MSON = 1, transition is to active (medium-speed) mode; if
LSON = 1, transition is to subactive mode. When the transition is to active mode, after the time set
in SYSCR1 bits STS2 to STS0 has elapsed, a stable clock signal is supplied to the entire chip,
watch mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling starts. Watch mode is not cleared if the I
bit of CCR is set to 1 or the particular interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register.
Clearing by RES Input: Clearing by RES pin is the same as for standby mode; see 5.3.2,
Clearing Standby Mode.
5.4.3
Oscillator Settling Time after Watch Mode is Cleared
The waiting time is the same as for standby mode; see 5.3.3, Oscillator Settling Time after
Standby Mode is Cleared.
95
5.5
Subsleep Mode
5.5.1
Transition to Subsleep Mode
The system goes from subactive mode to subsleep mode when a SLEEP instruction is executed
while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, LSON is set to 1, and bit TMA3 in TMA is set
to 1.
In subsleep mode, operation of on-chip peripheral modules other than timer A and timer G is
halted. As long as a minimum required voltage is applied, the contents of CPU registers and some
registers of the on-chip peripheral modules*, and the on-chip RAM contents, are retained. I/O
ports keep the same states as before the transition.
Note: * The contents of SCI3, DTMF generator registers are reset.
5.5.2
Clearing Subsleep Mode
Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt (timer A, timer G, IRQ0 to IRQ4, WKP0 to WKP7) or by a
low input at the RES pin.
Clearing by Interrupt: When an interrupt is requested, subsleep mode is cleared and interrupt
exception handling starts. Subsleep mode is not cleared if the I bit of CCR is set to 1 or the
particular interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register.
Clearing by RES Input: Clearing by RES input is the same as for standby mode; see 5.3.2,
Clearing Standby Mode.
96
5.6
Subactive Mode
5.6.1
Transition to Subactive Mode
Subactive mode is entered from watch mode if a timer A, IRQ0, or WKP0 to WKP7 interrupt is
requested while the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1. From subsleep mode, subactive mode is
entered if a timer A, timer G, IRQ0 to IRQ4, or WKP0 to WKP7 interrupt is requested. A transition
to subactive mode does not take place if the I bit of CCR is set to 1 or the particular interrupt is
disabled in the interrupt enable register.
The contents of SCI3, DTMF generator registers are reset.
5.6.2
Clearing Subactive Mode
Subactive mode is cleared by a SLEEP instruction or by a low input at the RES pin.
Clearing by SLEEP Instruction: If a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in
SYSCR1 is set to 1 and bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, subactive mode is cleared and watch mode
is entered. If a SLEEP instruction is executed while SSBY = 0 and LSON = 1 in SYSCR1 and
TMA3 = 1 in TMA, subsleep mode is entered. Direct transfer to active mode is also possible; see
5.8, Direct Transfer, below.
Clearing by RES Pin: Clearing by RES pin is the same as for standby mode; see 5.3.2, Clearing
Standby Mode.
5.6.3
Operating Frequency in Subactive Mode
The operating frequency in subactive mode is set in bits SA1 and SA0 in SYSCR2. The choices
are øW /2, øW /4, and øW /8.
97
5.7
Active (medium-speed) Mode
5.7.1
Transition to Active (medium-speed) Mode
If the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1 while the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, a transition
to active (medium-speed) mode results from IRQ0, IRQ1, or WKP0 to WKP7 interrupts in standby
mode, timer A, IRQ0, or WKP0 to WKP7 interrupts in watch mode, or any interrupt in sleep mode.
A transition to active (medium-speed) mode does not take place if the I bit of CCR is set to 1 or
the particular interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register.
5.7.2
Clearing Active (medium-speed) Mode
Active (medium-speed) mode is cleared by a SLEEP instruction or by a low input at the reset.
Clearing by SLEEP Instruction: A transition to standby mode takes place if a SLEEP
instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1, the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is
cleared to 0, and bit TMA3 in TMA is cleared to 0. The system goes to watch mode if the SSBY
bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1 and bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1 when a SLEEP instruction is executed.
Sleep mode is entered if both SSBY and LSON are cleared to 0 when a SLEEP instruction is
executed. Direct transfer to active (high-speed) mode or to subactive mode is also possible. See
5.8, Direct Transfer, below for details.
Clearing by Reset: When the RES pin goes low, the CPU goes into the reset state and active
(medium-speed) mode is cleared.
5.7.3
Operating Frequency in Active (medium-speed) Mode
In active (medium-speed) mode, the CPU is clocked at 1/8 the frequency in active (high-speed)
mode. The DTMF generator, however, continues to operate on the OSC clock (øOSC).
98
5.8
Direct Transfer
5.8.1
Overview
The CPU can execute programs in three modes: active (high-speed) mode, active (medium-speed)
mode, and subactive mode. A direct transfer is a transition among these three modes without the
stopping of program execution. A direct transfer can be made by executing a SLEEP instruction
while the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1. After the mode transition, direct transfer interrupt
exception handling starts.
If the direct transfer interrupt is disabled in interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2), a transition is
made instead to sleep mode or watch mode. Note that if a direct transition is attempted while the I
bit in CCR is set to 1, sleep mode or watch mode will be entered, and it will be impossible to clear
the resulting mode by means of an interrupt.
Direct Transfer from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Active (Medium-Speed) Mode: When a
SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode while the SSBY and LSON bits in
SYSCR1 are cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is
set to 1, a transition is made to active (medium-speed) mode via sleep mode.
Direct Transfer from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Active (High-Speed) Mode: When a
SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed) mode while the SSBY and LSON bits in
SYSCR1 are cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is cleared to 0, and the DTON bit in
SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made to active (high-speed) mode via sleep mode.
Direct Transfer from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Subactive Mode: When a SLEEP
instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode while the SSBY and LSON bits in SYSCR1
are set to 1, the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, a transition is
made to subactive mode via watch mode.
Direct Transfer from Subactive Mode to Active (High-Speed) Mode: When a SLEEP
instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1, the LSON bit
in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is cleared to 0, the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is
set to 1, and bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, a transition is made directly to active (high-speed)
mode via watch mode after the waiting time set in SYSCR1 bits STS2 to STS0 has elapsed.
Direct Transfer from Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to Subactive Mode: When a SLEEP
instruction is executed in active (medium-speed) mode while the SSBY and LSON bits in
SYSCR1 are set to 1, the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, a
transition is made to subactive mode via watch mode.
Direct Transfer from Subactive Mode to Active (Medium-Speed) Mode: When a SLEEP
instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1, the LSON bit
in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set
99
to 1, and bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, a transition is made directly to active (medium-speed)
mode via watch mode after the waiting time set in SYSCR1 bits STS2 to STS0 has elapsed.
5.8.2
Direct Transfer Time
Time for Direct Transfer from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Active (Medium-Speed)
Mode: When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode while the SSBY
bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit in
SYSCR2 is set to 1, and the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made directly to
active (medium-speed) mode. In this case, the time from execution of the SLEEP instruction
to the end of interrupt exception handling (the direct transfer time) is given by equation (1)
below:
Direct transfer time ={ (Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) +
(number of internal processing states) } × (tcyc before transition) +
(number of interrupt exception handling execution states) ×
(tcyc after transition) ...................................................................... (1)
Example: H8/3627 Series direct transfer time = (2 + 1) × 2tosc + 14 × 16tosc = 230tosc
Legend:
tosc: OSC clock cycle time
tcyc: System clock (ø) cycle time
Time for Direct Transfer from Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to Active (High-Speed)
Mode: When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed) mode while the
SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit
in SYSCR2 is cleared to 0, and the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made
directly to active (high-speed) mode. In this case, the time from execution of the SLEEP
instruction to the end of interrupt exception handling (the direct transfer time) is given by
equation (2) below:
Direct transfer time ={ (Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) +
(number of internal processing states) } × (tcyc before transition) +
(number of interrupt exception handling execution states) ×
(tcyc after transition) ...................................................................... (2)
Example: H8/3627 Series direct transfer time = (2 + 1) × 16tosc + 14 × 2tosc = 76tosc
Legend:
100
tosc: OSC clock cycle time
tcyc: System clock (ø) cycle time
Time for Direct Transfer from Subactive Mode to Active (High-Speed) Mode: When a
SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1,
the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is cleared to 0, the
DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, a transition is made
directly to active (high-speed) mode. In this case, the time from execution of the SLEEP
instruction to the end of interrupt exception handling (the direct transfer time) is given by
equation (3) below:
Direct transfer time ={ (Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) +
(number of internal processing states) } × (tsubcyc before transition) +
{ (standby time set in STS2 to STS0) +
(number of interrupt exception handling execution states) } ×
(tcyc after transition) ...................................................................... (3)
Example: H8/3627 Series direct transfer time = (2 + 1) × 8tw + (8192 + 14) × 2tosc= 24tw +
16412tosc
(When øw/8 CPU operating clock and 8192-state standby time are selected)
Legend:
tosc: OSC clock cycle time
tw: Watch clock cycle time
tcyc: System clock (ø) cycle time
tsubcyc : Subclock (øSUB) cycle time
Time for Direct Transfer from Subactive Mode to Active (Medium-Speed) Mode: When
a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is set to 1,
the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, the DTON bit
in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, a transition is made directly to active
(medium-speed) mode. In this case, the time from execution of the SLEEP instruction to the
end of interrupt exception handling (the direct transfer time) is given by equation (4) below:
Direct transfer time ={ (Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) +
(number of internal processing states) } × (tsubcyc before transition) +
{ (standby time set in STS2 to STS0) +
(number of interrupt exception handling execution states) } ×
(tcyc after transition) ...................................................................... (4)
Example: H8/3627 Series direct transfer time = (2 + 1) × 8tw + (8192 + 14) × 16tosc= 24tw +
13129tosc
(When øw/8 CPU operating clock and 8192-state standby time are selected)
Legend:
tosc: OSC clock cycle time
tw: Watch clock cycle time
tcyc: System clock (ø) cycle time
tsubcyc : Subclock (øSUB) cycle time
101
102
Section 6 ROM
6.1
Overview
The H8/3627 has 60 kbytes of on-chip mask ROM, while the H8/3626 has 48 kbytes the H8/3625
has 40 kbytes the H8/3624S has 32 kbytes the H8/3623S has 24 kbytes and the H8/3622S has 16
kbytes. The H8/3627 also has 60 kbytes of on-chip PROM. The ROM is connected to the CPU by
a 16-bit data bus, allowing high-speed 2-state access for both byte data and word data.
6.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip ROM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'0000
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0002
H'0003
On-chip ROM
H'EDFE
H'EDFE
H'EDFF
Even-numbered
address
Odd-numbered
address
Figure 6.1 ROM Block Diagram (H8/3627)
103
6.2
PROM Mode
6.2.1
Selection of PROM Mode
If the on-chip ROM is PROM, setting the chip to PROM mode stops operation as a
microcomputer and allows the on-chip PROM to be programmed in the same way as the
HN27C101, except that page programming is not supported. Table 6.1 shows how to set PROM
mode.
Table 6.1
Setting PROM Mode
Pin Name
Setting
TEST
High level
PB7/AN7
Low level
PB6/AN6
6.2.2
Socket Adapter Pin Arrangement and Memory Map
A standard PROM programmer can be used to program the PROM. A socket adapter is required
for conversion to 32 pins.
Figure 6.2 shows the pin-to-pin wiring of the socket adapter. Figure 6.3 shows a memory map.
104
EPROM socket
H8/3627
FP-64A
Pin
FP-64E
8
RES
P60
36
P61
37
P62
38
P63
39
P64
40
P65
41
P66
42
P67
43
P87
59
P86
58
P85
57
P84
56
P83
55
P82
54
P81
53
P80
52
P70
44
P27
16
P72
46
P73
47
P74
48
P75
49
P76
50
P14
20
P15
19
51
P77
P71
45
P13
21
VCC
7
CVCC
64
TEST
6
X1
1
P11
23
P12
22
P16
18
VSS
3
62
PB7
63
PB6
Note: Pins not indicated in the figure should be left open.
Pin
HN27C101
(32 pins)
VPP
EO0
EO1
EO2
EO3
EO4
EO5
EO6
EO7
EA0
EA1
EA2
EA3
EA4
EA5
EA6
EA7
EA8
EA9
EA10
EA11
EA12
EA13
EA14
EA15
EA16
CE
OE
PGM
VCC
1
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
26
23
25
4
28
29
3
2
22
24
31
32
VSS
16
Figure 6.2 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence
105
Address in
MCU mode
Address in
PROM mode
H'0000
H'0000
On-chip PROM
H'EDFF
H'EDFF
Unused area*
H'1FFFF
Note: * Unpredictable data may be output if this area is read in PROM mode.
When programming with a PROM programmer, be sure to specify addresses
from H'0000 to H'EDFF.
If H'EE00 and higher addresses are programmed by mistake, it may become
impossible to program or verify the PROM. When programming, specify
H'FF for this address area (H'EE00 to H'1FFFF).
Figure 6.3 Memory Map in PROM Mode
106
6.3
Programming
The program, verify, and other modes are selected as shown in table 6.2 in PROM mode.
Table 6.2
Mode Selection in PROM Mode
Pin
Mode
CE
OE
PGM
VPP
VCC
EO7 to EO0
EA 16 to EA0
Write
L
H
L
VPP
VCC
Data input
Address input
Verify
L
L
H
VPP
VCC
Data output
Address input
Programming
disabled
L
L
L
VPP
VCC
High impedance Address input
L
H
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
Legend:
L:
Low level
H:
High level
VPP : VPP level
VCC: VCC level
The programming and verifying specifications in PROM mode are the same as the specifications
of the standard HN27C101 EPROM. Page programming is not supported, however. The PROM
programmer must not be set to page mode. PROM programmers that support only page
programming cannot be used. When selecting a PROM programmer, make sure that it supports a
byte-by-byte high-speed, high-reliability programming method. Be sure to set the address range to
H'0000 to H'EDFF.
107
6.3.1
Programming and Verification
An efficient, high-speed, high-reliability programming procedure can be used to program and
verify data. This procedure programs the chip quickly without subjecting it to voltage stress and
without sacrificing data reliability. Data in unused address areas is H'FF. Figure 6.4 shows the
basic high-speed, high-reliability programming flow chart.
Start
Set program/verify mode
VCC = 6.0 V ± 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ± 0.3 V
Address = 0
n=0
n+1 →n
No
Yes
n < 25
Program with t PW = 0.2 ms ±5%
No
Address + 1 → address
Verification OK?
Yes
Overprogram with t OPW = 0.2n ms
Last address?
No
Yes
Set read mode
VCC = 5.0 V ± 0.25 V, VPP = VCC
No
Fail
All addresses
read?
Yes
End
Figure 6.4 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming Flow Chart
108
Table 6.3 and table 6.4 give the electrical characteristics in programming mode.
Table 6.3
DC Characteristics
(Conditions: VCC = 6.0 V ± 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ± 0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test
Condition
Input highlevel voltage
EO7 to EO 0, EA16 to EA 0
OE, CE, PGM
VIH
2.4
—
VCC + 0.3
V
Input lowlevel voltage
EO7 to EO 0, EA16 to EA 0
OE, CE, PGM
VIL
–0.3
—
0.8
V
Output highlevel voltage
EO7 to EO 0
VOH
2.4
—
—
V
I OH = –200 µA
Output lowlevel voltage
EO7 to EO 0
VOL
—
—
0.45
V
I OL = 0.8 mA
Input leakage EO7 to EO 0, EA16 to EA 0
current
OE, CE, PGM
|ILI|
—
—
2
µA
Vin = 5.25 V/
0.5 V
VCC current
I CC
—
—
40
mA
VPP current
I PP
—
—
40
mA
109
Table 6.4
AC Characteristics
(Conditions: VCC = 6.0 V ± 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ± 0.3 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
Address setup time
t AS
2
—
—
µs
Figure 6.5* 1
OE setup time
t OES
2
—
—
µs
Data setup time
t DS
2
—
—
µs
Address hold time
t AH
0
—
—
µs
Data hold time
t DH
2
—
—
µs
—
—
130
ns
2
—
—
µs
0.19
0.20
0.21
ms
0.19
—
5.25
ms
Data output disable time
t DF *
VPP setup time
t VPS
Programming pulse width
t PW
2
3
PGM pulse width for overprogramming
t OPW*
VCC setup time
t VCS
2
—
—
µs
CE setup time
t CES
2
—
—
µs
Data output delay time
t OE
0
—
200
ns
Notes: 1. Input pulse level: 0.45 V to 2.4 V
Input rise time/fall time ≤ 20 ns
Timing reference levels: Input: 0.8 V, 2.0 V
Output: 0.8 V, 2.0 V
2. t DF is defined at the point at which the output is floating and the output level cannot be
read.
3. t OPW is defined by the value given in the hi-speed, hi-reliability programming flow chart in
figure 6.4.
110
Figure 6.5 shows a program/verify timing diagram.
Program
Verify
Address
tAH
tAS
Data
Input data
tDH
tDS
VPP
VCC
Output data
tDF
VPP
VCC
tVPS
VCC+1
VCC
tVCS
CE
tCES
PGM
tPW
OE
tOES
tOE
tOPW*
Note: * tOPW is defined by the value given in the high-speed, high-reliability programming flow
chart in figure 6.4.
Figure 6.5 PROM Program/Verify Timing
111
6.3.2
Programming Precautions
• Use the specified programming voltage and timing.
The programming voltage in PROM mode (VPP) is 12.5 V. Use of a higher voltage can
permanently damage the chip. Be especially careful with respect to PROM programmer
overshoot.
Setting the PROM programmer to Hitachi specifications for the HN27C101 will result in
correct VPP of 12.5 V.
• Make sure the index marks on the PROM programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are
properly aligned. If they are not, the chip may be destroyed by excessive current flow. Before
programming, be sure that the chip is properly mounted in the PROM programmer.
• Avoid touching the socket adapter or chip while programming, since this may cause contact
faults and write errors.
• Select the programming mode carefully. The chip cannot be programmed in page
programming mode.
• When programming with a PROM programmer, be sure to specify addresses from H'0000 to
H'EDFF. If address H'EE00 and higher addresses are programmed by mistake, it may become
impossible to program the PROM or verify the programmed data. When programming, assign
H'FF data to the address area from H'EE00 to H'1FFFF.
112
6.4
Reliability of Programmed Data
A highly effective way of assuring data retention characteristics after programming is to screen the
chips by baking them at a temperature of 150°C. This quickly eliminates PROM memory cells
causing initial data retention failure.
Figure 6.6 shows a flowchart of this screening procedure.
Write program and verify contents
Bake at high temperature with power off
125°C to 150°C, 24 hrs to 48 hrs
Read and check program
Install
Figure 6.6 Recommended Screening Procedure
If write errors occur repeatedly while the same PROM programmer is being used, stop
programming and check for problems in the PROM programmer and socket adapter, etc.
Please notify your Hitachi representative of any problems occurring during programming or in
screening after high-temperature baking.
113
114
Section 7 RAM
7.1
Overview
The H8/3627 Series has 1 kbyte or 2 kbytes of high-speed static RAM on-chip. The RAM is
connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, allowing high-speed 2-state access for both byte data
and word data.
7.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'F780
H'F780
H'F781
H'F782
H'F782
H'F783
On-chip RAM
H'FF7E
H'FF7E
H'FF7F
Even-numbered
address
Odd-numbered
address
Figure 7.1 RAM Block Diagram (Example of 2 kbytes RAM)
115
116
Section 8 I/O Ports
8.1
Overview
The H8/3627 Series is provided with five 8-bit I/O ports, one 7-bit I/O port, one 3-bit I/O port, one
2-bit input-only port, and one 1-bit input-only port. Table 8.1 indicates the functions of each port.
Each port has of a port control register (PCR) that controls input and output, and a port data
register (PDR) for storing output data. Input or output can be controlled by individual bits.
See 2.9.2, Notes on Bit Manipulation, for information on executing bit-manipulation instructions
to write data in PCR or PDR.
Block diagrams of each port are given in Appendix C, I/O Port Block Diagrams.
117
Table 8.1
Port Functions
Port
Description
Pins
Other Functions
Function
Switching
Register
Port 1
• 8-bit I/O port
P17 to P1 5/
IRQ3 to IRQ1/
TMIF
External interrupts 3 to 1
PMR1
Timer event input TMIF
TCRF
P14
None
P13/TMIG
Timer G input capture
• Input pull-up MOS
option
Port 2
PMR1
P12, P11/TMOFH, Timer F output compare
TMOFL
PMR1
P10/TMOW
Timer A clock output
PMR1
• 1-bit input-only port P27
External interrupt 0
PMR2
• 7-bit I/O port
P26/TXD
SCR3
• Input pull-up MOS
option
P25/RXD
SCI3 data output (TXD), data input
(RXD), clock input/output (SCK3)
P24/SCK3
P23/SO 1
SMR3
PMR6
SCI1 data output (SO1), data input
(SI1), clock input/output (SCK1)
PMR2
P20/IRQ4/
ADTRG
External interrupt 4 and A/D
converter external trigger
PMR2
P57 to P5 0/
WKP 7 to WKP 0
Wakeup input (WKP 7 to WKP 0)
PMR5
P67 to P6 0
None
P22/SI1
P21/SCK1
Port 5
• 8-bit I/O port
• Input pull-up MOS
option
Port 6
• 8-bit I/O port
• Input pull-up MOS
option
Port 7
• 8-bit I/O port
P77 to P7 0
None
Port 8
• 8-bit I/O port
P87 to P8 0
None
Port A
• 3-bit I/O port
PA3 to PA 1
None
Port B
• 2-bit input port
PB7, PB6/AN7, AN 6 A/D converter analog input
118
AMR
8.2
Port 1
8.2.1
Overview
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Figure 8.1 shows its pin configuration.
P17/IRQ3/TMIF
P16/IRQ2
P15/IRQ1
P14
Port 1
P13/TMIG
P12/TMOFH
P11/TMOFL
P10/TMOW
Figure 8.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration
8.2.2
Register Configuration and Description
Table 8.2 shows the port 1 register configuration.
Table 8.2
Port 1 Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Port data register 1
PDR1
R/W
H'00
H'FFD4
Port control register 1
PCR1
W
H'00
H'FFE4
Port pull-up control register 1
PUCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF9C
Port mode register 1
PMR1
R/W
H'00
H'FF98
119
Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR1 is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P17 to P10 of port 1. If port 1 is read while PCR1
bits are set to 1, the values stored in PDR1 are directly read, regardless of the actual pin states. If
port 1 is read while PCR1 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Upon reset, PDR1 is initialized to H'00.
Port Control Register 1 (PCR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR17
PCR16
PCR15
PCR14
PCR13
PCR12
PCR11
PCR10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
PCR1 is an 8-bit register for controlling whether each of the port 1 pins P17 to P10 functions as an
input pin or output pin. Setting a PCR1 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output pin, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. The settings in PCR1 and in PDR1 are valid only
when the corresponding pin is designated in PMR1 as a general I/O pin.
Upon reset, PCR1 is initialized to H'00.
PCR1 is a write-only register. All bits are read as 1.
Port Pull-Up Control Register 1 (PUCR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PUCR17 PUCR16 PUCR15 PUCR14 PUCR13 PUCR12 PUCR11 PUCR10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PUCR1 controls whether the MOS pull-up of each port 1 pins P17 to P10 is on or off. When a
PCR1 bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR1 bit to 1 turns on the MOS pull-up for
the corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0 turns off the MOS pull-up.
Upon reset, PUCR1 is initialized to H'00.
120
Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ3
IRQ2
IRQ1
—
TMIG
TMOFH
TMOFL
TMOW
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR1 is an 8-bit read/write register, controlling the selection of pin functions for port 1 pins.
Upon reset, PMR1 is initialized to H'00.
Bit 7—P17/IRQ3/TMIF Pin Function Switch (IRQ3): This bit selects whether pin
P1 7/IRQ3/TMIF is used as P17 or as IRQ3/TMIF.
Bit 7: IRQ3
Description
0
Functions as P1 7 I/O pin
1
Functions as IRQ3/TMIF input pin
(initial value)
Note: Rising or falling edge sensing can be designated for IRQ3/TMIF.
For information about TMIF pin settings, see 9.3.2 (3), Timer Control Register F (TCRF).
Bit 6—P16/IRQ2 Pin Function Switch (IRQ2): This bit selects whether pin P16/IRQ2 is used as
P1 6 or as IRQ2.
Bit 6: IRQ2
Description
0
Functions as P1 6 I/O pin
1
Functions as IRQ2 input pin
(initial value)
Note: Rising or falling edge sensing can be designated for IRQ2.
Bit 5—P15/IRQ1 Pin Function Switch (IRQ1): This bit selects whether pin P15/IRQ1 is used as
P1 5 or as IRQ1.
Bit 5: IRQ1
Description
0
Functions as P1 5 I/O pin
1
Functions as IRQ1 input pin
(initial value)
Note: Rising or falling edge sensing can be designated for IRQ1.
Bit 4—Reserved Bit: Bit 4 is reserved: it is a always read as 0, and should be used cleared to
0.
121
Bit 3—P13/TMIG Pin Function Switch (TMIG): This bit selects whether pin P13/TMIG is used
as P13 or as TMIG.
Bit 3: TMIG
Description
0
Functions as P1 3 I/O pin
1
Functions as TMIG input pin
(initial value)
Bit 2—P12/TMOFH Pin Function Switch (TMOFH): This bit selects whether pin P12/TMOFH
is used as P12 or as TMOFH.
Bit 2: TMOFH
Description
0
Functions as P1 2 I/O pin
1
Functions as TMOFH output pin
(initial value)
Bit 1—P11/TMOFL Pin Function Switch (TMOFL): This bit selects whether pin P11/TMOFL
is used as P11 or as TMOFL.
Bit 1: TMOFL
Description
0
Functions as P1 1 I/O pin
1
Functions as TMOFL output pin
(initial value)
Bit 0—P10/TMOW Pin Function Switch (TMOW): This bit selects whether pin P10/TMOW is
used as P10 or as TMOW.
Bit 0: TMOW
Description
0
Functions as P1 0 I/O pin
1
Functions as TMOW output pin
122
(initial value)
8.2.3
Pin Functions
Table 8.3 shows the port 1 pin functions.
Table 8.3
Port 1 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P17/IRQ3/TMIF
The pin function depends on bit IRQ3 in PMR1, bits CKSL2 to CKSL0 in TCRF,
and bit PCR1 7 in PCR1.
IRQ3
PCR17
0
0
CKSL2 to CKSL0
Pin function
1
1
*
Not 0**
*
0**
P17 output pin IRQ3 input pin
P17 input pin
IRQ3/TMIF
input pin
Note: When using this pin for TMIF input, clear bit IEN3 to 0 in IENR1 to
disable IRQ3 interrupts.
P16/IRQ2
The pin function depends on bit IRQ2 in PMR1, bit PCR16 in PCR1.
IRQ2
PCR16
Pin function
P15/IRQ1
0
0
1
*
P16 input pin
P16 output pin
IRQ2 input pin
The pin function depends on bit IRQ1 in PMR1 and bit PCR15 in PCR1.
IRQ1
PCR15
Pin function
P14
0
1
0
1
*
P15 input pin
P15 output pin
IRQ1 input pin
The pin function depends on bit PCR14 in PCR1.
PCR14
Pin function
P13/TMIG
1
0
1
P14 input pin
P14 output pin
The pin function depends on bit TMIG in PMR1 and bit PCR1 3 in PCR1.
TMIG
PCR13
Pin function
0
1
0
1
*
P13 input pin
P13 output pin
TMIG input pin
123
Table 8.3
Port 1 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P12/TMOFH
The pin function depends on bit TMOFH in PMR1 and bit PCR12 in PCR1.
TMOFH
0
PCR12
Pin function
P11/TMOFL
1
0
1
*
P12 input pin
P12 output pin
TMOFH output pin
The pin function depends on bit TMOFL in PMR1 and bit PCR1 1 in PCR1.
TMOFL
0
PCR11
Pin function
P10/TMOW
1
0
1
*
P11 input pin
P11 output pin
TMOFL output pin
The pin function depends on bit TMOW in PMR1 and bit PCR1 0 in PCR1.
TMOW
0
PCR10
Pin function
1
0
1
*
P10 input pin
P10 output pin
TMOW output pin
Note: * Don’t care
8.2.4
Pin States
Table 8.4 shows the port 1 pin states in each operating mode.
Table 8.4
Port 1 Pin States
Pins
Reset
P17/IRQ3/TMIF
HighRetains Retains
impedance previous previous
state
state
P16/IRQ2
P15/IRQ1
Sleep
Subsleep Standby
Watch
HighRetains Functional Functional
impedance* previous
state
P14
P13/TMIG
P12/TMOFH
P11/TMOFL
P10/TMOW
Note: * A high-level signal is output when the MOS pull-up is in the on state.
124
Subactive Active
8.2.5
MOS Input Pull-Up
Port 1 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. When a PCR1
bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR1 bit to 1 turns on the MOS pull-up for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset.
PCR1n
PUCR1n
MOS input pull-up
0
1
0
1
*
Off
On
Off
Note: * Don’t care
(n = 7 to 0)
125
8.3
Port 2
8.3.1
Overview
Port 2 is an 7-bit I/O port and 1-bit input port. Figure 8.2 shows its pin configuration.
P27/IRQ0
P26/TXD
P25/RXD
P24/SCK3
Port 2
P23/SO1
P22/SI1
P21/SCK1
P20/IRQ4/ADTRG
Figure 8.2 Port 2 Pin Configuration
8.3.2
Register Configuration and Description
Table 8.5 shows the port 2 register configuration.
Table 8.5
Port 2 Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Port data register 2
PDR2
R/W
H'00
H'FFD5
Port control register 2
PCR2
W
H'00
H'FFE5
Port mode register 2
PMR2
R/W
H'40
H'FF99
Port mode register 6
PMR6
R/W
H'F8
H'FF9A
Port pull-up control register 2
PUCR2
R/W
H'00
H'FF9D
126
Port Data Register 2 (PDR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR2 is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P27 to P20 of port 2. If port 2 is read while PCR2
bits are set to 1, the values stored in PDR2 are directly read, regardless of the actual pin states. If
port 2 is read while PCR2 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Upon reset, PDR2 is initialized to H'00.
Port Control Register 2 (PCR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR27
PCR26
PCR25
PCR24
PCR23
PCR22
PCR21
PCR20
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
PCR2 is an 8-bit register for controlling whether each of the port 2 pins P27 to P20 functions as an
input pin or output pin. Setting a PCR2 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output pin, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. The settings in PCR2 and in PDR2 are valid only
when the corresponding pin is designated in PMR2 as a general I/O pin.
Upon reset, PCR2 is initialized to H'00.
PCR2 is a write-only register, which always reads all 1s.
Note: As P27 is an input-only pin, it becomes a high-impedance output when PCR27 is set to 1.
127
Port Mode Register 2 (PMR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ0
—
POF1
NCS
SO1
SI1
SCK1
IRQ4
Initial value
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR2 is an 8-bit read/write register for controlling the selection of pin functions for pins P2 0 to
P2 3 and P27, controlling the PMOS on/off option for pin P23/SO 1, and controlling the TMIG input
noise canceller.
Upon reset, PMR2 is initialized to H'40.
Bits 7—P27/IRQ0 Pin Function Switch (IRQ0): This bit selects whether pin P27/IRQ0 is used as
P2 7 or as IRQ0.
Bit 7: IRQ0
Description
0
Functions as P2 7 input pin
1
Functions as IRQ0 input pin
(initial value)
Bit 6—Reserved Bit: Bit 6 is reserved: it is always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
Bit 5—P23/SO1 pin PMOS control (POF1): This bit turns on and off the PMOS transistor in the
P2 3/SO 1 pin output buffer.
Bit 5: POF1
Description
0
CMOS output
1
NMOS open-drain output
(initial value)
Bit 4—TMIG noise canceller select (NCS): This bit controls the noise canceller circuit for input
capture at pin TMIG.
Bit 4: NCS
Description
0
Noise canceller function not selected
1
Noise canceller function selected
128
(initial value)
Bit 3—P23/SO1 Pin Function Switch (SO1): This bit selects whether pin P23/SO1 is used as P23
or as SO1.
Bit 3: SO1
Description
0
Functions as P2 3 I/O pin
1
Functions as SO 1 output pin
(initial value)
Bit 2—P22/SI1 Pin Function Switch (SI1): This bit selects whether pin P22/SI1 is used as P22 or
as SI1.
Bit 2: SI1
Description
0
Functions as P2 2 I/O pin
1
Functions as SI1 input pin
(initial value)
Bit 1—P21/SCK1 Pin Function Switch (SCK1): This bit selects whether pin P21/SCK1 is used as
P2 1 or as SCK 1.
Bit 1: SCK1
Description
0
Functions as P2 1 I/O pin
1
Functions as SCK1 I/O pin
(initial value)
Bit 0—P20/IRQ4/ADTRG Pin Function Switch (IRQ4): This bit selects whether pin
P2 0/IRQ4/ADTRG is used as P20 or as IRQ4/ADTRG.
Bit 0: IRQ4
Description
0
Functions as P2 0 I/O pin
1
Functions as IRQ4/ADTRG input pin
(initial value)
Note: For information about ADTRG pin settings, see 12.3.2, Start of A/D Conversion by External
Trigger Input.
129
Port Mode Register 6 (PMR6)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
TXD
—
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7, 6, and 3: Reserved Bits: Bits 7, 6, and 3 are reserved bits. They are always read as 1
and cannot be modified.
Bit 5, 4—Reserved Bit: Bit 5, 4 is reserved: it should be used set to 1.
Bit 2—P26/TXD Pin Function Switch (TXD): This bits selects whether the P26/TXD pin is
used as P26 or as TXD.
Bit 2: TXD
Description
0
Functions as P2 6 I/O pin
1
Functions as TXD output pin
(initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Reserved Bits: Bits 1 and 0 are reserved: they should be used cleared to 0.
Port Pull-Up Control Register 2 (PUCR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PUCR27 PUCR26 PUCR25 PUCR24 PUCR23 PUCR22 PUCR21 PUCR20
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PUCR2 controls whether the MOS pull-up of each port 2 pin is on or off. When a PCR2 bit is
cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR2 bit to 1 turns on the MOS pull-up for the
corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0 turns off the MOS pull-up.
Upon reset, PUCR2 is initialized to H'00.
Note: As P27 is an input-only pin, the MOS pull-up is turned off regardless of whether PUCR27
is set to 1 or cleared to 0.
130
8.3.3
Pin Functions
Table 8.6 shows the port 2 pin functions.
Table 8.6
Port 2 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P27/IRQ0
The pin function depends on bit IRQ0 in PMR2 and bit PCR27 in PCR2.
IRQ0
PCR27
Pin function
P26/TXD
0
0
1
*
P27 input pin
Highimpedance
IRQ0 input pin
The pin function depends on bit TXD in PMR6 and bit PCR26 in PCR2.
TXD
PCR26
Pin function
P25/RXD
0
1
*
P26 input pin
P26 output pin
TXD output pin
The pin function depends on bit RE in SCR of SCI3 and bit PCR25 in PCR2.
PCR25
Pin function
0
1
0
1
*
P25 input pin
P25 output pin
RXD input pin
The pin function depends on bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI3, bit COM in
SMR of SCI3, and bit PCR24 in PCR2.
CKE1
0
1
CKE0
0
0
1
*
COM
0
1
*
*
PCR24
Pin function
P23/SO 1
1
0
RE
P24/SCK3
1
0
1
*
*
P24
input pin
P24
output pin
SCK 3
output pin
SCK 3
input pin
The pin function depends on bit SO1 in PMR2 and bit PCR23 in PCR2.
SO1
PCR23
Pin function
0
1
0
1
*
P23 input pin
P23 output pin
SO1 output pin
131
Table 8.6
Port 2 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P22/SI1
The pin function depends on bit SI1 in PMR2 and bit PCR2 2 in PCR2.
SI1
PCR22
Pin function
P21/SCK1
1
0
1
*
P22 input pin
P22 output pin
SI 1 input pin
The pin function depends on bit SCK1 in PMR2, bit CKS3 in SCR1, and bit
PCR21 in PCR2.
SCK1
0
CKS 3
*
PCR21
Pin function
P20/IRQ4/
ADTRG
0
1
0
1
0
1
*
*
P21
input pin
P21
output pin
SCK 1
output pin
SCK 1
input pin
The pin function depends on bit IRQ4 in PMR2, bit TRGE in AMR, and bit
PCR20 in PCR2.
IRQ4
PCR20
0
0
TRGE
Pin function
1
1
*
P20
input pin
P20
output pin
*
0
1
IRQ4
input pin
IRQ4/ADTRG
input pin
Note: When using this pin for ADTRG input, clear bit IEN4 to 0 in IENR1 to
disable IRQ4 interrupts.
Note: * Don’t care
132
8.3.4
Pin States
Table 8.7 shows the port 2 pin states in each operating mode.
Table 8.7
Port 2 Pin States
Pins
Reset
P27/IRQ0
HighHighHighHighHighHighHighimpedance impedance impedance impedance impedance impedance impedance
P26/TXD
HighRetains
impedance previous
state
P25/RXD
P24/SCK3
Sleep
Subsleep Standby
Retains
previous
state
Watch
HighRetains
impedance* previous
state
Subactive Active
Functional Functional
P23/SO 1
P22/SI1
P21/SCK1
P20/IRQ4/
ADTRG
Note: * High level output if the MOS pull-up is on.
8.3.5
MOS Input Pull-Up
Port 2 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. When a PCR2
bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR2 bit to 1 turns on the MOS pull-up for that pin.
The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset.
PCR2n
PUCR2n
MOS input pull-up
0
1
0
1
*
Off
On
Off
Note: * Don’t care
(n = 6 to 0)
Note: As P27 is an input-only pin, the MOS pull-up is turned off regardless of whether PUCR27
is set to 1 or cleared to 0.
133
8.4
Port 5
8.4.1
Overview
Port 5 is an 8-bit I/O port, configured as shown in figure 8.3.
P5 7 /WKP7
P5 6 /WKP6
P5 5 /WKP5
P5 4 /WKP4
Port 5
P5 3 /WKP3
P5 2 /WKP2
P5 1 /WKP1
P5 0 /WKP0
Figure 8.3 Port 5 Pin Configuration
8.4.2
Register Configuration and Description
Table 8.8 shows the port 5 register configuration.
Table 8.8
Port 5 Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Port data register 5
PDR5
R/W
H'00
H'FFD8
Port control register 5
PCR5
W
H'00
H'FFE8
Port pull-up control register 5
PUCR5
R/W
H'00
H'FF9E
Port mode register 5
PMR5
R/W
H'00
H'FF9B
134
Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR5 is an 8-bit register that stores data for port 5 pins P57 to P50. If port 5 is read while PCR5
bits are set to 1, the values stored in PDR5 are directly read, regardless of the actual pin states. If
port 5 is read while PCR5 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Upon reset, PDR5 is initialized to H'00.
Port Control Register 5 (PCR5)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR57
PCR56
PCR55
PCR54
PCR53
PCR52
PCR51
PCR50
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
PCR5 is an 8-bit register for controlling whether each of the port 5 pins P57 to P50 functions as an
input pin or output pin. Setting a PCR5 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output pin, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. The settings in PCR5 and in PDR5 are valid only
when the corresponding pin is designated as a general I/O pin in PMR5.
Upon reset, PCR5 is initialized to H'00.
PCR5 is a write-only register. All bits are read as 1.
Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PUCR57 PUCR56 PUCR55 PUCR54 PUCR53 PUCR52 PUCR51 PUCR50
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PUCR5 controls whether the MOS pull-up of each port 5 pin is on or off. When a PCR5 bit is
cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR5 bit to 1 turns on the MOS pull-up for the
corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0 turns off the MOS pull-up.
Upon reset, PUCR5 is initialized to H'00.
135
Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WKP 7
WKP 6
WKP 5
WKP 4
WKP 3
WKP 2
WKP 1
WKP 0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR5 is an 8-bit read/write register, controlling the selection of pin functions for port 5 pins.
Upon reset, PMR5 is initialized to H'00.
Bit n: P5n/WKPn Pin Function Switch (WKPn): This bit selects whether it is used as P5 n or as
WKPn.
Bit n: WKPn
Description
0
Functions as P5 n I/O pin
1
Functions as WKP n input pin
(initial value)
(n = 7 to 0)
8.4.3
Pin Functions
Table 8.9 shows the port 5 pin functions.
Table 8.9
Port 5 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P57/WKP 7 to
P50/WKP 0
The pin function depends on bit WKP n in PMR5 and bit PCR5n in PCR5.
(n = 7 to 0)
WKP n
PCR5n
Pin function
Note: * Don’t care
136
0
1
0
1
*
P5n input pin
P5n output pin
WKP n input pin
8.4.4
Pin States
Table 8.10 shows the port 5 pin states in each operating mode.
Table 8.10 Port 5 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Sleep
Subsleep Standby
P57/WKP 7
to P50/WKP 0
HighRetains Retains
impedance previous previous
state
state
Watch
Subactive Active
HighRetains Functional Functional
impedance* previous
state
Note: * A high-level signal is output when the MOS pull-up is in the on state.
8.4.5
MOS Input Pull-Up
Port 5 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. When a PCR5
bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR5 bit to 1 turns on the MOS pull-up for that pin.
The MOS pull-up function is in the off state after a reset.
PCR5n
PUCR5n
MOS input pull-up
0
1
0
1
*
Off
On
Off
Note: * Don’t care
(n = 7 to 0)
137
8.5
Port 6
8.5.1
Overview
Port 6 is an 8-bit I/O port, configured as shown in figure 8.4.
P6 7
P6 6
P6 5
P6 4
Port 6
P6 3
P6 2
P6 1
P6 0
Figure 8.4 Port 6 Pin Configuration
8.5.2
Register Configuration and Description
Table 8.11 shows the port 6 register configuration.
Table 8.11 Port 6 Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Port data register 6
PDR6
R/W
H'00
H'FFD9
Port control register 6
PCR6
W
H'00
H'FFE9
Port pull-up control register 6
PUCR6
R/W
H'00
H'FF9F
138
Port Data Register 6 (PDR6)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR6 is an 8-bit register that stores data for port 6 pins P67 to P60. If port 6 is read while PCR6
bits are set to 1, the values stored in PDR6 are directly read, regardless of the actual pin states. If
port 6 is read while PCR6 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Upon reset, PDR6 is initialized to H'00.
Port Control Register 6 (PCR6)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR67
PCR66
PCR65
PCR64
PCR63
PCR62
PCR61
PCR60
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
PCR6 is an 8-bit register for controlling whether each of the port 6 pins P67 to P60 functions as an
input pin or output pin. Setting a PCR6 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output pin, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
Upon reset, PCR6 is initialized to H'00.
PCR6 is a write-only register. All bits are read as 1.
Port Pull-Up Control Register 6 (PUCR6)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PUCR67 PUCR66 PUCR65 PUCR64 PUCR63 PUCR62 PUCR61 PUCR60
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PUCR6 controls whether the MOS pull-up of each port 6 pin is on or off. When a PCR6 bit is
cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR6 bit to 1 turns on the MOS pull-up for the
corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0 turns off the MOS pull-up.
Upon reset, PUCR6 is initialized to H'00.
139
8.5.3
Pin Functions
Table 8.12 shows the port 6 pin functions.
Table 8.12 Port 6 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P67 to P6 0
The pin function depends on bit PCR6n in PCR6.
(n = 7 to 0)
PCR6n
Pin function
8.5.4
0
1
P6n input pin
P6n output pin
Pin States
Table 8.13 shows the port 6 pin states in each operating mode.
Table 8.13 Port 6 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Sleep
Subsleep Standby
P67 to P6 0
HighRetains Retains
impedance previous previous
state
state
Watch
Subactive Active
HighRetains Functional Functional
impedance* previous
state
Note: * A high-level signal is output when the MOS pull-up is in the on state.
8.5.5
MOS Input Pull-Up
Port 6 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. When a PCR6
bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR6 bit to 1 turns on the MOS pull-up for that pin.
The MOS pull-up function is in the off state after a reset.
PCR6n
PUC6n
MOS input pull-up
Note: * Don’t care
(n = 7 to 0)
140
0
1
0
1
*
Off
On
Off
8.6
Port 7
8.6.1
Overview
Port 7 is an 8-bit I/O port, configured as shown in figure 8.5.
P7 7
P7 6
P7 5
P7 4
Port 7
P7 3
P7 2
P7 1
P7 0
Figure 8.5 Port 7 Pin Configuration
8.6.2
Register Configuration and Description
Table 8.14 shows the port 7 register configuration.
Table 8.14 Port 7 Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Port data register 7
PDR7
R/W
H'00
H'FFDA
Port control register 7
PCR7
W
H'00
H'FFEA
141
Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR7 is an 8-bit register that stores data for port 7 pins P77 to P70. If port 7 is read while PCR7
bits are set to 1, the values stored in PDR7 are directly read, regardless of the actual pin states. If
port 7 is read while PCR7 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Upon reset, PDR7 is initialized to H'00.
Port Control Register 7 (PCR7)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR77
PCR76
PCR75
PCR74
PCR73
PCR72
PCR71
PCR70
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
PCR7 is an 8-bit register for controlling whether each of the port 7 pins P77 to P70 functions as an
input pin or output pin. Setting a PCR7 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output pin, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
Upon reset, PCR7 is initialized to H'00.
PCR7 is a write-only register. All bits are read as 1.
142
8.6.3
Pin Functions
Table 8.15 shows the port 7 pin functions.
Table 8.15 Port 7 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P77 to P7 0
The pin function depends on bit PCR7n in PCR7.
(n = 7 to 0)
PCR7n
Pin function
8.6.4
0
1
P7n input pin
P7n output pin
Pin States
Table 8.16 shows the port 7 pin states in each operating mode.
Table 8.16 Port 7 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Sleep
Subsleep Standby
P77 to P7 0
HighRetains Retains
impedance previous previous
state
state
Highimpedance
Watch
Subactive Active
Retains Functional Functional
previous
state
143
8.7
Port 8
8.7.1
Overview
Port 8 is an 8-bit I/O port configured as shown in figure 8.6.
P8 7
P8 6
P8 5
P8 4
Port 8
P8 3
P8 2
P8 1
P8 0
Figure 8.6 Port 8 Pin Configuration
8.7.2
Register Configuration and Description
Table 8.17 shows the port 8 register configuration.
Table 8.17 Port 8 Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Port data register 8
PDR8
R/W
H'00
H'FFDB
Port control register 8
PCR8
W
H'00
H'FFEB
144
Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P87
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR8 is an 8-bit register that stores data for port 8 pins P87 to P80. If port 8 is read while PCR8
bits are set to 1, the values stored in PDR8 are directly read, regardless of the actual pin states. If
port 8 is read while PCR8 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Upon reset, PDR8 is initialized to H'00.
Port Control Register 8 (PCR8)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR87
PCR86
PCR85
PCR84
PCR83
PCR82
PCR81
PCR80
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
PCR8 is an 8-bit register for controlling whether each of the port 8 pins P87 to P80 functions as an
input or output pin. Setting a PCR8 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output pin, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
Upon reset, PCR8 is initialized to H'00.
PCR8 is a write-only register. All bits are read as 1.
145
8.7.3
Pin Functions
Table 8.18 gives the port 8 pin functions.
Table 8.18 Port 8 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P87 to P8 0
The pin function depends on bit PCR8n in PCR8.
(n = 7 to 0)
PCR8n
Pin function
8.7.4
0
1
P8n input pin
P8n output pin
Pin States
Table 8.19 shows the port 8 pin states in each operating mode.
Table 8.19 Port 8 Pin States
Pins
Reset
P87 to P8 0
HighRetains Retains
impedance previous previous
state
state
146
Sleep
Subsleep Standby
Highimpedance
Watch
Subactive Active
Retains Functional Functional
previous
state
8.8
Port A
8.8.1
Overview
Port A is a 3-bit I/O port configured as shown in figure 8.7.
PA 3
PA 2
Port A
PA 1
Figure 8.7 Port A Pin Configuration
8.8.2
Register Configuration and Description
Table 8.20 shows the port A register configuration.
Table 8.20 Port A Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Port data register A
PDRA
R/W
H'F0
H'FFDD
Port control register A
PCRA
W
H'F1
H'FFED
147
Port Data Register A (PDRA)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
PA3
PA2
PA1
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
PDRA is an 8-bit register that stores data for port A pins PA3 to PA 1. If port A is read while PCRA
bits are set to 1, the values stored in PDRA are directly read, regardless of the actual pin states. If
port A is read while PCRA bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read.
Upon reset, PDRA is initialized to H'F0.
Port Control Register A (PCRA)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
PCRA3
PCRA2
PCRA1
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
W
W
W
—
PCRA is an 8-bit register for controlling whether each of the port A pins PA3 to PA1 functions as
an input or output pin. Setting a PCRA bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output pin, while
clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin.
Upon reset, PCRA is initialized to H'F1.
PCRA is a write-only register. All bits are read as 1.
148
8.8.3
Pin Functions
Table 8.21 gives the port A pin functions.
Table 8.21 Port A Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
PA3 to PA 1
The pin function depends on bit PCRAn in PCRA.
(n = 3 to 1)
PCRAn
Pin function
8.8.4
0
1
PAn input pin
PAn output pin
Pin States
Table 8.22 shows the port A pin states in each operating mode.
Table 8.22 Port A Pin States
Pins
Reset
Sleep
Subsleep Standby
PA3 to PA 1
HighRetains Retains
impedance previous previous
state
state
Highimpedance
Watch
Subactive Active
Retains Functional Functional
previous
state
149
8.9
Port B
8.9.1
Overview
Port B is an 2-bit input-only port configured as shown in figure 8.8.
PB7 /AN 7
Port B
PB6 /AN 6
Figure 8.8 Port B Pin Configuration
8.9.2
Register Configuration and Description
Table 8.23 shows the port B register configuration.
Table 8.23 Port B Register
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Address
Port data register B
PDRB
R
H'FFDE
Port Data Register B (PDRB)
Bit
Read/Write
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7
PB6
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
—
—
—
—
—
—
Reading PDRB always gives the pin states. However, if a port B pin is selected as an analog input
channel for the A/D converter by AMR bits CH3 to CH0, that pin reads 0 regardless of the input
voltage.
150
Section 9 Timers
9.1
Overview
The H8/3627 Series provides three timers (timers A, F, and G) on-chip.
Table 9.1 outlines the functions of timers A, F, and G.
Table 9.1
Timer Functions
Event
Input Pin
Waveform
Output Pin
—
—
Time base
øW/128
—
(choice of 4
overflow periods)
—
Clock output
ø/4 to ø/32,
øW/4 to ø W /32
(8 choices)
—
TMOW
• 16-bit free-running
timer
• Event counter
• Can be used as two
independent 8-bit
timers
• Output compare
ø/2 to ø/32
(4 choices)
TMIF
TMOFL
• 8-bit timer
• Input capture
• Interval timer
ø/2 to ø/64, øW/2
(4 choices)
TMIG
Name
Functions
Timer A
8-bit
timer
Timer F
Timer G
Internal Clock
Interval timer ø/8 to ø/8192
(8 choices)
Remarks
TMOFH
—
• Counter clear
designation
possible
• Built-in noise
canceller
circuit for input
capture
151
9.2
Timer A
9.2.1
Overview
Timer A is an 8-bit timer with interval timing and real-time clock time-base functions. The clock
time-base function is available when a 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator is connected. A clock signal
divided from 32.768 kHz or from the system clock can be output at the TMOW pin.
Features: Features of timer A are given below.
• Choice of eight internal clock sources (ø/8192, ø/4096, ø/2048, ø/512, ø/256, ø/128, ø/32, ø/8).
• Choice of four overflow periods (1 s, 0.5 s, 0.25 s, 31.25 ms) when timer A is used as a clock
time base (using a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator).
• An interrupt is requested when the counter overflows.
• Any of eight clock signals can be output from pin TMOW: 32.768 kHz divided by 32, 16, 8, or
4 (1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz), or the system clock divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4.
Block Diagram: Figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of timer A.
øW
1/4
TMA
PSW
øW /32
øW /16
øW /8
øW /4
øW /128
TMOW
ø
÷256 *
÷128 *
÷ 64 *
ø/8192, ø/4096, ø/2048,
ø/512, ø/256, ø/128,
ø/32, ø/8
÷ 8*
TCA
ø/32
ø/16
ø/8
ø/4
Internal data bus
øW/4
PSS
IRRTA
Legend:
TMA: Timer mode register A
TCA:
Timer counter A
IRRTA: Timer A overflow interrupt request flag
PSW: Prescaler W
PSS:
Prescaler S
Note: Can be selected only when the prescaler W output (ø W /128) is used as the TCA input clock.
Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of Timer A
152
Pin Configuration: Table 9.2 shows the timer A pin configuration.
Table 9.2
Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Clock output
TMOW
Output
Output of waveform generated by timer A output
circuit
Register Configuration: Table 9.3 shows the register configuration of timer A.
Table 9.3
Timer A Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Timer mode register A
TMA
R/W
H'10
H'FFB0
Timer counter A
TCA
R
H'00
H'FFB1
9.2.2
Register Descriptions
Timer Mode Register A (TMA)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TMA7
TMA6
TMA5
—
TMA3
TMA2
TMA1
TMA0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TMA is an 8-bit read/write register for selecting the prescaler, input clock, and output clock.
Upon reset, TMA is initialized to H'10.
Bits 7 to 5—Clock Output Select (TMA7 to TMA5): Bits 7 to 5 choose which of eight clock
signals is output at the TMOW pin. The system clock divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4 can be output in
active mode and sleep mode. A 32.768 kHz signal divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4 can be output in
active mode, sleep mode, and subactive mode.
153
Bit 7: TMA7
Bit 6: TMA6
Bit 5: TMA5
Clock Output
0
0
0
ø/32
1
ø/16
0
ø/8
1
ø/4
0
øW/32
1
øW/16
0
øW/8
1
øW/4
1
1
0
1
(initial value)
Bit 4—Reserved Bit: Bit 4 is reserved; it is always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
Bits 3 to 0—Internal Clock Select (TMA3 to TMA0): Bits 3 to 0 select the clock input to TCA.
The selection is made as follows.
Description
Bit 3:
TMA3
Bit 2:
TMA2
Bit 1:
TMA1
Bit 0:
TMA0
Prescaler and Divider Ratio
or Overflow Period
Function
0
0
0
0
PSS, ø/8192
Interval timer
1
PSS, ø/4096
0
PSS, ø/2048
1
PSS, ø/512
0
PSS, ø/256
1
PSS, ø/128
0
PSS, ø/32
1
PSS, ø/8
0
PSW, 1 s
1
PSW, 0.5 s
0
PSW, 0.25 s
1
PSW, 0.03125 s
0
PSW and TCA are reset
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
154
(initial value)
Clock time base
Timer Counter A (TCA)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCA7
TCA6
TCA5
TCA4
TCA3
TCA2
TCA1
TCA0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCA is an 8-bit read-only up-counter, which is incremented by internal clock input. The clock
source for input to this counter is selected by bits TMA3 to TMA0 in timer mode register A
(TMA). TCA values can be read by the CPU in active mode, but cannot be read in subactive
mode. When TCA overflows, the IRRTA bit in interrupt request register 1 (IRR1) is set to 1.
TCA is cleared by setting bits TMA3 and TMA2 of TMA to 11.
Upon reset, TCA is initialized to H'00.
9.2.3
Timer Operation
Interval Timer Operation: When bit TMA3 in timer mode register A (TMA) is cleared to 0,
timer A functions as an 8-bit interval timer.
Upon reset, TCA is cleared to H'00 and bit TMA3 is cleared to 0, so up-counting and interval
timing resume immediately. The clock input to timer A is selected by bits TMA2 to TMA0 in
TMA; any of eight internal clock signals output by prescaler S can be selected.
After the count value in TCA reaches H'FF, the next clock signal input causes timer A to
overflow, setting bit IRRTA to 1 in interrupt request register 1 (IRR1). If IENTA = 1 in interrupt
enable register 1 (IENR1), a CPU interrupt is requested.*
At overflow, TCA returns to H'00 and starts counting up again. In this mode timer A functions as
an interval timer that generates an overflow output at intervals of 256 input clock pulses.
Note: * For details on interrupts, see 3.3, Interrupts.
Real-Time Clock Time Base Operation: When bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, timer A functions
as a real-time clock time base by counting clock signals output by prescaler W.
The overflow period of timer A is set by bits TMA1 and TMA0 in TMA. A choice of four periods
is available. In time base operation (TMA3 = 1), setting bit TMA2 to 1 clears both TCA and
prescaler W to their initial values of H'00.
155
Clock Output: Setting bit TMOW in port mode register 1 (PMR1) to 1 causes a clock signal to be
output at pin TMOW. Eight different clock output signals can be selected by means of bits TMA7
to TMA5 in TMA. The system clock divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4 can be output in active mode and
sleep mode. A 32.768 kHz signal divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4 can be output in active mode, sleep
mode, and subactive mode.
9.2.4
Timer A Operation States
Table 9.4 summarizes the timer A operation states.
Table 9.4
Timer A Operation States
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
Standby
Reset
Functions Functions Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
Reset
Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Halted
Reset
Functions Retained Retained Functions Retained Retained
Operation Mode
Reset Active
TCA Interval
Clock time base
TMA
Sleep
Note: When real-time clock time-base functions are selected as the internal clock of TCA in active
mode or sleep mode, the internal clock is not synchronous with the system clock, so it is
synchronized by a synchronizing circuit. This may result in a maximum error of 1/ø (s) in the
count cycle.
156
9.3
Timer F
9.3.1
Overview
Timer F is a 16-bit timer with an output compare function. Compare match signals can be used to
reset the counter, request an interrupt, or toggle the output. Timer F can also be used for external
event counting, and can operate as two independent 8-bit timers, timer FH and timer FL.
Features: Features of timer F are given below.
• Choice of four internal clock sources (ø/32, ø/16, ø/4, ø/2) or an external clock (can be used as
an external event counter).
• Output from pin TMOFH is toggled by one compare match signal (the initial value of the
toggle output can be set).
• Counter can be reset by the compare match signal.
• Two interrupt sources: counter overflow and compare match.
• Can operate as two independent 8-bit timers (timer FH and timer FL) in 8-bit mode.
Timer FH
 8-bit timer (clocked by timer FL overflow signals when timer F operates as a 16-bit timer).
 Choice of four internal clocks (ø/32, ø/16, ø/4, ø/2).
 Output from pin TMOFH is toggled by one compare match signal (the initial value of the
toggle output can be set).
 Counter can be reset by the compare match signal.
 Two interrupt sources: counter overflow and compare match.
Timer FL
 8-bit timer/event counter
 Choice of four internal clocks (ø/32, ø/16, ø/4, ø/2) or event input at pin TMIF.
 Output from pin TMOFL is toggled by one compare match signal (the initial value of the
toggle output can be set).
 Counter can be reset by the compare match signal.
 Two interrupt sources: counter overflow and compare match.
157
Block Diagram: Figure 9.2 shows a block diagram of timer F.
ø
PSS
IRRTFL
TCRF
TCFL
TMIF
Toggle
circuit
Compare circuit
Internal data bus
TMOFL
OCRFL
TCFH
TMOFH
Toggle
circuit
Compare circuit
Match
OCRFH
TCSRF
Legend:
TCRF:
TCSRF:
TCFH:
TCFL:
OCRFH:
OCRFL:
IRRTFH:
IRRTFL:
PSS:
IRRTFH
Timer control register F
Timer control status register F
8-bit timer counter FH
8-bit timer counter FL
Output compare register FH
Output compare register FL
Timer FH interrupt request flag
Timer FL interrupt request flag
Prescaler S
Figure 9.2 Block Diagram of Timer F
158
Pin Configuration: Table 9.5 shows the timer F pin configuration.
Table 9.5
Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Timer F event input
TMIF
Input
Event input to TCFL
Timer FH output
TMOFH
Output
Timer FH toggle output
Timer FL output
TMOFL
Output
Timer FL toggle output
Register Configuration: Table 9.6 shows the register configuration of timer F.
Table 9.6
Timer F Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Timer control register F
TCRF
W
H'00
H'FFB6
Timer control/status register F
TCSRF
R/W
H'00
H'FFB7
8-bit timer counter FH
TCFH
R/W
H'00
H'FFB8
8-bit timer counter FL
TCFL
R/W
H'00
H'FFB9
Output compare register FH
OCRFH
R/W
H'FF
H'FFBA
Output compare register FL
OCRFL
R/W
H'FF
H'FFBB
9.3.2
Register Descriptions
16-Bit Timer Counter (TCF)
8-Bit Timer Counter (TCFH)
8-Bit Timer Counter (TCFL)
TCF
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
TCFH
TCFL
TCF is a 16-bit read/write up-counter consisting of two cascaded 8-bit timer counters, TCFH and
TCFL. TCF can be used as a 16-bit counter, with TCFH as the upper 8 bits and TCFL as the lower
8 bits of the counter, or TCFH and TCFL can be used as independent 8-bit counters.
159
TCFH and TCFL can be read and written by the CPU, but in 16-bit mode, data transfer with the
CPU takes place via a temporary register (TEMP). For details see 9.3.3, Interface with the CPU.
Upon reset, TCFH and TCFL are each initialized to H'00.
16-Bit Mode (TCF): 16-bit mode is selected by clearing bit CKSH2 to 0 in timer control register
F (TCRF). The TCF input clock is selected by TCRF bits CKSL2 to CKSL0.
Timer control status register F (TCSRF) can be set so that counter TCF will be cleared by compare
match.
When TCF overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the overflow flag (OVFH) in TCSRF is set to 1. If
bit OVIEH in TCSRF is set to 1 when an overflow occurs, bit IRRTFH in interrupt request register
2 (IRR2) will be set to 1; and if bit IENTFH in interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2) is set to 1, a
CPU interrupt will be requested.
8-Bit Mode (TCFH, TCFL): When bit CKSH2 in timer control register F (TCRF) is set to 1,
timer F functions as two separate 8-bit counters, TCFH and TCFL. The TCFH (TCFL) input clock
is selected by TCRF bits CKSH2 to CKSH0 (CKSL2 to CKSL0).
TCFH (TCFL) can be cleared by a compare match signal. This designation is made in bit CCLRH
(CCLRL) in TCSRF.
When TCFH (TCFL) overflows from H'FF to H'00, the overflow flag OVFH (OVFL) in TCSRF is
set to 1. If bit OVIEH (OVIEL) in TCSRF is set to 1 when an overflow occurs, bit IRRTFH
(IRRTHL) in interrupt request register 2 (IRR2) will be set to 1; and if bit IENTFH (IENTFL) in
interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2) is set to 1, a CPU interrupt will be requested.
16-Bit Output Compare Register (OCRF)
8-Bit Output Compare Register (OCRFH)
8-Bit Output Compare Register (OCRFL)
OCRF
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
OCRFH
OCRFL
OCRF is a 16-bit read/write output compare register consisting of two 8-bit read/write registers
OCRFH and OCRFL. It can be used as a 16-bit output compare register, with OCRFH as the
160
upper 8 bits and OCRFL as the lower 8 bits of the register, or OCRFH and OCRFL can be used as
independent 8-bit registers.
OCRFH and OCRFL can be read and written by the CPU, but in 16-bit mode, data transfer with
the CPU takes place via a temporary register (TEMP). For details see 9.3.3, Interface with the
CPU.
Upon reset, OCRFH and OCRFL are each initialized to H'FF.
16-Bit Mode (OCRF): 16-bit mode is selected by clearing bit CKSH2 to 0 in timer control
register F (TCRF). The OCRF contents are always compared with the 16-bit timer counter (TCF).
When the contents match, the compare match flag (CMFH) in TCSRF is set to 1. Also, IRRTFH
in interrupt request register 2 (IRR2) is set to 1. If bit IENTFH in interrupt enable register 2
(IENR2) is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested.
Output for pin TMOFH can be toggled by compare match. The output level can also be set to high
or low by bit TOLH of timer control register F (TCRF).
8-Bit Mode (OCRFH, OCRFL): Setting bit CKSH2 in TCRF to 1 results in two 8-bit
independent registers, OCRFH and OCRFL.
The OCRFH contents are always compared with TCFH, and the OCRFL contents are always
compared with TCFL. When the contents match, the compare match flag (CMFH or CMFL) in
TCSRF is set to 1. Also, bit IRRTFH (IRRTFL) in interrupt request register 2 (IRR2) set to 1. If
bit IENTFH (IENTFL) in interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2) is set to 1 at this time, a CPU
interrupt is requested.
The output at pin TMOFH (TMOFL) can be toggled by compare match. The output level can also
be set to high or low by bit TOLH (TOLL) of the timer control register (TCRF).
161
Timer Control Register F (TCRF)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TOLH
CKSH2
CKSH1
CKSH0
TOLL
CKSL2
CKSL1
CKSL0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
TCRF is an 8-bit write-only register. It is used to switch between 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode, to
select among four internal clocks and an external event, and to select the output level at pins
TMOFH and TMOFL.
Upon reset, TCRF is initialized to H'00.
Bit 7—Toggle Output Level H (TOLH): Bit 7 sets the output level at pin TMOFH. The setting
goes into effect immediately after this bit is written.
Bit 7: TOLH
Description
0
Low level
1
High level
(initial value)
Bits 6 to 4—Clock Select H (CKSH2 to CKSH0): Bits 6 to 4 select the input to TCFH from four
internal clock signals or the overflow of TCFL.
Bit 6: CKSH2
Bit 5: CKSH1
Bit 4: CKSH0
Description
0
*
*
16-bit mode selected. TCFL overflow signals
are counted.
(initial value)
1
0
0
Internal clock: ø/32
1
Internal clock: ø/16
0
Internal clock: ø/4
1
Internal clock: ø/2
1
Note: * Don’t care
Bit 3—Toggle Output Level L (TOLL): Bit 3 sets the output level at pin TMOFL. The setting
goes into effect immediately after this bit is written.
Bit 3: TOLL
Description
0
Low level
1
High level
162
(initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Clock Select L (CKSL2 to CKSL0): Bits 2 to 0 select the input to TCFL from four
internal clock signals or external event input.
Bit 2: CKSL2
Bit 1: CKSL1
Bit 0: CKSL0
Description
0
*
*
External event (TMIF). Rising or falling edge
is counted (see note).
(initial value)
1
0
0
Internal clock: ø/32
1
Internal clock: ø/16
0
Internal clock: ø/4
1
Internal clock: ø/2
1
*: Don’t care
Note: The edge of the external event signal is selected by bit IEG3 in the IRQ edge select register
(IEGR). See 3.3.2, Interrupt Control Registers, for details on the IRQ edge select register.
Note that switching the TMIF pin function by changing bit IRQ3 in port mode register 1
(PMR1) from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 while the TMIF pin is at the low level may cause the timer
F counter to be incremented.
Timer Control/Status Register F (TCSRF)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVFH
CMFH
OVIEH
CCLRH
OVFL
CMFL
OVIEL
CCLRL
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCSRF is an 8-bit read/write register. It is used for counter clear selection, overflow and compare
match indication, and enabling of interrupts caused by timer overflow.
Upon reset, TCSRF is initialized to H'00.
Bit 7—Timer Overflow Flag H (OVFH): Bit 7 is a status flag indicating TCFH overflow (H'FF
to H'00). This flag is set by hardware and cleared by software. It cannot be set by software.
Bit 7: OVFH
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
After reading OVFH = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVFH
1
[Setting conditions]
Set when the value of TCFH goes from H'FF to H'00
(initial value)
163
Bit 6—Compare Match Flag H (CMFH): Bit 6 is a status flag indicating a compare match
between TCFH and OCRFH. This flag is set by hardware and cleared by software. It cannot be set
by software.
Bit 6: CMFH
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
After reading CMFH = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFH
1
[Setting conditions]
Set when the TCFH value matches OCRFH value
(initial value)
Bit 5—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable H (OVIEH): Bit 5 enables or disables TCFH
overflow interrupts.
Bit 5: OVIEH
Description
0
TCFH overflow interrupt disabled
1
TCFH overflow interrupt enabled
(initial value)
Bit 4—Counter Clear H (CCLRH): In 16-bit mode, bit 4 selects whether or not TCF is cleared
when a compare match occurs between TCF and OCRF.
In 8-bit mode, bit 4 selects whether or not TCFH is cleared when a compare match occurs between
TCFH and OCRFH.
Bit 4: CCLRH
Description
0
16-bit mode: TCF clearing by compare match disabled
(initial value)
8-bit mode: TCFH clearing by compare match disabled
1
16-bit mode: TCF clearing by compare match enabled
8-bit mode: TCFH clearing by compare match enabled
Bit 3—Timer Overflow Flag L (OVFL): Bit 3 is a status flag indicating TCFL overflow (H'FF
to H'00). This flag is set by hardware and cleared by software. It cannot be set by software.
Bit 3: OVFL
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
After reading OVFL = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVFL
1
[Setting conditions]
Set when the value of TCFL goes from H'FF to H'00
164
(initial value)
Bit 2—Compare Match Flag L (CMFL): Bit 2 is a status flag indicating a compare match
between TCFL and OCRFL. This flag is set by hardware and cleared by software. It cannot be set
by software.
Bit 2: CMFL
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
After reading CMFL = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFL
1
[Setting conditions]
Set when the TCFL value matches the OCRFL value
(initial value)
Bit 1—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable L (OVIEL): Bit 1 enables or disables TCFL overflow
interrupts.
Bit 1: OVIEL
Description
0
TCFL overflow interrupt disabled
1
TCFL overflow interrupt enabled
(initial value)
Bit 0—Counter Clear L (CCLRL): Bit 0 selects whether or not TCFL is cleared when a
compare match occurs between TCFL and OCRFL.
Bit 0: CCLRL
Description
0
TCFL clearing by compare match disabled
1
TCFL clearing by compare match enabled
(initial value)
165
9.3.3
Interface with the CPU
TCF and OCRF are 16-bit read/write registers, whereas the data bus between the CPU and on-chip
peripheral modules has an 8-bit width. For this reason, when the CPU accesses TCF or OCRF, it
makes use of an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP).
In 16-bit mode, when reading or writing TCF or writing OCRF, always use two consecutive byte
size MOV instructions, and always access the upper byte first. Data will not be transferred
properly if only the upper byte or only the lower byte is accessed. In 8-bit mode there is no such
restriction on the order of access.
Write Access: When the upper byte is written, the upper-byte data is loaded into the TEMP
register. Next when the lower byte is written, the data in TEMP goes to the upper byte of the
register, and the lower-byte data goes directly to the lower byte of the register. Figure 9.3 shows a
TCF write operation when H'AA55 is written to TCF.
Read Access: When the upper byte of TCF is read, the upper-byte data is sent directly to the CPU,
and the lower byte is loaded into TEMP. Next when the lower byte is read, the lower byte in
TEMP is sent to the CPU.
When the upper byte of OCRF is read, the upper-byte data is sent directly to the CPU. Next when
the lower byte is read, the lower-byte data is sent directly to the CPU.
Figure 9.4 shows a TCF read operation when H'AAFF is read from TCF.
166
When writing the upper byte
CPU
[H'AA]
Internal data bus
Bus
interface
TEMP
[H'AA]
TCFH
[
]
TCFL
[
]
When writing the lower byte
CPU
[H'55]
Internal data bus
Bus
interface
TEMP
[H'AA]
TCFH
[H'AA]
TCFL
[H'55]
Figure 9.3 TCF Write Operation (CPU → TCF)
167
When reading the upper byte
CPU
[H'AA]
Internal data bus
Bus
interface
TEMP
(H'FF)
TCFH
[H'AA]
TCFL
[H'FF]
When reading the lower byte
CPU
[H'FF]
Internal data bus
Bus
interface
TEMP
[H'FF]
TCFH
[AB] *
Note: * Becomes H'AB00 if counter is incremented once.
Figure 9.4 TCF Read Operation (TCF → CPU)
168
TCFL
[00] *
9.3.4
Timer Operation
Timer F is a 16-bit timer/counter that increments with each input clock. When the value set in
output compare register F matches the count in timer F, the timer can be cleared, an interrupt can
be requested, and the port output can be toggled. Timer F can also be used as two independent
8-bit timers.
Timer F Operation: Timer F can operate in either 16-bit timer mode or 8-bit timer mode. These
modes are described below.
• 16-bit timer mode
Timer F operates in 16-bit timer mode when the CKSH2 bit in timer control register F (TCRF)
is cleared to 0.
A reset initializes timer counter F (TCF) to H'0000, output compare register F (OCRF) to
H'FFFF, and timer control register F (TCRF) and timer control status register F (TCSRF) to
H'00. Timer F begins counting external event input signals (TMIF). The edge of the external
event signal is selected by the IEG3 bit in the IRQ edge select register (IEGR).
The operational clock of timer F can be selected by setting bits CSKL2 through CKSL0 in
TCRF, from four internal clocks output from prescaler S as well as from an external clock.
TCF is continuously compared with the contents of OCRF. When these two values match, the
CMFH bit in TCSRF is set to 1. At this time if IENTFH of IENR2 is 1, a CPU interrupt is
requested and the output at pin TMOFH is toggled. If the CCLRH bit in TCSRF is 1, TCF is
cleared. The output at pin TMOFH can also be set by the TOLH bit in TCRF.
If timer F overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000), the OVFH bit in TCSRF is set to 1. At this
time, if the OVIEH bit in TCSRF and the IENTFH bit in IENR2 are both 1, CPU interrupt is
requested.
• 8-bit timer mode
When the CKSH2 bit in TCRF is set to 1, timer F operates as two independent 8-bit timers,
TCFH and TCFL. The input clock of TCFH/TCFL is selected by bits CKSH2 to
CKSH0/CKSL2 to CKSL0 in TCRF.
When TCFH/TCFL and the contents of OCRFH/OCRFL match, the CMFH/CMFL bit in
TCSRF is set to 1. If the IENTFH/IENTFL bit in IENR2 is 1, a CPU interrupt is requested and
the output at pin TMOFH/TMOFL is toggled. If the CCLRH/CCLRL bit in TCRF is 1,
TCFH/TCFL is cleared. The output at pin TMOFH/TMOFL can also be set by the
TOLH/TOLL bit in TCRF.
When TCFH/TCFL overflows from H'FF to H'00, the OVFH/OVFL bit in TCSRF is set to 1.
At this time, if the OVIEH/OVIEL bit in TCSRF and the IENTFH/IENTFL bit in IENR2 are
both 1, a CPU interrupt is requested.
169
TCF Count Timing: TCF is incremented by each pulse of the input clock (internal clock or
external event).
• Internal clock
The settings of bits CKSH2 to CKSH0 or bits CKSL2 to CKSL0 in TCRF select one of four
internal clock signals (ø/32, ø/16, ø/4, or ø/2) divided from the system clock (ø).
• External event
External event input is selected by clearing bit CKSL2 to 0 in TCRF. Either rising or falling
edges of the clock input can be counted. The edge is selected by bit IEG3 in IEGR. An external
clock pulse width of at least two system clock cycles (ø) is necessary; otherwise the counter
will not operate properly.
TMOFH and TMOFL Output Timing: The outputs at pins TMOFH and TMOFL are the values
set in bits TOLH and TOLL in TCRF. When a compare match occurs, the output value is inverted.
Figure 9.5 shows the output timing.
ø
TMIF
(when IEG3 = 1)
Count input
clock
TCF
OCRF
N
N+1
N
N
N+1
N
Compare match
signal
TMOFH, TMOFL
Figure 9.5 TMOFH, TMOFL Output Timing
TCF Clear Timing: TCF can be cleared at compare match with OCRF.
Timer Overflow Flag (OVF) Set Timing: OVF is set to 1 when TCF overflows (goes from
H'FFFF to H'0000).
170
Compare Match Flag Set Timing: The compare match flags (CMFH or CMFL) are set to 1
when a compare match occurs between TCF and OCRF. A compare match signal is generated in
the final state in which the values match (when TCF changes from the matching count value to the
next value). When TCF and OCRF match, a compare match signal is not generated until the next
counter clock pulse.
Timer F Operation States: Table 9.7 summarizes the timer F operation states.
Table 9.7
Timer F Operation States
Operation Mode
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
Standby
TCF
Reset
Functions
Functions
Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
OCRF
Reset
Functions
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained Retained
TCRF
Reset
Functions
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained Retained
TCSRF
Reset
Functions
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained Retained
9.3.5
Application Notes
The following conflicts can arise in timer F operation.
16-Bit Timer Mode: The output at pin TMOFH toggles when all 16 bits match and a compare
match signal is generated. If the compare match signal occurs at the same time as new data is
written in TCRF by a MOV instruction, however, the new value written in bit TOLH will be
output at pin TMOFH. The TMOFL output in 16-bit mode is indeterminate, so this output should
not be used. Use the pin as a general input or output port.
If an OCRFL write occurs at the same time as a compare match signal, the compare match signal
is inhibited. If a compare match occurs between the written data and the counter value, however, a
compare match signal will be generated at that point. The compare match signal is output in
synchronization with the TCFL clock, so if this clock is stopped no compare match signal will be
generated, even if a compare match occurs.
Compare match flag CMFH is set when all 16 bits match and a compare match signal is generated;
bit CMFL is set when the setting conditions are met for the lower 8 bits.
The overflow flag (OVFH) is set when TCF overflows; bit OVFL is set if the setting conditions
are met when the lower 8 bits overflow. If a write to TCFL occurs at the same time as an overflow
signal, the overflow signal is not output.
171
8-Bit Timer Mode
• TCFH and OCRFH
The output at pin TMOFH toggles when there is a compare match. If the compare match signal
occurs at the same time as new data is written in TCRF by a MOV instruction, however, the
new value written in bit TOLH will be output at pin TMOFH.
If an OCRFH write occurs at the same time as a compare match signal, the compare match
signal is inhibited. If a compare match occurs between the written data and the counter value,
however, a compare match signal will be generated at that point. The compare match signal is
output in synchronization with the TCFH clock.
If a TCFH write occurs at the same time as an overflow signal, the overflow signal is not
output.
• TCFL and OCRFL
The output at pin TMOFL toggles when there is a compare match. If the compare match signal
occurs at the same time as new data is written in TCRF by a MOV instruction, however, the
new value written in bit TOLL will be output at pin TMOFL.
If an OCRFL write occurs at the same time as a compare match signal, the compare match
signal is inhibited. If a compare match occurs between the written data and the counter value,
however, a compare match signal will be generated at that point. The compare match signal is
output in synchronization with the TCFL clock, so if this clock is stopped no compare match
signal will be generated, even if a compare match occurs.
If a TCFL write occurs at the same time as an overflow signal, the overflow signal is not
output.
172
9.4
Timer G
9.4.1
Overview
Timer G is an 8-bit timer, with input capture/interval functions for separately capturing the rising
edge and falling edge of pulses input at the input capture pin (input capture input signal). Timer G
has a built-in noise canceller circuit that can eliminate high-frequency noise from the input capture
signal, enabling accurate measurement of its duty cycle. When timer G is not used for input
capture, it functions as an 8-bit interval timer.
Features: Features of timer G are given below.
• Choice of four internal clock sources (ø/64, ø/32, ø/2, øW/2)
• Input capture function
Separate input capture functions are provided for the rising and falling edges.
• Counter overflow detection
Can detect whether overflow occurred when the input capture signal was high or low.
• Choice of counter clear
It is possible to select whether or not the counter is cleared at the rising edge, falling edge, or
both edges of the input capture input signal.
• Two interrupt sources
There is one input capture interrupt source and one overflow interrupt source. For input
capture, the rising or falling edge can be selected.
• Built-in noise-canceller circuit
The noise canceller circuit can eliminate high-frequency noise in the input capture signal.
• Operates in subactive and subsleep modes
When øW/2 is selected as the internal clock source, timer G can operate in the subactive and
subsleep modes.
173
Block Diagram: Figure 9.6 shows a block diagram of timer G.
PSS
ø
TMG
ø W /2
TMIG
Internal data bus
Level
sense
circuit
ICRGF
Edge
sense
circuit
Noise
canceller
circuit
TCG
NCS
ICRGR
IRRTG
Legend:
TMG:
TCG:
ICRGF:
ICRGR:
IRRTG:
NCS:
PSS:
Timer mode register G
Timer counter G
Input capture register GF
Input capture register GR
Timer G interrupt request flag
Noise canceller select
Prescaler S
Figure 9.6 Block Diagram of Timer G
Pin Configuration: Table 9.8 shows the timer G pin configuration.
Table 9.8
Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Input capture input
TMIG
Input
Input capture
174
Register Configuration: Table 9.9 shows the register configuration of timer G.
Table 9.9
Timer G Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Timer mode register G
TMG
R/W
H'00
H'FFBC
Timer counter G
TCG
—
H'00
—
Input capture register GF
ICRGF
R
H'00
H'FFBD
Input capture register GR
ICRGR
R
H'00
H'FFBE
9.4.2
Register Descriptions
Timer Counter G (TCG)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCG7
TCG6
TCG5
TCG4
TCG3
TCG2
TCG1
TCG0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Timer counter G (TCG) is an 8-bit up-counter which is incremented by an input clock. The input
clock signal is selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in timer mode register G (TMG).
To use TCG as an input capture timer, set bit TMIG to 1 in PMR1; to use TCG as an interval
timer, clear bit TMIG to 0.* When TCG is used as an input capture timer, the TCG value can be
cleared at the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture signal, depending on
settings in TMG.
When TCG overflows (goes from H'FF to H'00), if the timer overflow interrupt enable bit (OVIE)
is set to 1 in TMG, bit IRRTG in interrupt request register 2 (IRR2) is set to 1. If in addition bit
IENTG in interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2) is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested. Details on
interrupts are given in 3.3, Interrupts.
TCG cannot be read or written by the CPU.
Upon reset, TCG is initialized to H'00.
Note: * An input capture signal may be generated when TMIG is rewritten.
175
Input Capture Register GF (ICRGF)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICRGF7 ICRGF6 ICRGF5 ICRGF4 ICRGF3 ICRGF2 ICRGF1 ICRGF0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ICRGF is an 8-bit read-only register. When the falling edge of the input capture signal is detected,
the TCG value at that time is transferred to ICRGF. If the input capture interrupt select bit (IIEGS)
is set to 1 in TMG, bit IRRTG in interrupt request register 2 (IRR2) is set to 1. If in addition bit
IENTG in interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2) is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested. Details on
interrupts are given in 3.3, Interrupts.
To ensure proper input capture when the noise canceller is not used, the pulse width of the input
capture signal should be at least 2ø or 2øSUB.
Upon reset, ICRGF is initialized to H'00.
Input Capture Register GR (ICRGR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICRGR7 ICRGR6 ICRGR5 ICRGR4 ICRGR3 ICRGR2 ICRGR1 ICRGR0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ICRGR is an 8-bit read-only register. When the rising edge of the input capture signal is detected,
the TCG value at that time is sent to ICRGR. If the IIEGS bit is cleared to 0 in TMG, bit IRRTG
in interrupt request register 2 (IRR2) is set to 1. If in addition bit IENTG in interrupt enable
register 2 (IENR2) is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested. Details on interrupts are given in 3.3,
Interrupts.
To ensure proper input capture when the noise canceller is not used, the pulse width of the input
capture signal should be at least 2ø or 2øSUB.
Upon reset, ICRGR is initialized to H'00.
176
Timer Mode Register G (TMG)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVFH
OVFL
OVIE
IIEGS
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W*
R/W*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear flag.
TMG is an 8-bit read/write register. It controls the choice of four internal clocks, counter clear
selection, and edge selection for input capture interrupt requests. It also indicates overflow status
and enables or disables overflow interrupt requests.
Upon reset, TMG is initialized to H'00.
Bit 7—Timer Overflow Flag H (OVFH): Bit 7 is a status flag indicating that TCG overflowed
(from H'FF to H'00) when the input capture signal was high. This flag is set by hardware and
cleared by software. It cannot be set by software.
Bit 7: OVFH
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
After reading OVFH = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVFH
1
[Setting conditions]
Set when the value of TCG overflows from H'FF to H'00
(initial value)
Bit 6—Timer Overflow Flag L (OVFL): Bit 6 is a status flag indicating that TCG overflowed
(from H'FF to H'00) when the input capture signal was low, or in interval timer operation. This
flag is set by hardware and cleared by software. It cannot be set by software.
Bit 6: OVFL
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
After reading OVFL = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVFL
1
[Setting conditions]
Set when the value of TCG overflows from H'FF to H'00
(initial value)
Bit 5—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): Bit 5 enables or disables TCG overflow
interrupts.
Bit 5: OVIE
Description
0
TCG overflow interrupt disabled
1
TCG overflow interrupt enabled
(initial value)
177
Bit 4—Input Capture Interrupt Edge Select (IIEGS): Bit 4 selects the input signal edge at
which input capture interrupts are requested.
Bit 4: IIEGS
Description
0
Interrupts are requested at the rising edge of the input capture signal
(initial value)
1
Interrupts are requested at the falling edge of the input capture signal
Bits 3, 2—Counter Clear 1, 0 (CCLR1, CCLR0): Bits 3 and 2 designate whether TCG is
cleared at the rising, falling, or both edges of the input capture signal, or is not cleared.
Bit 3: CCLR1
Bit 2: CCLR0
Description
0
0
TCG is not cleared
1
TCG is cleared at the falling edge of the input capture
signal
0
TCG is cleared at the rising edge of the input capture
signal
1
TCG is cleared at both edges of the input capture signal
1
(initial value)
Bits 1, 0—Clock Select (CKS1, CKS0): Bits 1 and 0 select the clock input to TCG from four
internal clock signals.
Bit 1: CKS1
Bit 0: CKS0
Description
0
0
Internal clock: ø/64
1
Internal clock: ø/32
0
Internal clock: ø/2
1
Internal clock: ø W /2
1
178
(initial value)
9.4.3
Noise Canceller Circuit
The noise canceller circuit built into the H8/3637 Series is a digital low-pass filter that rejects
high-frequency pulse noise in the input at the input capture pin. The noise canceller circuit is
enabled by the noise canceller select (NCS)* bit in port mode register 2 (PMR2).
Figure 9.7 shows a block diagram of the noise canceller circuit.
Sampling clock
Input capture
signal
C
D Q
latch
C
D Q
latch
C
D Q
latch
C
D Q
latch
C
D Q
latch
Match
detection
circuit
Noise
canceller
output
∆t
Sampling clock
∆ t: Selected by bits CKS1, CKS0.
Figure 9.7 Block Diagram of Noise Canceller Circuit
The noise canceller consists of five latch circuits connected in series, and a match detection
circuit. When the noise canceller function is disabled (NCS = 0), the system clock is selected as
the sampling clock. When the noise canceller is enabled (NCS = 1), the internal clock selected by
bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TMG becomes the sampling clock. The input signal is sampled at the
rising edge of this clock pulse. Data is considered correct when the outputs of all five latch circuits
match. If they do not match, the previous value is retained. Upon reset, the noise canceller output
is initialized after the falling edge of the input capture signal has been sampled five times.
Accordingly, after the noise canceller function is enabled, pulses that have a pulse width five times
greater than the sampling clock will be recognized as input capture signals.
If the noise canceller circuit is not used, the input capture signal pulse width must be at least 2ø or
2øSUB in order to ensure proper input capture operation.
Note: Rewriting the NCS bit may cause an internal input capture signal to be generated.
179
Figure 9.8 shows a typical timing diagram for the noise canceller circuit. In this example, a highlevel input at the input capture pin is rejected as noise because its pulse width is less than five
sampling clock ø cycles.
Input capture
input signal
Sampling
clock
Noise canceller
output
Rejected as noise
Figure 9.8 Noise Canceller Circuit Timing (Example)
9.4.4
Timer Operation
Timer G Functions: Timer G is an 8-bit up-counter that functions as an input capture timer or an
interval timer. These two functions are described below.
• Input capture timer operation
Timer G functions as an input capture timer when bit TMIG of port mode register 1 (PMR1) is
set to 1.*
At reset, timer mode register G (TMG), timer counter G (TCG), input capture register GF
(ICRGF), and input capture register GR (ICRGR) are all initialized to H'00.
Immediately after reset, TCG begins counting an internal clock with a frequency of ø divided
by 64 (ø/64). The clock to be input can be selected by using bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TMG
from four internal clock sources.
At the rising edge/falling edge of the input capture signal input to pin TMIG, the value of TCG
is copied into ICRGR/ICRGF. If the input edge is the same as the edge selected by the IIEGS
bit of TMG, then bit IRRTG is set to 1 in IRR2. If bit IENTG is also set to 1 in IENR2, a CPU
interrupt is requested. For details on interrupts, see 3.3, Interrupts.
TCG can be cleared to 0 at the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture
signal as determined with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 of TMG. If TCG overflows while the input
capture signal is high, bit OVFH of TMG is set. If TCG overflows while the input capture
signal is low, bit OVFL of TMG is set. When either of these bits is set, if bit OVIE of TMG is
currently set to 1, then bit IRRTG is set to 1 in IRR2. If bit IENTG is also set to 1 in IENR2,
then timer G requests a CPU interrupt. For further details see 3.3, Interrupts.
180
Timer G has a noise canceller circuit that rejects high-frequency pulse noise in the input to pin
TMIG. See 9.4.3, Noise Canceller Circuit, for details.
Note: * Rewriting the TMIG bit may cause an internal input capture signal to be generated.
• Interval timer operation
Timer G functions as an interval timer when bit TMIG is cleared to 0 in PMR1. Following a
reset, TCG starts counting cycles of the ø/64 internal clock. This is one of four internal clock
sources that can be selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 of TMG. TCG counts up according to the
selected clock source. When it overflows from H'FF to H'00, bit OVFL of TMG is set to 1. If
bit OVIE of TMG is currently set to 1, then bit IRRTG is set to 1 in IRR2. If bit IENTG is also
set to 1 in IENR2, then timer G requests a CPU interrupt. For further details see 3.3, Interrupts.
Count Timing: TCG is incremented by input pulses from an internal clock. TMG bits CKS1 and
CKS0 select one of four internal clocks (ø/64, ø/32, ø/2, øW /2) derived by dividing the system
clock (ø) and the watch clock (øW ).
Timing of Internal Input Capture Signals:
• Timing with noise canceller function disabled
Separate internal input capture signals are generated from the rising and falling edges of the
external input signal.
Figure 9.9 shows the timing of these signals.
External input
capture signal
Internal input
capture signal F
Internal input
capture signal R
Figure 9.9 Input Capture Signal Timing (Noise Canceller Function Disabled)
181
• Timing with noise canceller function enabled
When input capture noise cancelling is enabled, the external input capture signal is routed via
the noise canceller circuit, so the internal signals are delayed from the input edge by five
sampling clock cycles. Figure 9.10 shows the timing.
External input
capture signal
Sampling clock
Noise canceller
circuit output
Internal input
capture signal R
Figure 9.10 Input Capture Signal Timing (Noise Canceller Function Enabled)
Timing of Input Capture: Figure 9.11 shows the input capture timing in relation to the internal
input capture signal.
Internal input
capture signal
TCG
Input capture
register
N –1
N
H'XX
Figure 9.11 Input Capture Timing
182
N +1
N
TCG Clear Timing: TCG can be cleared at the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the
external input capture signal. Figure 9.12 shows the timing for clearing at both edges.
External input
capture signal
Internal input
capture signal F
Internal input
capture signal R
TCG
N
H'00
N
H'00
Figure 9.12 TCG Clear Timing
Timer G Operation States: Table 9.10 summarizes the timer G operation states.
Table 9.10 Timer G Operation States
Sleep
Subsleep
Reset
Active
TCG
Input
capture
Reset
Functions* Functions* Halted
Functions/ Functions/ Halted
Halted*
Halted*
Interval
Reset
Functions* Functions* Retained
Functions/ Functions/ Halted
Halted*
Halted*
ICRGF
Reset
Functions* Functions* Retained
Functions/ Functions/ Retained
Halted*
Halted*
ICRGR
Reset
Functions* Functions* Retained
Functions/ Functions/ Retained
Halted*
Halted*
TMG
Reset
Functions
Functions Retained Retained
Retained
Watch
Subactive
Operation Mode
Retained
Standby
Note: * In active mode and sleep mode, if ø W /2 is selected as the TCG internal clock, since the
system clock and internal clock are not synchronized with each other, a synchronization
circuit is used. This may result in a count cycle error of up to 1/ø (s). In subactive mode and
subsleep mode, if ø W /2 is selected as the TCG internal clock, regardless of the subclock
ø/SUB (øW/2, øW /4, øW /8) TCG and the noise canceller circuit run on an internal clock of
øW/2. If any other internal clock is chosen, TCG and the noise canceller circuit will not run,
and the input capture function will not operate.
183
9.4.5
Application Notes
Input Clock Switching and TCG Operation: Depending on when the input clock is switched,
there will be cases in which TCG is incremented in the process. Table 9.11 shows the relation
between internal clock switchover timing (selected in bits CKS1 and CKS0) and TCG operation.
If an internal clock (derived from the system clock ø or subclock ø SUB ) is used, an increment pulse
is generated when a falling edge of the internal clock is detected. For this reason, in a case like No.
3 in table 9.11, where the clock is switched at a time such that the clock signal goes from high
level before switching to low level after switching, the switchover is seen as a falling edge to
generate the count clock, causing TCG to be incremented.
Table 9.11 Internal Clock Switching and TCG Operation
No.
1
Clock Levels Before
and After Modifying
Bits CKS1 and CKS0
TCG Operation
Goes from low level
to low level
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
Count clock
TCG
N +1
N
CKS bits modified
2
Goes from low level
to high level
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
Count clock
TCG
N
N +1
N +2
CKS bits modified
184
Table 9.11 Internal Clock Switching and TCG Operation (cont)
No.
3
Clock Levels Before
and After Modifying
Bits CKS1 and CKS0
TCG Operation
Goes from high level
to low level
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
*
Count clock
TCG
N
N +1
N +2
CKS bits modified
4
Goes from high level
to high level
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
Count clock
TCG
N
N +1
N +2
CKS bits modified
Note: * The switchover is seen as a falling edge of the clock pulse, and TCG is incremented.
185
Note on Rewriting Port Mode Registers: When a port mode register setting is modified to
enable or disable the input capture function or input capture noise canceling function, note the
following points.
• Switching the function of the input capture pin
When the function of the input capture pin is switched by modifying port mode register 1
(PMR1) bit 3 (the TMIG bit), an input capture edge may be recognized even though no valid
signal edge has been input. This occurs under the conditions listed in table 9.12.
Table 9.12 False Input Capture Edges Generating by Switching of Input Capture Pin
Function
Input Capture Edge
Conditions
Rising edge recognized
TMIG pin level is high, and TMIG bit is changed from 0 to 1
TMIG pin level is high and NCS bit is changed from 0 to 1, then TMIG
bit is changed from 0 to 1 before noise canceller circuit completes five
samples
Falling edge recognized
TMIG pin level is high, and TMIG bit is changed from 1 to 0
TMIG pin level is low and NCS bit is changed from 0 to 1, then TMIG
bit is changed from 0 to 1 before noise canceller circuit completes five
samples
TMIG pin level is high and NCS bit is changed from 0 to 1, then TMIG
bit is changed from 1 to 0 before noise canceller circuit completes five
samples
Note: When pin P1 3 is not used for input capture, the input capture signal input to timer G is low.
• Switching the input capture noise canceling function
When modifying port mode register 2 (PMR2) bit 4 (the NCS bit) to enable or disable the input
capture noise canceling function, first clear the TMIG bit to 0. Otherwise an input capture edge
may be recognized even though no valid signal edge has been input. This occurs under the
conditions listed in table 9.13.
Table 9.13 False Input Capture Edges Generating by Switching of Noise Canceling
Function
Input Capture Edge
Conditions
Rising edge recognized
TMIG bit is set to 1 and TMIG pin level changes from low to high, then
NCS bit is changed from 1 to 0 before noise canceller circuit completes
five samples
Falling edge recognized
TMIG bit is set to 1 and TMIG pin level changes from high to low, then
NCS bit is changed from 1 to 0 before noise canceller circuit completes
five samples
186
If switching of the pin function generates a false input capture edge matching the edge selected by
the input capture interrupt edge select bit (IIEGS), the interrupt request flag will be set to 1,
making it necessary to clear this flag to 0 before using the interrupt function. Figure 9.13 shows
the procedure for modifying port mode register settings and clearing the interrupt request flag. The
first step is to mask interrupts before modifying the port mode register. After modifying the port
mode register setting, wait long enough for an input capture edge to be recognized (at least two
system clocks when noise canceling is disabled; at least five sampling clocks when noise
canceling is enabled), then clear the interrupt request flag to 0 (assuming it has been set to 1). An
alternative procedure is to avoid having the interrupt request flag set when the pin function is
switched, either by controlling the level of the input capture pin so that it does not satisfy the
conditions in tables 9.12 and 9.13, or by setting the IIEGS bit of TMG to select the edge opposite
to the falsely generated edge.
Set I bit to 1 in CCR
Modify port mode register
Wait for TMIG to be recognized
Disable interrupts (or disable by clearing interrupt
enable bit in interrupt enable register 2)
Modify port mode register setting, wait for input
capture edge to be recognized (at least two
system clocks when noise canceling is disabled;
at least five sampling clocks when noise canceling
is enabled), then clear interrupt request flag to 0
Clear interrupt request flag to 0
Clear I bit to 0 in CCR
Enable interrupts
Figure 9.13 Procedure for Modifying Port Mode Register and Clearing Interrupt
Request Flag
187
9.4.6
Sample Timer G Application
The absolute values of the high and low widths of the input capture signal can be measured by
using timer G. The CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits of TMG should be set to 1. Figure 9.14 shows an
example of this operation.
Input capture
signal
H'FF
Input capture
register GF
Input capture
register GR
H'00
TCG
Counter cleared
Figure 9.14 Sample Timer G Application
188
Section 10 Serial Communication Interface
10.1
Overview
The H8/3627 Series is provided with a two-channel serial communication interface (SCI), SCI1
and SCI3. Table 10.1 summarizes the functions and features of the two SCI channels.
Table 10.1 Serial Communication Interface Functions
Channel
Functions
Features
SCI1
Synchronous serial transfer
• Choice of 8 internal clocks (ø/1024 to ø/2)
or external clock
• Open drain output possible
• Interrupt requested at completion of
transfer
• Choice of 8-bit or 16-bit data length
• Continuous clock output
SCI3
Synchronous serial transfer
• 8-bit data transfer
• Send, receive, or simultaneous
send/receive
Asynchronous serial transfer
•
•
•
•
Built-in baud rate generator
Receive error detection
Break detection
Interrupt requested at completion of
transfer or error
• Multiprocessor communication
function
• Choice of 7-bit or 8-bit data length
• Choice of 1-bit or 2-bit stop bit
length
• Odd or even parity
10.2
SCI1
10.2.1
Overview
Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1) performs synchronous serial transfer of 8-bit or 16-bit
data.
Features: Features of SCI1 are given below.
• Choice of 8-bit or 16-bit data length
• Choice of eight internal clock sources (ø/1024, ø/256, ø/64, ø/32, ø/16, ø/8, ø/4, ø/2) or an
external clock
• Interrupt requested at completion of transfer
189
Block Diagram: Figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of SCI1.
PSS
SCR1
SCK1
Transmit/receive
control circuit
SCSR1
Internal data bus
ø
Transfer bit counter
SDRU
SI1
SDRL
SO1
IRRS1
Legend:
SCR1:
SCSR1:
SDRU:
SDRL:
IRRS1:
PSS:
Serial control register 1
Serial control/status register 1
Serial data register U
Serial data register L
SCI1 interrupt request flag
Prescaler S
Figure 10.1 SCI1 Block Diagram
Pin Configuration: Table 10.2 shows the SCI1 pin configuration.
Table 10.2 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
SCI1 clock pin
SCK 1
I/O
SCI1 clock input or output
SCI1 data input pin
SI 1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
SCI1 data output pin
SO1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
190
Register Configuration: Table 10.3 shows the SCI1 register configuration.
Table 10.3 SCI1 Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Serial control register 1
SCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FFA0
Serial control status register 1
SCSR1
R/W
H'9C
H'FFA1
Serial data register U
SDRU
R/W
Undefined
H'FFA2
Serial data register L
SDRL
R/W
Undefined
H'FFA3
10.2.2
Register Descriptions
Serial Control Register 1 (SCR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SNC1
SNC0
—
—
CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCR1 is an 8-bit read/write register for selecting the operation mode, the transfer clock source,
and the prescaler division ratio.
Upon reset, SCR1 is initialized to H'00. Writing to this register stops a transfer in progress.
Bits 7 and 6—Operation Mode Select 1, 0 (SNC1, SNC0): Bits 7 and 6 select the operation
mode.
Bit 7: SNC1
Bit 6: SNC0
Description
0
0
8-bit synchronous transfer mode
1
16-bit synchronous transfer mode
0
Continuous clock output mode* 1
1
Reserved * 2
1
(initial value)
Notes: 1. Pins SI 1 and SO1 should be used as general input or output ports.
2. Don’t set bits SNC1 and SNC0 to 11.
Bits 5 and 4—Reserved Bits: Bits 5 and 4 are reserved: they should always be cleared to 0.
191
Bit 3—Clock Source Select 3 (CKS3): Bit 3 selects the clock source and sets pin SCK1 as an
input or output pin.
Bit 3: CKS3
Description
0
Clock source is prescaler S, and pin SCK 1 is output pin
1
Clock source is external clock, and pin SCK1 is input pin
(initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS 0): When CKS3 = 0, bits 2 to 0 select the
prescaler division ratio and the serial clock cycle.
Serial Clock Cycle
Bit 2: CKS2
Bit 1: CKS1
Bit 0: CKS0
Prescaler Division
ø = 5 MHz
ø = 2.5 MHz
0
0
0
ø/1024 (initial value)
204.8 µs
409.6 µs
1
ø/256
51.2 µs
102.4 µs
0
ø/64
12.8 µs
25.6 µs
1
ø/32
6.4 µs
12.8 µs
0
ø/16
3.2 µs
6.4 µs
1
ø/8
1.6 µs
3.2 µs
0
ø/4
0.8 µs
1.6 µs
1
ø/2
—
0.8 µs
1
1
0
1
Serial Control/Status Register 1 (SCSR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
SOL
ORER
—
—
—
—
STF
Initial value
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
Read/Write
—
R/W
R/(W)*
—
—
—
R
R/W
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
SCSR1 is an 8-bit read/write register indicating operation status and error status.
Upon reset, SCSR1 is initialized to H'9C.
Bit 7—Reserved Bit: Bit 7 is reserved; it is always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
192
Bit 6—Extended Data Bit (SOL): Bit 6 sets the SO1 output level. When read, SOL returns the
output level at the SO1 pin. After completion of a transmission, SO1 continues to output the value
of the last bit of transmitted data. The SO1 output can be changed by writing to SOL before or
after a transmission. The SOL bit setting remains valid only until the start of the next transmission.
To control the level of the SO1 pin after transmission ends, it is necessary to write to the SOL bit at
the end of each transmission. Do not write to this register while transmission is in progress,
because that may cause a malfunction.
Bit 6: SOL
Description
0
Read
SO1 pin output level is low
Write
SO1 pin output level changes to low
Read
SO1 pin output level is high
Write
SO1 pin output level changes to high
1
(initial value)
Bit 5—Overrun Error Flag (ORER): When an external clock is used, bit 5 indicates the
occurrence of an overrun error. If a clock pulse is input after transfer completion, this bit is set to 1
indicating an overrun. If noise occurs during a transfer, causing an extraneous pulse to be
superimposed on the normal serial clock, incorrect data may be transferred.
Bit 5: ORER
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
After reading ORER = 1, cleared by writing 0 to ORER
1
[Setting conditions]
Set if a clock pulse is input after transfer is complete, when an external clock
is used
(initial value)
Bits 4 to 2—Reserved Bits: Bits 4 to 2 are reserved; they are always read as 1, and cannot be
modified.
Bit 1—Reserved Bit: Bit 1 is reserved; and cannot be modified. This bit will be read as 0 after a
reset, but its value is undefined at other times.
Bit 0—Start Flag (STF): Bit 0 controls the start of a transfer. Setting this bit to 1 causes SCI1 to
start transferring data.
During the transfer or while waiting for start bit, this bit remains set to 1. It is cleared to 0 upon
completion of the transfer. It can therefore be used as a busy flag.
193
Bit 0: STF
Description
0
Read
Indicates that transfer is stopped
Write
Invalid
Read
Indicates transfer in progress
Write
Starts a transfer operation
1
(initial value)
Serial Data Register U (SDRU)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SDRU7
SDRU6
SDRU5
SDRU4
SDRU3
SDRU2
SDRU1
SDRU0
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SDRU is an 8-bit read/write register. It is used as the data register for the upper 8 bits in 16-bit
transfer (SDRL is used for the lower 8 bits).
Data written to SDRU is output to SDRL starting from the least significant bit (LSB). This data is
then replaced by LSB-first data input at pin SI1, which is shifted in the direction from the most
significant bit (MSB) toward the LSB.
SDRU must be written or read only after data transmission or reception is complete. If this register
is written or read while a data transfer is in progress, the data contents are not guaranteed.
The SDRU value upon reset is not fixed.
Serial Data Register L (SDRL)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SDRL7
SDRL6
SDRL5
SDRL4
SDRL3
SDRL2
SDRL1
SDRL0
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SDRL is an 8-bit read/write register. It is used as the data register in 8-bit transfer, and as the data
register for the lower 8 bits in 16-bit transfer (SDRU is used for the upper 8 bits).
In 8-bit transfer, data written to SDRL is output from pin SO1 starting from the least significant bit
(LSB). This data is than replaced by LSB-first data input at pin SI1, which is shifted in the
direction from the most significant bit (MSB) toward the LSB.
In 16-bit transfer, operation is the same as for 8-bit transfer, except that input data is fed in via
SDRU.
194
SDRL must be written or read only after data transmission or reception is complete. If this register
is read or written while a data transfer is in progress, the data contents are not guaranteed.
The SDRL value upon reset is not fixed.
10.2.3
Operation
Data can be sent and received in an 8-bit or 16-bit format, synchronized to an internal or external
clock. Overrun errors can be detected when an external clock is used.
(1) Clock
The serial clock can be selected from a choice of eight internal clocks and an external clock. When
an internal clock source is selected, pin SCK1 becomes the clock output pin. When continuous
clock output mode is selected (SCR1 bits SNC1 and SNC0 are set to 10), the clock signal (ø/1024
to ø/2) selected in bits CKS2 to CKS0 is output continuously from pin SCK1. When an external
clock is used, pin SCK1 is the clock input pin.
(2) Data transfer format
Figure 10.2 shows the data transfer format. Data is sent and received starting from the least
significant bit, in LSB-first format. Transmit data is output from one falling edge of the serial
clock until the next falling edge. Receive data is latched at the rising edge of the serial clock.
SCK 1
SO1 /SI 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Figure 10.2 Transfer Format
(3) Data transfer Operations
Transmitting: A transmit operation is carried out as follows.
1. Set bits SO1 and SCK1 in PMR2 to 1, selecting the SO1 and SCK1 pin functions. If necessary,
set bit POF1 in PMR2 for NMOS open drain output at pin SO1.
2. Clear bit SNC1 in SCR1 to 0, and set bit SNC0 to 1 or 0, designating 8- or 16-bit synchronous
transfer mode. Select the serial clock in bits CKS3 to CKS0. Writing data to SCR1 initializes
the internal state of SCI1.
3. Write transmit data in SDRL and SDRU, as follows.
8-bit transfer mode: SDRL
16-bit transfer mode: Upper byte in SDRU, lower byte in SDRL
4. Set the SCSR1 start flag (STF) to 1. SCI1 starts operating and outputs transmit data at pin SO1.
195
5. After data transmission is complete, bit IRRS1 in interrupt request register 1 (IRR1) is
set to 1.
When an internal clock is used, a serial clock is output from pin SCK1 in synchronization with the
transmit data. After data transmission is complete, the serial clock is not output until the next time
the start flag is set to 1. During this time, pin SO1 continues to output the value of the last bit
transmitted.
When an external clock is used, data is transmitted in synchronization with the serial clock input at
pin SCK1. After data transmission is complete, an overrun occurs if the serial clock continues to be
input; no data is transmitted and the SCSR1 overrun error flag (bit ORER) is set to 1.
While transmission is stopped, the output value of pin SO1 can be changed by rewriting bit SOL in
SCSR1.
Receiving: A receive operation is carried out as follows.
1. Set bits SI1 and SCK1 in PMR2 to 1, selecting the SI1 and SCK1 pin functions.
2. Clear bit SNC1 in SCR1 to 0, and set bit SNC0 to 1 or 0, designating 8- or 16-bit synchronous
transfer mode. Select the serial clock in bits CKS3 to CKS0. Writing data to SCR1 initializes
the internal state of SCI1.
3. Set the SCSR1 start flag (STF) to 1. SCI1 starts operating and receives data at pin SI 1.
4. After data reception is complete, bit IRRS1 in interrupt request register 1 (IRR1) is set to 1.
5. Read the received data from SDRL and SDRU, as follows.
8-bit transfer mode: SDRL
16-bit transfer mode: Upper byte in SDRU, lower byte in SDRL
6. After data reception is complete, an overrun occurs if the serial clock continues to be input; no
data is received and the SCSR1 overrun error flag (bit ORER) is set to 1.
Simultaneous Transmit/Receive: A simultaneous transmit/receive operation is carried out as
follows.
1. Set bits SO1, SI1, and SCK1 in PMR2 to 1, selecting the SO1, SI1, and SCK1 pin functions. If
necessary, set bit POF1 in PMR2 for NMOS open drain output at pin SO 1.
2. Clear bit SNC1 in SCR1 to 0, and set bit SNC0 to 1 or 0, designating 8- or 16-bit synchronous
transfer mode. Select the serial clock in bits CKS3 to CKS0. Writing data to SCR1 initializes
the internal state of SCI1.
3. Write transmit data in SDRL and SDRU, as follows.
8-bit transfer mode: SDRL
16-bit transfer mode: Upper byte in SDRU, lower byte in SDRL
4. Set the SCSR1 start flag (STF) to 1. SCI1 starts operating. Transmit data is output at pin SO 1.
Receive data is input at pin SI1.
5. After data transmission and reception are complete, bit IRRS1 in IRR1 is set to 1.
196
6. Read the received data from SDRL and SDRU, as follows.
8-bit transfer mode: SDRL
16-bit transfer mode: Upper byte in SDRU, lower byte in SDRL
When an internal clock is used, a serial clock is output from pin SCK1 in synchronization with the
transmit data. After data transmission is complete, the serial clock is not output until the next time
the start flag is set to 1. During this time, pin SO1 continues to output the value of the last bit
transmitted.
When an external clock is used, data is transmitted and received in synchronization with the serial
clock input at pin SCK 1. After data transmission and reception are complete, an overrun occurs if
the serial clock continues to be input; no data is transmitted or received and the SCSR1 overrun
error flag (bit ORER) is set to 1.
While transmission is stopped, the output value of pin SO1 can be changed by rewriting bit SOL in
SCSR1.
10.2.4
Interrupt Sources
SCI1 can generate an interrupt at the end of a data transfer.
When an SCI1 transfer is complete, bit IRRS1 in interrupt request register 1 (IRR1) is set to 1.
SCI1 interrupt requests can be enabled or disabled by bit IENS1 of interrupt enable register 1
(IENR1).
For further details, see 3.3, Interrupts.
197
10.3
SCI3
10.3.1
Overview
Serial communication interface 3 (SCI3) has both synchronous and asynchronous serial data
communication capabilities. It also has a multiprocessor communication function for serial data
communication among two or more processors.
Features: SCI3 features are listed below.
• Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode
 Asynchronous mode
Serial data communication is performed using the asynchronous method, in which
synchronization is achieved character by character.
SCI3 can communicate with a UART (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter), ACIA
(asynchronous communication interface adapter), or other chip that employs standard
asynchronous serial communication. It can also communicate with two or more other
processors using the multiprocessor communication function. There are twelve selectable
serial data communication formats.
• Data length: seven or eight bits
• Stop bit length: one or two bits
• Parity: even, odd, or none
• Multiprocessor bit: one or none
• Receive error detection: parity, overrun, and framing errors
• Break detection: by reading the RXD level directly when a framing error occurs
 Synchronous mode
Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock signal. SCI3 can communicate
with other chips having a clocked synchronous communication function.
• Data length: eight bits
• Receive error detection: overrun errors
• Full duplex communication
The transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so SCI3 can transmit and receive
simultaneously. Both sections use double buffering, so continuous data transfer is possible in
both the transmit and receive directions.
• Built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates.
• Internal or external clock may be selected as the transfer clock source.
• There are six interrupt sources: transmit end, transmit data register empty, receive data register
full, overrun error, framing error, and parity error.
198
Block Diagram: Figure 10.3 shows a block diagram of SCI3.
SCK 3
External
clock
Baud rate
generator
BRC
Internal clock
(ø/64, ø/16, ø/4, ø)
BRR
Clock
Transmit/receive
control
SCR3
SSR
TXD
TSR
TDR
RXD
RSR
RDR
Legend:
RSR: Receive shift register
RDR: Receive data register
TSR: Transmit shift register
TDR: Transmit data register
SMR: Serial mode register
SCR3: Serial control register 3
SSR: Serial status register
BRR: Bit rate register
BRC: Bit rate counter
Internal data bus
SMR
Interrupt
requests
(TEI, TXI,
RXI, ERI)
Figure 10.3 SCI3 Block Diagram
199
Pin Configuration: Table 10.4 shows the SCI3 pin configuration.
Table 10.4 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
SCI3 clock
SCK 3
I/O
SCI3 clock input/output
SCI3 receive data input
RXD
Input
SCI3 receive data input
SCI3 transmit data output
TXD
Output
SCI3 transmit data output
Register Configuration: Table 10.5 shows the SCI3 internal register configuration.
Table 10.5 SCI3 Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Serial mode register
SMR
R/W
H'00
H'FFA8
Bit rate register
BRR
R/W
H'FF
H'FFA9
Serial control register 3
SCR3
R/W
H'00
H'FFAA
Transmit data register
TDR
R/W
H'FF
H'FFAB
Serial status register
SSR
R/W
H'84
H'FFAC
Receive data register
RDR
R
H'00
H'FFAD
Transmit shift register
TSR
Not possible
—
—
Receive shift register
RSR
Not possible
—
—
Bit rate counter
BRC
Not possible
—
—
10.3.2
Register Descriptions
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The receive shift register (RSR) is for receiving serial data.
Serial data is input in LSB-first order into RSR from pin RXD, converting it to parallel data. After
each byte of data has been received, the byte is automatically transferred to the receive data
register (RDR).
RSR cannot be read or written directly by the CPU.
200
Receive Data Register (RDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RDR7
RDR6
RDR5
RDR4
RDR3
RDR2
RDR1
RDR0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
The receive data register (RDR) is an 8-bit register for storing received serial data.
Each time a byte of data is received, the received data is transferred from the receive shift register
(RSR) to RDR, completing a receive operation. Thereafter RSR again becomes ready to receive
new data. RSR and RDR form a double buffer mechanism that allows data to be received
continuously.
RDR is exclusively for receiving data and cannot be written by the CPU.
RDR is initialized to H'00 upon reset or in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or
subsleep mode.
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The transmit shift register (TSR) is for transmitting serial data.
Transmit data is first transferred from the transmit data register (TDR) to TSR, then is transmitted
from pin TXD, starting from the LSB (bit 0).
After one byte of data has been sent, the next byte is automatically transferred from TDR to TSR,
and the next transmission begins. If no data has been written to TDR (1 is set in TDRE), there is
no data transfer from TDR to TSR.
TSR cannot be read or written directly by the CPU.
201
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDR7
TDR6
TDR5
TDR4
TDR3
TDR2
TDR1
TDR0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The transmit data register (TDR) is an 8-bit register for holding transmit data.
When SCI3 detects that the transmit shift register (TSR) is empty, it shifts transmit data written in
TDR to TSR and starts serial data transmission. While TSR is transmitting serial data, the next
byte to be transmitted can be written to TDR, realizing continuous transmission.
TDR can be read or written by the CPU at all times.
TDR is initialized to H'FF upon reset or in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or
subsleep mode.
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
COM
CHR
PE
PM
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The serial mode register (SMR) is an 8-bit register for setting the serial data communication
format and for selecting the clock source of the baud rate generator. SMR can be read and written
by the CPU at any time.
SMR is initialized to H'00 upon reset or in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or
subsleep mode.
Bit 7—Communication Mode (COM): Bit 7 selects asynchronous mode or synchronous mode as
the serial data communication mode.
Bit 7: COM
Description
0
Asynchronous mode
1
Synchronous mode
202
(initial value)
Bit 6—Character Length (CHR): Bit 6 selects either 7 bits or 8 bits as the data length in
asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode the data length is always 8 bits regardless of the setting
here.
Bit 6: CHR
Description
0
8-bit data
1
7-bit data*
(initial value)
Note: * When 7-bit data is selected as the character length in asynchronous mode, the MSB (bit 7)
in the transmit data register is not transmitted.
Bit 5—Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, bit 5 selects whether or not a parity bit is to
be added to transmitted data and checked in received data. In synchronous mode there is no adding
or checking of parity regardless of the setting here.
Bit 5: PE
Description
0
Parity bit adding and checking disabled
1
Parity bit adding and checking enabled*
(initial value)
Note: * When PE is set to 1, then either odd or even parity is added to transmit data, depending on
the setting of the parity mode bit (PM). When data is received, it is checked for odd or even
parity as designated in bit PM.
Bit 4—Parity Mode (PM): In asynchronous mode, bit 4 selects whether odd or even parity is to
be added to transmitted data and checked in received data. The setting here is valid only if parity
adding/checking is enabled in bit PE. In synchronous mode, or if parity adding/checking is
disabled in asynchronous mode, bit PM is ignored.
Bit 4: PM
Description
0
Even parity* 1
1
Odd parity *
(initial value)
2
Notes: 1. When even parity is designated, a parity bit is added to the transmitted data so that the
sum of 1s in the resulting data is an even number. When data is received, the sum of 1s
in the data plus parity bit is checked to see if the result is an even number.
2. When odd parity is designated, a parity bit is added to the transmitted data so that the
sum of 1s in the resulting data is an odd number. When data is received, the sum of 1s
in the data plus parity bit is checked to see if the result is an odd number.
203
Bit 3—Stop Bit Length (STOP): Bit 3 selects 1 bit or 2 bits as the stop bit length in
asynchronous mode. This setting is valid only in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode a stop
bit is not added, so this bit is ignored.
Bit 3: STOP
Description
0
1 stop bit * 1
2 stop bits*
1
(initial value)
2
Notes: 1. When data is transmitted, one “1” bit is added at the end of each transmitted character
as the stop bit.
2. When data is transmitted, two “1” bits are added at the end of each transmitted
character as the stop bits.
When data is received, only the first stop bit is checked regardless of the stop bit length. If the
second stop bit value is 1 it is treated as a stop bit; if it is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next
character.
Bit 2—Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Bit 2 enables or disables the multiprocessor communication
function. When the multiprocessor communication function is enabled, the parity enable (PE) and
parity mode (PM) settings are ignored. The MP bit is valid only in asynchronous mode; it should
be cleared to 0 in synchronous mode.
See 10.3.6, for details on the multiprocessor communication function.
Bit 2: MP
Description
0
Multiprocessor communication function disabled
1
Multiprocessor communication function enabled
(initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select 1, 0 (CKS1, CKS0): Bits 1 and 0 select the clock source for the builtin baud rate generator. A choice of ø/64, ø/16, ø/4, or ø is made in these bits.
See 8, Bit rate register, below for information on the clock source and bit rate register settings, and
their relation to the baud rate.
Bit 1: CKS1
Bit 0: CKS0
Description
0
0
ø clock
1
ø/4 clock
0
ø/16 clock
1
ø/64 clock
1
204
(initial value)
Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Serial control register 3 (SCR3) is an 8-bit register that controls SCI3 transmit and receive
operations, enables or disables serial clock output in asynchronous mode, enables or disables
interrupts, and selects the serial clock source. SCR3 can be read and written by the CPU at any
time.
SCR3 is initialized to H'00 upon reset or in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or
subsleep mode.
Bit 7—Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Bit 7 enables or disables the transmit data empty
interrupt request (TXI) when data is transferred from TDR to TSR and the transmit data register
empty bit (TDRE) in the serial status register (SSR) is set to 1. The TXI interrupt can be cleared
by clearing bit TDRE to 0, or by clearing bit TIE to 0.
Bit 7: TIE
Description
0
Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) disabled
1
Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) enabled
(initial value)
Bit 6—Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Bit 6 enables or disables the receive error interrupt
request (ERI), and the receive data full interrupt request (RXI) when data is transferred from RSR
to RDR and the receive data register full bit (RDRF) in the serial status register (SSR) is set to 1.
Receive errors include overrun errors, framing errors, and parity errors. RXI and ERI interrupts
can be cleared by clearing SSR flag RDRF, or flags FER, PER, and OER to 0, or by clearing bit
RIE to 0.
Bit 6: RIE
Description
0
Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) and receive error interrupt request
(ERI) disabled
(initial value)
1
Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) and receive error interrupt request
(ERI) enabled
205
Bit 5—Transmit Enable (TE): Bit 5 enables or disables the start of a transmit operation.
Bit 5: TE
Description
0
Transmit operation disabled* 1 (TXD is the transmit data pin)
1
(initial value)
2
Transmit operation enabled * (TXD is the transmit data pin)
Notes: 1. The transmit data register empty bit (TDRE) in the serial status register (SSR) is fixed
at 1. Transmit operations are disabled, but the TXD pin functions as the transmit data
pin. To use the TXD pin as an I/O pin, clear bit TXD in PMR6 to 0.
2. In this state, writing transmit data in TDR clears bit TDRE in SSR to 0 and starts serial
data transmission.
Before setting TE to 1 it is necessary to set the transmit format in SMR.
Bit 4—Receive Enable (RE): Bit 4 enables or disables the start of a receive operation.
Bit 4: RE
Description
0
Receive operation disabled * 1 (RXD is a general I/O port)
1
2
(initial value)
Receive operation enabled* (RXD is the receive data pin)
Notes: 1. When RE is cleared to 0, this has no effect on the SSR flags RDRF, FER, PER, and
OER, which retain their states.
2. Serial data receiving begins when, in this state, a start bit is detected in asynchronous
mode, or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode.
Before setting RE to 1 it is necessary to set the receive format in SMR.
Bit 3—Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Bit 3 enables or disables multiprocessor
interrupt requests. This setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only when the
multiprocessor mode bit (MP) in the serial mode register (SMR) is set to 1. It applies only to data
receiving. This bit is ignored when COM is set to 1 or when bit MP is cleared to 0.
Bit 3: MPIE
Description
0
Multiprocessor interrupt request disabled (ordinary receive operation)
(initial value)
[Clearing condition]
Multiprocessor bit receives a data value of 1
1
Multiprocessor interrupt request enabled*
Note: * SCI3 does not transfer receive data from RSR to RDR, does not detect receive errors, and
does not set status flags RDRF, FER, and OER in SSR. Until a multiprocessor bit value of 1
is received, the receive data full interrupt (RXI) and receive error interrupt (ERI) are
disabled and serial status register (SSR) flags RDRF, FER, and OER are not set. When the
multiprocessor bit receives a 1, the MPBR bit of SSR is set to 1, MPIE is automatically
cleared to 0, RXI and ERI interrupts are enabled (provided bits TIE and RIE in SCR3 are
set to 1), and setting of the RDRF, FER, and OER flags is enabled.
206
Bit 2—Transmit End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Bit 2 enables or disables the transmit end
interrupt (TEI) requested if there is no valid transmit data in TDR when the MSB is transmitted.
Bit 2: TEIE
Description
0
Transmit end interrupt (TEI) disabled
1
Transmit end interrupt (TEI) enabled*
(initial value)
Note: * A TEI interrupt can be cleared by clearing the SSR bit TDRE to 0 and clearing the transmit
end bit (TEND) to 0, or by clearing bit TEIE to 0.
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Enable 1, 0 (CKE1, CKE0): Bits 1 and 0 select the clock source and enable
or disable clock output at pin SCK3. The combination of bits CKE1 and CKE0 determines whether
pin SCK3 is a general I/O port, a clock output pin, or a clock input pin.
Note that the CKE0 setting is valid only when operation is in asynchronous mode using an internal
clock (CKE1 = 0). This bit is invalid in synchronous mode or when using an external clock
(CKE1 = 1). In synchronous mode and in external clock mode, clear CKE0 to 0. After setting bits
CKE1 and CKE0, the operation mode must first be set in the serial mode register (SMR).
See table 10.10 in 10.3.3, Operation, for details on clock source selection.
Description
Bit 1: CKE1
Bit 0: CKE0
Communication Mode
Clock Source
SCK3 Pin Function
0
0
Asynchronous
Internal clock
I/O port* 1
Synchronous
Internal clock
Serial clock output * 1
Asynchronous
Internal clock
Clock output* 2
Synchronous
Reserved
Reserved
Asynchronous
External clock
Clock input * 3
Synchronous
External clock
Serial clock input
Asynchronous
Reserved
Reserved
Synchronous
Reserved
Reserved
1
1
0
1
Notes: 1. Initial value
2. A clock is output with the same frequency as the bit rate.
3. Input a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate.
207
Serial Status Register (SSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
OER
FER
PER
TEND
MPBR
MPBT
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
The serial status register (SSR) is an 8-bit register containing status flags for indicating SCI3
states, and containing the multiprocessor bits.
SSR can be read and written by the CPU at any time, but the CPU cannot write a 1 to the status
flags TDRE, RDRF, OER, PER, and FER. To clear these flags to 0 it is first necessary to read a 1.
Bit 2 (TEND) and bit 1 (MPBR) are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
SSR is initialized to H'84 upon reset or in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or
subsleep mode.
Bit 7—Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Bit 7 is a status flag indicating that data has
been transferred from TDR to TSR.
Bit 7: TDRE
Description
0
Indicates that transmit data written to TDR has not been transferred to TSR
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
After reading TDRE = 1, cleared by writing 0 to TDRE.
•
When data is written to TDR by an instruction.
Indicates that no transmit data has been written to TDR, or the transmit data
written to TDR has been transferred to TSR
(initial value)
[Setting conditions]
208
•
When bit TE in SCR3 is cleared to 0.
•
When data is transferred from TDR to TSR.
Bit 6—Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Bit 6 is a status flag indicating whether there is
receive data in RDR.
Bit 6: RDRF
Description
0
Indicates there is no receive data in RDR
(initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
After reading RDRF = 1, cleared by writing 0 to RDRF.
•
When data is read from RDR by an instruction.
Indicates that there is receive data in RDR
[Setting condition]
When receiving ends normally, with receive data transferred from RSR to
RDR
Note: If a receive error is detected during data receiving, or if bit RE in serial control register 3
(SCR3) is cleared to 0, RDR and RDRF are unaffected and keep their previous states. An
overrun error (OER) occurs if receiving of data is completed while bit RDRF remains set
to 1. If this happens, receive data will be lost.
Bit 5—Overrun Error (OER): Bit 5 is a status flag indicating that an overrun error has occurred
during data receiving.
Bit 5: OER
Description
0
Indicates that data receiving is in progress or has been completed* 1
(initial value)
[Clearing condition]
After reading OER = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OER
1
Indicates that an overrun error occurred in data receiving* 2
[Setting condition]
When data receiving is completed while RDRF is set to 1
Notes: 1. When bit RE in serial control register 3 (SCR3) is cleared to 0, OER is unaffected and
keeps its previous state.
2. RDR keeps the data received prior to the overrun; data received after that is lost. While
OER is set to 1, data receiving cannot be continued. In synchronous mode, data
transmitting cannot be continued either.
209
Bit 4: Framing Error (FER): Bit 4 is a status flag indicating that a framing error has occurred
during asynchronous receiving.
Bit 4: FER
Description
0
Indicates that data receiving is in progress or has been completed* 1
(initial value)
[Clearing condition]
After reading FER = 1, cleared by writing 0 to FER
1
Indicates that a framing error occurred in data receiving
[Setting condition]
The stop bit at the end of receive data is checked and found to be 0 * 2
Notes: 1. When bit RE in serial control register 3 (SCR3) is cleared to 0, FER is unaffected and
keeps its previous state.
2. When two stop bits are used only the first stop bit is checked, not the second. When a
framing error occurs, receive data is transferred to RDR but RDRF is not set. While
FER is set to 1, data receiving cannot be continued. In synchronous mode, data
transmission and reception cannot be performed if FER is set to 1.
Bit 3—Parity Error (PER): Bit 3 is a status flag indicating that a parity error has occurred during
asynchronous receiving.
Bit 3: PER
Description
0
Indicates that data receiving is in progress or has been completed* 1
(initial value)
[Clearing condition]
After reading PER = 1, cleared by writing 0 to PER
1
Indicates that a parity error occurred in data receiving * 2
[Setting condition]
When the sum of 1s in received data plus the parity bit does not match the
parity mode bit (PM) setting in the serial mode register (SMR)
Notes: 1. When bit RE in serial control register 3 (SCR3) is cleared to 0, PER is unaffected and
keeps its previous state.
2. When a parity error occurs, receive data is transferred to RDR but RDRF is not set.
While PER is set to 1, data receiving cannot be continued. While PER is set to 1 in
synchronous mode, data transmission and reception cannot be performed.
210
Bit 2—Transmit End (TEND): Bit 2 is a status flag indicating that TDRE was set to 1 when the
last bit of a transmitted character was sent. TEND is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
Bit 2: TEND
Description
0
Indicates that transmission is in progress
[Clearing conditions]
1
•
After reading TDRE = 1, cleared by writing 0 to TDRE.
•
When data is written to TDR by an instruction.
Indicates that a transmission has ended
(initial value)
[Setting conditions]
•
When bit TE in SCR3 is cleared to 0.
•
If TDRE is set to 1 when the last bit of a transmitted character is sent.
Bit 1—Multiprocessor Bit Receive (MPBR): Bit 1 holds the multiprocessor bit in data received
in asynchronous mode using a multiprocessor format. MPBR is a read-only bit and cannot be
modified.
Bit 1: MPBR
Description
0
Indicates reception of data in which the multiprocessor bit is 0* (initial value)
1
Indicates reception of data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1
Note: * If bit RE in SCR3 is cleared to 0 while a multiprocessor format is in use, MPBR retains its
previous state.
Bit 0—Multiprocessor Bit Transmit (MPBT): Bit 0 holds the multiprocessor bit to be added to
transmitted data when a multiprocessor format is used in asynchronous mode. Bit MPBT is
ignored when synchronous mode is chosen, when the multiprocessor communication function is
disabled, or when data transmission is disabled.
Bit 0: MPBT
Description
0
The multiprocessor bit in transmit data is 0
1
The multiprocessor bit in transmit data is 1
(initial value)
211
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BRR7
BRR6
BRR5
BRR4
BRR3
BRR2
BRR1
BRR0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The bit rate register (BRR) is an 8-bit register which, together with the baud rate generator clock
selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in the serial mode register (SMR), sets the transmit/receive bit
rate.
BRR can be read or written by the CPU at any time.
BRR is initialized to H'FF upon reset or in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or
subsleep mode.
Table 10.6 gives examples of how BRR is set in asynchronous mode. The values in
table 10.6 are for active (high-speed) mode.
212
Table 10.6
BRR Settings and Bit Rates in Asynchronous Mode
OSC (MHz)
2
2.4576
4
4.194304
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
1
70
+0.03
1
86
+0.31
1
141
+0.03
1
148
–0.04
150
0
207
+0.16
0
255
0
1
103
+0.16
1
108
+0.21
300
0
103
+0.16
0
127
0
0
207
+0.16
0
217
+0.21
600
0
51
+0.16
0
63
0
0
103
+0.16
0
108
+0.21
1200
0
25
+0.16
0
31
0
0
51
+0.16
0
54
–0.70
2400
0
12
+0.16
0
15
0
0
25
+0.16
0
26
+1.14
4800
—
—
—
0
7
0
0
12
+0.16
0
13
–2.48
9600
—
—
—
0
3
0
—
—
—
0
6
–2.48
19200
—
—
—
0
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
31250
0
0
0
—
—
—
0
1
0
—
—
—
38400
—
—
—
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
Table 10.6 BRR Settings and Bit Rates in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
OSC (MHz)
4.9152
6
7.3728
8
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
1
174
–0.26
1
212
+0.03
2
64
+0.70
2
70
+0.03
150
1
127
0
1
155
+0.16
1
191
0
1
207
+0.16
300
0
255
0
1
77
+0.16
1
95
0
1
103
+0.16
600
0
127
0
0
155
+0.16
0
191
0
0
207
+0.16
1200
0
63
0
0
77
+0.16
0
95
0
0
103
+0.16
2400
0
31
0
0
38
+0.16
0
47
0
0
51
+0.16
4800
0
15
0
0
19
–2.34
0
23
0
0
25
+0.16
9600
0
7
0
0
9
–2.34
0
11
0
0
12
+0.16
19200
0
3
0
0
4
–2.34
0
5
0
—
—
—
31250
—
—
—
0
2
0
—
—
—
0
3
0
38400
0
1
0
—
—
—
0
2
0
—
—
—
213
Table 10.6 BRR Settings and Bit Rates in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
OSC (MHz)
9.8304
10
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
86
+0.31
2
88
–0.25
150
1
255
0
2
64
+0.16
300
1
127
0
1
129
+0.16
600
0
255
0
1
64
+0.16
1200
0
127
0
0
129
+0.16
2400
0
63
0
0
64
+0.16
4800
0
31
0
0
32
–1.36
9600
0
15
0
0
15
+1.73
19200
0
7
0
0
7
+1.73
31250
0
4
–1.70
0
4
0
38400
0
3
0
0
3
+1.73
Notes: 1. Settings should be made so that error is within 1%.
2. BRR setting values are derived by the following equation.
N=
OSC
× 106 – 1
64 × 22n × B
B:
N:
OSC:
n:
Bit rate (bits/s)
BRR baud rate generator setting (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Value of øOSC (MHz)
Baud rate generator input clock number (n = 0, 1, 2, 3)
The meaning of n is shown in table 10.7.
Table 10.7 Relation between n and Clock
SMR Setting
n
Clock
CKS1
CKS0
0
ø
0
0
1
ø/4
0
1
2
ø16
1
0
3
ø/64
1
1
214
3. The error values in table 10.6 were derived by performing the following calculation and
rounding off to two decimal places.
Error (%) =
B–R
R
× 100
B: Bit rate found from n, N, and OSC
R: Bit rate listed in left column of table 10.6
Table 10.8 shows the maximum bit rate for selected frequencies in asynchronous mode.
Values in table 10.8 are for active (high-speed) mode.
Table 10.8 Maximum Bit Rate at Selected Frequencies (Asynchronous Mode)
Setting
OSC (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s)
n
N
2
31250
0
0
2.4576
38400
0
0
4
62500
0
0
4.194304
65536
0
0
4.9152
76800
0
0
6
93750
0
0
7.3728
115200
0
0
8
125000
0
0
9.8304
153600
0
0
10
156250
0
0
Table 10.9 shows typical BRR settings in synchronous mode. Values in table 10.9 are for active
(high-speed) mode.
215
Table 10.9 Typical BRR Settings and Bit Rates (Synchronous Mode)
OSC (MHz)
2
4
8
10
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
n
N
n
N
n
N
110
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
250
1
249
2
124
2
249
—
—
500
1
124
1
249
2
124
—
—
1K
0
249
1
124
1
249
—
—
2.5K
0
99
0
199
1
99
1
124
5K
0
49
0
99
0
199
0
249
10K
0
24
0
49
0
99
0
124
25K
0
9
0
19
0
39
0
49
50K
0
4
0
9
0
19
0
24
100K
—
—
0
4
0
9
—
—
250K
0
0*
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
0*
0
1
—
—
0
0*
—
—
500K
1M
2.5M
Blank: Cannot be set
—:
Can be set, but error will result
*:
Continuous transmit/receive operation is not possible at this setting
Note: BRR setting values are derived by the following equation.
N=
B:
N:
OSC:
n:
216
OSC
8 × 22n × B
× 106 – 1
Bit rate (bits/s)
BRR baud rate generator setting (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Value of øOSC (MHz)
Baud rate generator input clock number (n = 0, 1, 2, 3)
The meaning of n is shown in table 10.10.
Table 10.10 Relation between n and Clock
SMR Setting
n
Clock
CKS1
CKS0
0
ø
0
0
1
ø/4
0
1
2
ø16
1
0
3
ø/64
1
1
10.3.3
Operation
SCI3 supports serial data communication in both asynchronous mode, where each character
transferred is synchronized separately, and synchronous mode, where transfer is synchronized by
clock pulses.
The choice of asynchronous mode or synchronous mode, and the communication format, is made
in the serial mode register (SMR), as shown in table 10.11. The SCI3 clock source is determined
by bit COM in SMR and bits CKE1 and CKE0 in serial control register 3 (SCR3), as shown in
table 10.12.
Asynchronous Mode:
• Data length: choice of 7 bits or 8 bits
• Choice for the addition of a parity bit, the multiprocessor bit as well as one or two stop bits
(these options determine the transmit/receive format and the character length).
• Framing error (FER), parity error (PER), overrun error (OER), and break signal can be
detected when data is received.
• Clock source: Choice of internal clocks or an external clock
 When an internal clock is selected: Operates on baud rate generator clock. A clock can be
output with the same frequency as the bit rate.
 When an external clock is selected: A clock input with a frequency 16 times the bit rate is
required (internal baud rate generator is not used).
Synchronous Mode:
• Transfer format: 8 bits
• Overrun errors can be detected when data is received.
• Clock source: Choice of internal clocks or an external clock
 When an internal clock is selected: Operates on baud rate generator clock, and outputs a
serial clock.
217
 When an external clock is selected: The internal baud rate generator is not used.
Operation is synchronous with the input clock.
Table 10.11 SMR Settings and SCI3 Communication Format
SMR Setting
Communication Format
Bit 7: Bit 6: Bit 2: Bit 5: Bit 3:
COM CHR MP
PE
STOP Mode
MultiproData Length cessor Bit
Parity Stop Bit
Bit
Length
0
8-bit data
None
0
0
0
0
1
1
Asynchronous
mode
None
2 bits
0
Yes
1
1
0
0
7-bit data
None
1
0
1
1
*
0
Note: * Don’t care
218
*
0
*
1
*
0
*
1
*
*
1 bit
2 bits
Yes
1
0
1 bit
2 bits
1
1
1 bit
1 bit
2 bits
Asynchronous 8-bit data
mode
(multiprocessor
7-bit data
format)
Yes
Synchronous
mode
None
8-bit data
None
1 bit
2 bits
1 bit
2 bits
None
None
Table 10.12 SMR and SCR3 Settings and Clock Source Selection
SMR
SCR3
Bit 7:
COM
Bit 1:
CKE1
Bit 0:
CKE0
0
0
0
1
Transmit/Receive Clock
Mode
Asynchronous
mode
Clock
Source
Pin SCK3 Function
Internal
I/O port (SCK3 pin not used)
Outputs clock with same frequency as
bit rate
1
0
0
0
1
0
Synchronous
mode
0
1
1
Reserved (illegal settings)
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
External
Clock should be input with frequency
16 times the desired bit rate
Internal
Outputs a serial clock
External
Inputs a serial clock
219
Continuous Transmit/Receive Operation Using Interrupts: Continuous transmit and receive
operations are possible with SCI3, using the RXI or TXI interrupts. Table 10.13 explains this use
of these interrupts.
Table 10.13 Transmit/Receive Interrupts
Interrupt
Flag
Interrupt Conditions
Remarks
RXI
RDRF
RIE
When serial data is received normally
and receive data is transferred from
RSR to RDR, RDRF is set to 1. If RIE
is 1 at this time, RXI is enabled and
an interrupt occurs. (See figure 10.4
(a).)
The RXI interrupt handling routine
reads the receive data from RDR
and clears RDRF to 0.
When TSR empty (previous
transmission complete) is detected
and the transmit data set in TDR is
transferred to TSR, TDRE is set to 1.
If TIE is 1 at this time, TXI is enabled
and an interrupt occurs. (See figure
10.4 (b).)
The TXI interrupt handling routine
writes the next transmit data to
TDR and clears TDRE to 0.
When the last bit of the TSR transmit
character has been sent, if TDRE is 1,
then 1 is set in TEND. If TEIE is 1 at
this time, TEI is enabled and an
interrupt occurs. (See figure 10.4 (c).)
TEI indicates that, when the last
bit of the TSR transmit character
was sent, the next transmit data
had not been written to TDR.
TXI
TEI
220
TDRE
TIE
TEND
TEIE
Cont inuous dat a recept ion is
poss ible by performing these
operations before the reception of
the next serial data in RSR is
completed.
Continuous data transmission is
possible by performing these
operations before the
transmission of data transferred
to TSR is completed.
RDR
RDR
RSR ↑ (received and transferred)
RSR (receiving)
RXD
pin
RXD
pin
RDRF ← 1
(RXI requested if RIE = 1)
RDRF = 0
Figure 10.4 (a) RDRF Setting and RXI Interrupt
TDR (next transmit data)
TDR
TSR (transmitting)
TSR ↓ (transmission complete,
next data transferred)
TXD
pin
TXD
pin
TDRE ← 1
(TXI requested if TIE = 1)
TDRE = 0
Figure 10.4 (b) TDRE Setting and TXI Interrupt
TDR
TDR
TSR (transmitting)
TXD
pin
TSR (transmission complete)
TXD
pin
TEND = 0
TEND ← 1
(TEI requested if TEIE = 1)
Figure 10.4 (c) TEND Setting and TEI Interrupt
221
10.3.4
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous communication mode, a start bit indicating the start of communication and a stop
bit indicating the end of communication are added to each character that is sent/received. In this
way synchronization is achieved for each character as a self-contained unit.
SCI3 consists of independent transmit and receive modules, giving it the capability of full duplex
communication. Both the transmit and receive modules have a double-buffer configuration,
allowing data to be read or written during communication operations so that data can be
transmitted and received continuously.
(1) Transmit/Receive Formats: Figure 10.5 shows the general format for asynchronous serial
communication.
The communication line in asynchronous communication mode normally stays at the high level, in
the “mark” state. SCI3 monitors the communication line, and begins serial data communication
when it detects a “space” (low-level signal), which is regarded as a start bit.
One character consists of a start bit (low level), transmit/receive data (in LSB-first order), a parity
bit (high or low level), and finally a stop bit (high level), in this order.
In asynchronous data receiving, synchronization is carried out at the falling edge of the start bit.
SCI3 samples data on the 8th pulse of a clock that has 16 times the frequency of one-bit interval,
so each bit of data is latched at its center.
(LSB)
Serial
data
Start
bit
1 bit
(MSB)
Transmit or receive data
7 or 8 bits
1
Parity
bit
1 bit
or
none
Stop bit
Mark
state
1 or 2
bits
One unit of data (character or frame)
Figure 10.5 Data Format in Asynchronous Serial Communication Mode
222
Table 10.14 shows the 12 formats that can be selected in asynchronous mode. The format is
selected in the serial mode register (SMR).
Table 10.14 Serial Communication Formats in Asynchronous Mode
SMR Settings
Serial Communication Format and Frame Length
CHR
PE
MP
STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0
0
0
0
S
8-bit data
STOP
0
0
0
1
S
8-bit data
STOP STOP
0
1
0
0
S
8-bit data
P
STOP
0
1
0
1
S
8-bit data
P
STOP STOP
1
0
0
0
S
7-bit data
STOP
1
0
0
1
S
7-bit data
STOP STOP
1
1
0
0
S
7-bit data
P
STOP
1
1
0
1
S
7-bit data
P
STOP STOP
0
*
1
0
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP
0
*
1
1
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
1
*
1
0
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP
1
*
1
1
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
Legend:
S:
Start bit
STOP: Stop bit
P:
Parity bit
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Note: * Don’t care
223
(2) Clock: The clock source is determined by bit COM in SMR and bits CKE1 and CKE0 in
serial control register 3 (SCR3). See table 10.12 for the settings. Either an internal clock source
can be used to run the built-in baud rate generator, or an external clock source can be input at pin
SCK3.
When an external clock source is input to pin SCK3, it should have a frequency 16 times the
desired bit rate.
When an internal clock source is used, SCK3 can be used as the clock output pin. The clock output
has the same frequency as the serial bit rate, and is synchronized as in figure 10.6 so that the rising
edge of the clock occurs in the center of each bit of transmit/receive data.
Clock
Serial
data
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
1 character (1 frame)
Figure 10.6 Phase Relation of Output Clock and Communication Data in Asynchronous
Mode (8-Bit Data, Parity Bit Added, and 2 Stop Bits)
(3) Data Transmit/Receive Operations
SCI3 Initialization: Before data is sent or received, bits TE and RE in serial control register 3
(SCR3) must be cleared to 0, after which initialization can be performed using the procedure.
Note: When modifying the operation mode, transfer format or other settings, always be sure to
clear bits TE and RE first. When TE is cleared to 0, bit TDRE will be set to 1. Clearing
RE does not clear the status flags RDRF, PER, FER, or OER, or alter the contents of the
receive data register (RDR).
When an external clock is used in asynchronous mode, do not stop the clock during operation,
including during initialization.
224
Figure 10.7 shows a typical flow chart for SCI3 initialization.
Start
1. Select the clock using serial control
register 3(SCR3). Be sure to set 0 for other
unused bits.
When the clock output is selected in the
asynchronous mode, a clock signal is
output immediately after setting bits CKE1
and CKE0 appropriately.
Clear TE and RE to 0 in SCR3
1
Set bits CKE1 and CKE0
2
Select communication format in SMR
3
Set BRR value
2. Set the transmit/receive format in the serial
mode register (SMR).
3. Write the value corresponding to the desired
bit rate to the bit rate register (BRR). Note that
this setting is not required when using an
external clock.
Wait
Has a 1-bit
interval elapsed?
Yes
4
No
4. Wait for at least a 1-bit interval, then set
bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, and set bit
TE or RE in SCR3 to 1. Setting TE or RE
enables SCI3 to use the TXD or RXD pin.
The initial states in asynchronous mode
are the mark transmit state and the idle
receive state (waiting for a start bit).
Set bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE
in SCR3, and set TE or RE to 1
End
Figure 10.7 Typical Flow Chart when SCI3 Is Initialized
225
Transmitting: Figure 10.8 shows a typical flow chart for data transmission. After SCI3
initialization, follow the procedure below.
Start
1
Read bit TDRE in SSR
TDRE = 1?
No
1. Read the serial status register (SRR),
and after confirming that bit TDRE = 1,
write transmit data in the transmit data
register (TDR). When data is written to
TDR, TDRE is automatically cleared to 0.
Yes
Write transmit data in TDR
2
Continue
data transmission?
No
Yes
2. To continue transmitting data, first read
TDRE to confirm that it is set to 1, indicating
that data writing is enabled, then write the
next data to TDR. When data is written to
TDR, TDRE is automatically cleared to 0.
Read bit TEND in SSR
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
3
Break output?
Yes
No
3. To output a break signal when transmission
ends, first set the port values PCR = 1 and
PDR = 0, then clear bit TE in SCR3 to 0.
Set PDR = 0 and PCR = 1
Clear bit TE in SCR3 to 0
End
Figure 10.8 Typical Data Transmission Flow Chart (Asynchronous Mode)
226
SCI3 operates as follows during data transmission in asynchronous mode.
SCI3 monitors bit TDRE in SSR. When this bit is cleared to 0, SCI3 recognizes that there is data
written in the transmit data register (TDR), which it transfers to the transmit shift register (TSR).
Then TDRE is set to 1 and transmission starts. If bit TIE in SCR3 is set to 1, a TXI interrupt is
requested.
Serial data is transmitted from pin TXD using the communication format outlined in
table 10.14. After that, it checks TDRE at the same timing which it transmits the stop bit.
If TDRE is 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and after the stop bit is sent, transmission of
the next frame starts. If TDRE is 1, the TEND bit in SSR is set to 1, and after the stop bit is sent,
the “mark state” is entered, in which 1 is continuously output. A TEI interrupt is requested in this
state if bit TEIE in SCR3 is set to 1.
Figure 10.9 shows a typical operation in asynchronous transmission mode.
Start
bit
Serial
data
1
0
Transmit
data
D0
D1
D7
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
0/1
1
1 frame
0
Transmit
data
D0
D1
D7
Parity Stop Mark
bit
bit
state
0/1
1
1
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
SCI3
TXI request TDRE cleared to 0
operation
User
processing
TXI request
TEI request
Write data in TDR
Figure 10.9 Typical Transmit Operation in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity Bit Added, and 1 Stop Bit)
Receiving: Figure 10.10 shows a typical flow chart for receiving serial data. After SCI3
initialization, follow the procedure below.
227
Start
1
Read bits OER, PER, and
FER in SSR
Yes
OER + PER +
FER = 1
No
2
1. Read bits OER, PER, and
FER in the serial status
register (SSR) to
determine if a receive
error has occurred.
If a receive error has
occurred, receive error
processing is executed.
2. Read the serial status register
(SSR), and after confirming
that bit RDRF = 1, read
received data from the receive
data register (RDR).
When RDR data is read, RDRF
is automatically cleared to 0.
Read bit RDRF in SSR
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read received data in RDR
3. To continue receiving data,
read bit RDRF and finish
reading RDR before the stop
bit of the present frame is
received.
When data is read from RDR,
RDRF is automatically cleared
to 0.
4 Receive error processing
Yes
3
Continue receiving?
No
A
Clear bit RE in SCR3 to 0
4. When a receive error occurs,
read bits OER, PER, and FER
in SSR to determine which
error (s) occurred.
After the necessary error
processing, be sure to clear
the above bits all to 0.
Data receiving cannot be resumed
while any of bits OER, PER, or
FER is set to 1.
When a framing error occurs,
a break can be detected by
reading the RXD pin value.
End
4
Start receive
error processing
Overrun error
processing
Yes
OER = 1?
No
Yes
Yes
FER = 1?
Break?
No
No
Framing error
processing
Yes
PER = 1?
No
Clear bits OER, PER, and
FER in SSR to 0
End receive error
processing
Parity error
processing
A
Figure 10.10 Typical Serial Data Receiving Flow Chart in Asynchronous Mode
228
SCI3 operates as follows when receiving serial data in asynchronous mode.
SCI3 monitors the communication line, and when a start bit (0) is detected it performs internal
synchronization and starts receiving. The communication format for data receiving is as outlined
in table 10.14. Received data is set in RSR in order of LSB to MSB, then the parity bit and stop
bit(s) are received. After receiving the data, SCI3 performs the following checks:
• Parity check: The number of 1s in receive data is checked to see if it matches the odd or even
parity selected in bit PM of SMR.
• Stop bit check: The stop bit is checked for a value of 1. If there are two stop bits, only the first
bit is checked.
• Status check: The RDRF bit is checked for a value of 0 to make sure received data can be
transferred from RSR to RDR.
If no receive error is detected by the above checks, bit RDRF is set to 1 and the received data is
stored in RDR. At that time, if bit RIE in SCR3 is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is requested. If the
error check detects a receive error, the appropriate error flag (OER, PER, or FER) is set to 1.
RDRF retains the same value as before the data was received. If at this time bit RIE in SCR3 is set
to 1, an ERI interrupt is requested.
Table 10.15 gives the receive error detection conditions and the processing of received data in
each case.
Note: Data receiving cannot be continued while a receive error flag is set. Before continuing the
receive operation it is necessary to clear the OER, FER, PER, and RDRF flags to 0.
Table 10.15 Receive Error Conditions and Received Data Processing
Receive Error
Abbrev.
Detection Conditions
Received Data Processing
Overrun error
OER
Receiving of the next data ends while Received data is not
bit RDRF in SSR is still set to 1
transferred from RSR to RDR
Framing error
FER
Stop bit is 0
Received data is transferred
from RSR to RDR
Parity error
PER
Received data does not match the
parity (odd/even) set in SMR
Received data is transferred
from RSR to RDR
229
Figure 10.11 shows a typical SCI3 data receive operation in asynchronous mode.
Start
bit
Serial 1
data
Receive
data
0
D0
D1
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
0
Receive
data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
0
Mark
(idle state)
1
1 frame
1 frame
RDRF
FER
SCI3 operation
RXI request
User processing
RDRF cleared
to 0
Read RDR data
Detects stop bit = 0
ERI request due
to framing error
Framing error
handling
Figure 10.11 Typical Receive Operation in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity Bit Added, and 1 Stop Bit)
10.3.5
Operation in Synchronous Mode
In synchronous mode, data is sent or received in synchronization with clock pulses. This mode is
suited to high-speed serial communication.
SCI3 consists of independent transmit and receive modules, so full duplex communication is
possible, sharing the same clock between both modules. Both the transmit and receive modules
have a double-buffer configuration. This allows data to be written during a transmit operation so
that data can be transmitted continuously, and enables data to be read during a receive operation so
that data can be received continuously.
230
(1) Transmit/Receive Format: Figure 10.12 shows the general communication data format for
synchronous communication.
*
*
Serial clock
LSB
Serial data
Don't
care
Bit 0
MSB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Don't
care
8 bits
One unit of communication data (character or frame)
Note: * At high level except during continuous transmit/receive.
Figure 10.12 Data Format in Synchronous Communication Mode
In synchronous communication, data is output to the communication line during the period from
one falling edge of the synchronous clock to the next falling edge. Data fixing is guaranteed at the
rising edge of the synchronous clock.
One character of data starts from the LSB and ends with the MSB. The communication line retains
the MSB state after the MSB is output.
In synchronous receive mode, SCI3 latches receive data in synchronization with the rising edge of
the serial clock.
The transmit/receive format is fixed at 8-bit data. No parity bit or multiprocessor bit is added in
this mode.
(2) Clock: Either an internal clock from the built-in baud rate generator is used, or an external
clock is input at pin SCK3. The choice of clock sources is designated by bit COM in SMR and bits
CKE1 and CKE0 in serial control register 3 (SCR3). See table 10.12 for details on selecting the
clock source.
When operation is based on an internal clock, a serial clock is output at pin SCK3. Eight clock
pulses are output per character of transmit/receive data. When no transmit or receive operation is
being performed, the pin is held at the high level.
(3) Data Transmit/Receive Operations
SCI3 Initialization: Before data is sent or received, bits TE and RE in serial control register 3
(SCR3) must be cleared to 0, after which initialization can be performed using the procedure.
231
Note: When modifying the operation mode, transfer format or other settings, always be sure to
clear bits TE and RE first. When TE is cleared to 0, bit TDRE will be set to 1. Clearing
RE does not clear the status flags RDRF, PER, FER, or OER, or alter the contents of the
receive data register (RDR).
When an external clock is used in synchronous mode, do not supply the clock during
initialization.
Figure 10.13 shows a typical flow chart for SCI3 initialization.
Start
1. Select the clock using serial control
register 3(SCR3). Be sure to set 0 for other
unused bits.
When the clock output is selected in the
asynchronous mode, a clock signal is
output immediately after setting bits CKE1
and CKE0 appropriately. When the clock
output is selected in the synchronous
mode, a clock signal is output immediately
after setting bits CKE1 and CKE0
appropriately and setting bit RE to 1.
Clear TE and RE to 0 in SCR3
1
Set bits CKE1 and CKE0
2
Select communication format in SMR
3
Set BRR value
2. Set the transmit/receive format in the serial
mode register (SMR).
Wait
Has a 1-bit
interval elapsed?
Yes
4
Set bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE
in SCR3, and set TE or RE to 1
End
Note:
No
3. Write the value corresponding to the desired
bit rate to the bit rate register (BRR). Note that
this setting is not required when using an
external clock.
4. Wait for at least a 1-bit interval, then set
bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, and set bit
TE or RE in SCR3 to 1. Setting TE or RE
enables SCI3 to use the TXD or RXD pin.
The initial states in asynchronous mode
are the mark transmit state and the idle
receive state (waiting for a start bit).
In simultaneous transmit/receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared to 0
or set to 1 simultaneously.
Figure 10.13 Typical Flow Chart when SCI3 Is Initialized
232
Transmitting: Figure 10.14 shows a typical flow chart for data transmission. After SCI3
initialization, follow the procedure below.
Start
1
Read bit TDRE in SSR
No
TDRE = 1?
Yes
1. Read the serial status register (SSR),
and after confirming that bit TDRE = 1,
write transmit data in the transmit
data register (TDR).
When data is written to TDR, TDRE is
automatically cleared to 0.
If clock output has been selected, after
data is written to TDR, the clock is
output and data transmission begins.
Write transmit data in TDR
Yes
2
Continue data transmission?
2. To continue transmitting data, first read
TDRE to confirm that it is set to 1, indicating
that data writing is enabled; then write the
next data to TDR. When data is written to
TDR, TDRE is automatically cleared to 0.
No
Read bit TEND in SSR
TEND = 1?
No
Yes
Write 0 to bit TE in SCR3
End
Figure 10.14 Typical Data Transmission Flow Chart in Synchronous Mode
233
SCI3 operates as follows during data transmission in synchronous mode.
SCI3 monitors bit TDRE in SSR. When this bit is cleared to 0, SCI3 recognizes that there is data
written in the transmit data register (TDR), which it transfers to the transmit shift register (TSR).
Then TDRE is set to 1 and transmission starts. If bit TIE in SCR3 is set to 1, a TXI interrupt is
requested.
If clock output is selected, SCI3 outputs eight serial clock pulses. If an external clock is used, data
is output in synchronization with the clock input.
Serial data is transmitted from pin TXD in order from LSB (bit 0) to MSB (bit 7).
After that, it checks TDRE at the same timing which it transmits the MSB (bit 7). If TDRE is 0,
data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and after the MSB (bit 7) is sent, transmission of the next
frame starts. If TDRE is 1, the TEND bit in SSR is set to 1, and after the MSB (bit 7) is sent, the
MSB state is maintained. A TEI interrupt is requested in this state if bit TEIE in SCR3 is set to 1.
After data transmission ends, pin SCK3 is held at the high level.
Note: Data transmission cannot take place while any of the receive error flags (OER, FER, PER)
is set to 1. Be sure to confirm that these error flags are cleared to 0 before starting
transmission.
Figure 10.15 shows a typical SCI3 transmit operation in synchronous mode.
Serial
clock
Serial data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
1 frame
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
SCI3
operation
User
processing
TXI
request
TDRE cleared to 0
TXI
request
TEI request
Write data in TDR
Figure 10.15 Typical SCI3 Transmit Operation in Synchronous Mode
234
Receiving: Figure 10.16 shows a typical flow chart for receiving data. After SCI3 initialization,
follow the procedure below.
Start
Read bit OER in SSR
1
Yes
OER = 1?
1. Read bit OER in the serial status register (SSR)
to determine if an error has occurred. If an
overrun error has occurred, overrun error
processing is executed.
No
2
Read bit RDRF in SSR
No
RDRF = 1?
2. Read the serial status register (SSR), and after
confirming that bit RDRF = 1, read received
data from the receive data register (RDR).
When data is read from RDR, RDRF is
automatically cleared to 0.
Yes
Read received data in RDR
4 Overrun error processing
Continue
receiving?
3
No
Clear bit RE in SCR3 to 0
End
4
Yes
3. To continue receiving data, read bit RDRF and
read the received data in RDR before the MSB
(bit 7) of the present frame is received.
When data is read from RDR, RDRF is
automatically cleared to 0.
4. When an overrun error occurs, read bit OER in
SSR. After the necessary error processing,
be sure to clear OER to 0.
Data receiving cannot be resumed while bit
OER is set to 1.
Start overrun
processing
Overrun error
processing
Clear bit OER in
SSR to 0
End overrun
error processing
Figure 10.16 Typical Data Receiving Flow Chart in Synchronous Mode
235
SCI3 operates as follows when receiving serial data in synchronous mode.
In synchronization with the input or output of the serial clock, SCI3 initializes internally and starts
receiving. Received data is set in RSR from LSB to MSB.
After data has been received, SCI3 checks to confirm that the value of bit RDRF is 0 indicating
that received data can be transferred from RSR to RDR. If this check passes, RDRF is set to 1 and
the received data is stored in RDR. At this time, if bit RIE in SCR3 is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is
requested. If an overrun error is detected, OER is set to 1 and RDRF remains set to 1. Then if bit
RIE in SCR3 is set to 1, an ERI interrupt is requested.
For the overrun error detection conditions and receive data processing, see table 10.15.
Note: Data receiving cannot be continued while a receive error flag is set. Before continuing the
receive operation it is necessary to clear the OER, FER, PER, and RDRF flags to 0.
Figure 10.17 shows a typical receive operation in synchronous mode.
Serial
clock
Serial
data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
1 frame
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
RDRF
OER
SCI3
operation
User
processing
RXI request RDRF cleared
to 0
Read data
from RDR
RXI request
ERI request due
to overrun error
RDR data
not read
(RDRF = 1)
Overrun error
handling
Figure 10.17 Typical Receive Operation in Synchronous Mode
236
Simultaneous Transmit/Receive: Figure 10.18 shows a typical flow chart for transmitting and
receiving simultaneously. After SCI3 synchronization, follow the procedure below.
1. Read the serial status register (SSR),
and after confirming that bit TDRE = 1,
write transmit data in the transmit data
register (TDR). When data is written to
TDR, TDRE is automatically cleared to 0.
Start
1
Read bit TDRE in SSR
No
TDRE = 1?
Yes
2
Write transmit data in TDR
Read bit OER in SSR
Yes
OER = 1?
No
Read RDRF in SSR
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read received data in RDR
4
3
Continue
transmitting and
receiving?
Overrun error processing
Yes
2. Read the serial status register (SSR),
and after confirming that bit RDRF = 1,
read the received data from the receive
data register (RDR). When data is read
from RDR, RDRF is automatically cleared
to 0.
3. To continue transmitting and receiving
serial data, read bit RDRF and finish
reading RDR before the MSB (bit 7) of the
present frame is received. Also read bit
TDRE, check that it is set to 1, and write
the next data in TDR before the MSB (bit 7)
of the current frame has been transmitted.
When data is written to TDR, TDRE is
automatically cleared to 0; and when data
is read from RDR, RDRF is automatically
cleared to 0.
4. When an overrun error occurs, read bit
OER in SSR. After the necessary error
processing, be sure to clear OER to 0.
Data transmission and reception cannot
take place while bit OER is set to 1. See
figure 10.16 for overrun error processing.
Note: When switching from transmit or receive
operation to simultaneous transmit/
receive operations, first clear the TE
bit and RE bit to 0, then set both these
bits to 1 simultaneously.
No
Clear bits TE and
RE in SCR3 to 0
End
Figure 10.18 Simultaneous Transmit/Receive Flow Chart in Synchronous Mode
237
Notes: 1. To switch from transmitting to simultaneous transmitting and receiving, first confirm
that TDRE and TEND are both set to 1 and that SCI3 has finished transmitting. Next
clear TE to 0. Then set both TE and RE to 1.
2. To switch from receiving to simultaneous transmitting and receiving, after confirming
that SCI3 has finished receiving, clear RE to 0. Next, after confirming that RDRF and
the error flags (OER FER, PER) are all 0, set both TE and RE to 1.
10.3.6
Multiprocessor Communication Function
The multiprocessor communication function enables several processors to share a single serial
communication line. The processors communicate in asynchronous mode using a format with an
additional multiprocessor bit (multiprocessor format).
In multiprocessor communication, each receiving processor is addressed by an ID code. A serial
communication cycle consists of two cycles: an ID-sending cycle that identifies the receiving
processor, and a data-sending cycle in which communication data is sent to the specified receiving
processor. The multiprocessor bit is used to distinguish between the ID-sending cycle and the
data-sending cycle. The multiprocessor bit is 1 in an ID-sending cycle, and 0 in a data-sending
cycle.
The transmitting processor starts by sending the ID of the receiving processor with which it wants
to communicate as data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Next the transmitting processor sends
transmit data with the multiprocessor bit cleared to 0. When a receiving processor receives data
with the multiprocessor bit set to 1, it compares the data with its own ID. If the data matches its
ID, the receiving processor continues to receive incoming data. If the data does not match its ID,
the receiving processor skips further incoming data until it again receives data with the
multiprocessor bit set to 1. Multiple processors can send and receive data in this way.
Figure 10.19 shows an example of communication among different processors using a
multiprocessor format.
238
Transmitting
processor
Communication line
Receiving
processor A
Receiving
processor B
Receiving
processor C
Receiving
processor D
(ID = 01)
(ID = 02)
(ID = 03)
(ID = 04)
Serial data
H'01
H'AA
(MPB = 1)
ID-sending cycle
(receiving processor
address)
(MPB = 0)
Data-sending cycle
(data sent to receiving
processor designated
by ID)
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Figure 10.19 Example of Interprocessor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Data H'AA Sent to Receiving Processor A)
Four communication formats are available. Parity-bit settings are ignored when a multiprocessor
format is selected. For details see table 10.14.
For a description of the clock used in multiprocessor communication, see 10.3.4, Operation in
Asynchronous Mode.
239
Transmitting Multiprocessor Data: Figure 10.20 shows a typical flow chart for multiprocessor
serial data transmission. After SCI3 initialization, follow the procedure below.
Start
1
Read bit TDRE in SSR
No
TDRE = 1?
Yes
1. Read the serial status register (SSR), and
after confirming that bit TDRE = 1, set bit
MPBT (multiprocessor bit transmit) in SSR
to 0 or 1, then write transmit data in the
transmit data register (TDR).
When data is written to TDR, TDRE is
automatically cleared to 0.
Set bit MPBT in SSR
Write transmit data to TDR
2
Continue
transmitting?
Yes
2. To continue transmitting data, read bit
TDRE to make sure it is set to 1, indicating
that data writing is enabled. Then write
the next data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, TDRE
is automatically cleared to 0.
3. To output a break signal at the end of data
transmission, first set the port values
PCR = 1 and PDR = 0, then clear bit TE
in SCR3 to 0.
No
Read bit TEND in SSR
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
3
Break output?
No
Yes
Set PDR = 0 and PCR = 1
Clear bit TE in SCR3 to 0
End
Figure 10.20 Typical Multiprocessor Data Transmission Flow Chart
240
SCI3 operates as follows during data transmission using a multiprocessor format.
SCI3 monitors bit TDRE in SSR. When this bit is cleared to 0, SCI3 recognizes that there is data
written in the transmit data register (TDR), which it transfers to the transmit shift register (TSR).
Then TDRE is set to 1 and transmission starts. If bit TIE in SCR3 is set to 1, a TXI interrupt is
requested.
Serial data is transmitted from pin TXD using the communication format outlined in
table 10.14.
Next, TDRE is checked as the stop bit is being transmitted. If TDRE is 0, data is transferred from
TDR to TSR, and after the stop bit is sent, transmission of the next frame starts. If TDRE is 1, the
TEND bit in SSR is set to 1, and after the stop bit is sent the output remains at 1 (mark state). A
TEI interrupt is requested in this state if bit TEIE (transmit end interrupt enable) in SCR3 is set
to 1.
Figure 10.21 shows a typical SCI3 operation in multiprocessor communication mode.
Start
bit
Serial
data
1
0
Transmit
data
D0
D1
D7
MPB
0/1
Stop Start
bit
bit
1
1 frame
0
Transmit
data
D0
D1
D7
MPB
0/1
Stop Mark
bit
state
1
1
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
SCI3
TXI request
operation
TDRE cleared
to 0
User
processing
Write data in
TDR
TXI
request
TEI
request
Figure 10.21 Typical Multiprocessor Format Transmit Operation
(8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit Added, and 1 Stop Bit)
241
Receiving Multiprocessor Ddata: Figure 10.22 shows a typical flow chart for receiving data
using a multiprocessor format. After SCI3 initialization, follow the procedure below.
Start
1
Set bit MPIE in SCR3 to 1
2
Read bits OER and FER in SSR
1. Set bit MPIE in serial control register 3 (SCR3) to 1.
2. Read bits OER and FER in the serial status register (SSR)
to determine if an error has occurred. If a receive error has
occurred, receive error processing is executed.
Yes
OER + FER = 1?
No
Read bit RDRF in SSR
3
3. Read the serial status register (SSR) and confirm that
RDRF = 1. If RDRF = 1, read the data in the received data
register (RDR) and compare it with the processor’s own ID.
If the received data does not match the ID, set bit MPIE to
1 again. Bit RDRF is automatically cleared to 0 when data
in the received data register (RDR) is read.
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
4. Read SSR, check that bit RDRF = 1, then read received
data from the receive data register (RDR).
Read received data in RDR
No
Own ID?
5. If a receive error occurs, read bits OER and FER in SSR
to determine which error occurred. After the necessary
error processing, be sure to clear the error flags to 0.
Data reception cannot resume while bit OER or FER is
set to 1.
When a framing error occurs, a break can be detected by
reading the RXD pin value.
Yes
Read bits OER and FER in SSR
Yes
OER + FER = 1?
No
4
Read bit RDRF in SSR
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read received data in RDR
5 Error processing
Yes
Continue receiving?
No
A
Start receive error processing
Clear bit RE in SCR3 to 0
Overrun error
processing
Yes
OER = 1?
End
No
Yes
Yes
Break?
FER = 1?
No
Clear bits OER and
FER in SSR to 0.
End receive error processing
No
Framing error
processing
A
Figure 10.22 Typical Flow Chart for Receiving Serial Data Using Multiprocessor Format
242
Figure 10.23 gives an example of data reception using a multiprocessor format.
Start
bit
Serial
data
1
0
Receive
data (ID1)
D0
D1
Stop Start
bit
MPB bit
D7
1
1
0
Receive
data (data 1)
D0
D1
1 frame
D7
Stop
MPB bit
0
Mark
(idle state)
1
1
1 frame
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
SCI3 operation
RXI request
MPIE cleared to 0
RDRF cleared to 0
Read data from RDR
User processing
No RXI request
RDR state retained
If not own ID,
set MPIE to 1 again
(a) Data does not match own ID
Start
bit
Serial
data
1
0
Receive
data (ID2)
D0
D1
Stop Start
MPB bit
bit
D7
1
1
0
Receive
data (data 2)
D0
D1
1 frame
D7
Stop
MPB bit
0
Mark
(idle state)
1
1
1 frame
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
SCI3 operation
User processing
Data 2
ID2
RXI request
MPIE cleared to 0
RDRF cleared to 0
Read data from RDR
RXI
request
RDRF
cleared
to 0
If own ID, continue
receiving
Read data
from RDR
and set
MPIE to 1
again
(b) Data matches own ID
Figure 10.23 Example of Multiprocessor Format Receive Operation
(8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit Added, and 1 Stop Bit)
243
10.3.7
Interrupts
SCI3 has six interrupt sources: transmit end, transmit data empty, receive data full, and the three
receive error interrupts (overrun error, framing error, and parity error). All share a common
interrupt vector. Table 10.16 describes each interrupt.
Table 10.16 SCI3 Interrupts
Interrupt
Interrupt Request
Vector Address
RXI
Interrupt request due to receive data register full (RDRF)
H'0024
TXI
Interrupt request due to transmit data register empty (TDRE)
TEI
Interrupt request due to transmit end (TEND)
ERI
Interrupt request due to receive error (OER, FER, or PER)
The interrupt requests are enabled and disabled by bits TIE and RIE of SCR3.
When bit TDRE in SSR is set to 1, TXI is requested. When bit TEND in SSR is set to 1, TEI is
requested. These two interrupt requests occur during data transmission.
The initial value of bit TDRE is 1. Accordingly, if the transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI)
is enabled by setting bit TIE to 1 in SCR3 before placing transmit data in TDR, TXI will be
requested even though no transmit data has been readied.
Likewise, the initial value of bit TEND is 1. Accordingly, if the transmit end interrupt request
(TEI) is enabled by setting bit TEIE to 1 in SCR3 before placing transmit data in TDR, TEI will be
requested even though no data has been transmitted.
These interrupt features can be used to advantage by programming the interrupt handler to move
the transmit data into TDR. When this technique is not used, the interrupt enable bits (TIE and
TEIE) should not be set to 1 until after TDR has been loaded with transmit data, to avoid
unwanted TXI and TEI interrupts.
When bit RDRF in SSR is set to 1, RXI is requested. When any of SSR bits OER, FER, or PER is
set to 1, ERI is requested. These two interrupt requests occur during the receiving of data.
Details on interrupts are given in 3.3, Interrupts.
244
10.3.8
Application Notes
When using SCI3, attention should be paid to the following matters.
Relation between Bit TDRE and Writing Data to TDR: Bit TDRE in the serial status register
(SSR) is a status flag indicating that TDR does not contain new transmit data. TDRE is
automatically cleared to 0 when data is written to TDR. When SCI3 transfers data from TDR to
TSR, bit TDRE is set to 1.
Data can be written to TDR regardless of the status of bit TDRE. However, if new data is written
to TDR while TDRE is cleared to 0, assuming the data held in TDR has not yet been shifted to
TSR, it will be lost. For this reason, it is recommended for securing serial data transmission that
writing transmit data to TDR should be performed only once (not two or more times), always after
confirming that bit TDRE is set to 1.
Operation when Multiple Receive Errors Occur at the Same Time: When two or more receive
errors occur at the same time, the status flags in SSR are set as shown in table 10.17. If an overrun
error occurs, data is not transferred from RSR to RDR, and receive data is lost.
Table 10.17
SSR Status Flag States and Transfer of Receive Data
SSR Status Flags
RDRF* OER
FER
PER
Receive Data Transfer
(RSR → RDR)
Receive Error Status
1
1
0
0
×
0
0
1
0
Framing error
0
0
0
1
Parity error
1
1
1
0
×
Overrun error + framing error
1
1
0
1
×
Overrun error + parity error
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Overrun error
Framing error + parity error
×
Overrun error + framing error + parity error
: Receive data transferred from RSR to RDR
× : Receive data not transferred from RSR to RDR
Note: * RDRF keeps the same state as before the data was received.
245
Break Detection and Processing: Break signals can be detected by reading the RXD pin directly
when a framing error (FER) is detected. In the break state the input from the RXD pin consists of
all 0s, so FER is set and the parity error flag (PER) may also be set. In the break state SCI3
continues to receive, so if the FER bit is cleared to 0 it will be set to 1 again.
Sending a Mark or Break Signal: When the TXD bit in PMR6 is cleared to 0, the TXD pin
becomes an I/O port, the level and direction (input or output) of which are determined by the
PDR and PCR bits. This feature can be used to place the TXD pin in the mark state or to send
a break signal.
To place the serial communication line in the mark (1) state before TE is set to 1, set the PDR
and PCR bits both to 1. The TXD pin becomes an I/O port outputting the value 1.
To send a break signal during transmission, set the PCR bit to 1 and clear the PDR bit to 0,
then clear the TXD bit in PMR6 to 0.
When the TXD bit in PMR6 is cleared to 0, the TXD pin becomes an I/O port outputting 0,
regardless of the current transmission status.
Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operation (Sysnchronous Mode Only): When a receive
error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, SCI3 will not start transmitting even if TDRE is
cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 when starting to transmit. Note that
clearing RE to 0 does not clear the receive error flags.
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Receive Margin in Asynchronous Mode: In asynchronous
mode SCI3 operates on a base clock with 16 times the bit rate frequency. In receiving, SCI3
synchronizes internally with the falling edge of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock.
Receive data is latched at the rising edge of the eighth base clock pulse. See figure 10.24.
246
16 clock cycles
8 clock cycles
Internal base
clock
Receive data
(RXD)
0
7
15 0
Start bit
7
15 0
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 10.24 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
The receive margin in asynchronous mode can therefore be derived from the following equation.


1
D – 0.5
M = (0.5 –
)–
– (L – 0.5) F × 100% ...................... Equation (1)
2N
N


M:
N:
D:
L:
F:
Receive margin (%)
Ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (N = 16)
Clock duty cycle (D = 0.5 to 1)
Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
Absolute value of clock frequency error
In equation (1), if F (absolute value of clock frequency error) = 0 and D (clock duty cycle) = 0.5,
the receive margin is 46.875% as given by equation (2) below.
When D = 0.5 and F = 0,
M = {0.5 – 1/(2 × 16)} × 100% = 46.875% ...................................... Equation (2)
This value is theoretical. In actual system designs a margin of from 20 to 30 percent should be
allowed.
247
Relationship between Bit RDRF and Reading RDR: While SCI3 is receiving, it checks the
RDRF flag. If the RDRF flag is cleared to 0 when the reception of one frame of data is completed,
data reception ends normally. If RDRF is set to 1, an overrun error occurs.
RDRF is automatically cleared to 0 when the contents of RDR are read. If RDR is read more than
once, the second and later reads will be performed with RDRF cleared to 0. Note that when RDR
is read while RDRF is 0, data from the next frame may be read if this reading operation is carried
out at the same time that the reception of the next frame is completed. This is illustrated in figure
10.25.
Communication line
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 1
Data 2
RDRF
RDR
(A)
RDR read
(B)
RDR read
At (A), data 1 is read.
At (B), data 2 is read.
Figure 10.25 Relationship between Data and RDR Read Timing
To avoid the situation described above, RDR reading should be carried out only once (not two or
more times) after confirming that bit RDRF is set to 1.
When reading RDR more than once, be sure to copy any data read for the first time to RAM, for
example, and use the copied data. Also note that RDR reading should be carried out with a safe
margin just before reception of the next frame is completed. More concretely, RDR reading should
be completed before transferring bit 7 in the synchronous mode or before transferring the stop bit
in the asynchronous mode.
248
Section 11 DTMF Generator
11.1
Overview
The H8/3627 Series has an on-chip dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) generator that can generate
DTMF signals.
2
3
A
R1 (697 Hz)
4
5
6
B
R2 (770 Hz)
7
8
9
C
R3 (852 Hz)
0
#
D
R4 (941 Hz)
C3 (1,477 Hz)
C4 (1,633 Hz)
C1 (1,209 Hz)
1
C2 (1,336 Hz)
A DTMF signal accesses a telephone switching system by a pair of sine waves. Figure 11.1 shows
the frequency matrix. The DTMF generator generates frequencies corresponding to the numbers
and symbols on the keypad of a telephone set or facsimile machine.
Figure 11.1 DTMF Frequencies
249
11.1.1
Features
Features of the DTMF generator are as follows.
• Generates sine waves with DTMF frequencies from the system clock input at the OSC pins
(f OSC )
The OSC clock (1.2 MHz to 10 MHz, selectable in 400-kHz steps) is divided to generate a
400-kHz clock. Input to a feedback loop with a modified programmable divider and sine-wave
counter, this clock is used to generate sine waves with the DTMF frequencies.
• Stable sine-wave output with low distortion
Sine waves are output from a high-precision resistor-ladder-type D/A converter. Each cycle is
divided into 32 segments to give a stable waveform with low distortion.
• Composite or single waveform output
Register settings can select combined row-and-column-group output, or independent rowgroup or column-group output.
250
11.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 11.2 shows a block diagram of the DTMF generator.
DTLR
fOSC
(1.2 MHz to 10 MHz, selectable
in 400-kHz steps)
Clock
counter
400 kHz
Modified
programmable
divider
D/A sine-wave
counter
Feedback
TONED
Internal data bus
Row section
DTCR
VTref
Column section
Modified
programmable
divider
D/A sine-wave
counter
Feedback
Legend:
DTLR: DTMF load register
DTCR: DTMF control register
Figure 11.2 DTMF Generator Block Diagram
251
11.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 11.1 shows the pins assigned to the DTMF generator.
Table 11.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
DTMF output reference level
power supply pin
VT ref
—
Reference level voltage for DTMF
output
DTMF signal output pin
TONED
Output
DTMF signal output
11.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 11.2 shows the register configuration of the DTMF generator.
Table 11.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
DTMF control register
DTCR
R/W
H'40
H'FFB2
DTMF load register
DTLR
R/W
H'E0
H'FFB3
252
11.2
Register Descriptions
11.2.1
DTMF Control Register (DTCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTEN
—
CLOE
RWOE
CLF1
CLF0
RWF1
RWF0
Initial value
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DTCR is an 8-bit read/write register that enables the DTMF generator, enables row and column
output, and selects the output frequencies.
Upon reset, DTCR is initialized to H'40.
Bit 7—DTMF Generator Enable (DTEN): Bit 7 enables or disables operation of the DTMF
generator.
Bit 7: DTEN
Description
0
DTMF generator is halted
1
DTMF generator operates
(initial value)
Bit 6—Reserved Bit: Bit 6 is reserved: it is always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
Bit 5—Column Output Enable (CLOE): Bit 5 enables or disables DTMF column signal output.
Bit 5: CLOE
Description
0
DTMF column signal output is disabled (high-impedance)
1
DTMF column signal output is enabled
(initial value)
Bit 4—Row Output Enable (RWOE): Bit 4 enables or disables DTMF row signal output.
Bit 4: RWOE
Description
0
DTMF row signal output is disabled (high-impedance)
1
DTMF row signal output is enabled
(initial value)
253
Bits 3 and 2—DTMF Column Signal Output Frequency 1 and 0 (CLF1, CLF0): Bits 3 and 2
select the DTMF column signal frequency (C1 to C4).
Bit 3: CLF1
Bit 2: CLF0
Description
0
0
DTMF column signal output frequency: 1209 Hz (C1)
(initial value)
1
DTMF column signal output frequency: 1336 Hz (C2)
0
DTMF column signal output frequency: 1447 Hz (C3)
1
DTMF column signal output frequency: 1633 Hz (C4)
1
Bits 1 and 0—DTMF Row Signal Output Frequency 1 and 0 (RWF1, RWF0): Bits 1 and 0
select the DTMF row signal frequency (R1 to R4).
Bit 1: RWF1
Bit 0: RWF0
Description
0
0
DTMF row signal output frequency: 697 Hz (R1)
(initial value)
1
DTMF row signal output frequency: 770 Hz (R2)
0
DTMF row signal output frequency: 852 Hz (R3)
1
DTMF row signal output frequency: 941 Hz (R4)
1
254
11.2.2
DTMF Load Register (DTLR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
DTL4
DTL3
DTL2
DTL1
DTL0
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DTLR is an 8-bit read/write register that specifies the ratio by which the clock frequency at the
OSC pins is divided for input to the DTMF generator.
Upon reset, DTLR is initialized to H'E0.
Bits 7 to 5—Reserved Bits: Bits 7 to 5 are reserved: they are always read as 1, and cannot be
modified.
Bits 4 to 0—OSC Clock Division Ratio 4 to 0 (DTL4 to DTL0): Bits 4 to 0 specify a division
ratio of the OSC clock frequency which will generate a 400-kHz clock for input to the DTMF
generator. The ratio is set as a counter value from 3 to 25, corresponding to OSC clock frequencies
of 1.2 to 10 MHz (in 400-kHz steps).
Description
Bit 4:
DTL4
Bit 3:
DTL3
Bit 2:
DTL2
Bit 1:
DTL1
Bit 0:
DTL0
Division Ratio
0
0
0
0
0
Illegal setting
1
Illegal setting
0
Illegal setting
1
3
1.2 MHz
1
OSC Clock
Frequency
(initial value)
1
0
0
4
1.6 MHz
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1
1
0
0
1
25
10 MHz
1
*
Illegal setting
*
*
Illegal setting
1
Note: * Don’t care
These bits must be set to the correct value. Normal DTMF signal output frequencies will not be
obtained if these bits are set to a value not matching the clock input at the OSC pins. Operation is
not guaranteed if these bits are set to a value other than 3 to 25.
255
11.3
Operation
11.3.1
Output Waveform
The DTMF generator outputs a row-group or column-group sine wave (DTMF signal) or a
combined row-column waveform at the TONED pin. These signals are generated by a highprecision resistor-ladder-type D/A converter circuit. The output frequency is selected by DTCR.
Figure 11.3 shows an equivalent circuit for the TONED output. Figure 11.4 shows the output
waveform of an independent row-group or column-group signal. One cycle of the output is
divided into 32 segments, giving a stable output with low distortion.
Control
VTref
Output
control
GND
Row
TONED
Column
Figure 11.3 Equivalent Circuit for TONED Output
VTref
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
GND
Time slot
Figure 11.4 TONED Output Waveform (Independent Row- or Column-Group Output)
256
Table 11.3 indicates the frequency deviation between the DTMF signals output by the DTMF
generator and the nominal (standard) signal values.
Table 11.3 Frequency Deviation of DTMF Signals from Nominal Signals
Symbol
Standard Signal
Frequency (Hz)
DTMF Signal
Output (Hz)
Frequency
Deviation (%)
R1
697
694.44
–0.37
R2
770
769.23
–0.10
R3
852
851.06
–0.11
R4
941
938.97
–0.22
C1
1209
1212.12
0.26
C2
1336
1333.33
–0.20
C3
1477
1481.48
0.30
C4
1633
1639.34
0.39
11.3.2
Operation Flow
The procedure for using the DTMF generator is given below.
1. Set the OSC clock division ratio in DTLR to match the frequency of the connected system
clock oscillator (1.2 MHz to 10 MHz in 400-kHz steps).
2. Select a row (R1 to R4) and/or column (C1 to C4) frequency with bits CLF1, CLF0, RWF1,
and RWF0 in DTCR.
3. Select row and/or column output with the CLOE and RWOE bits in DTCR, and set the DTEN
bit to 1 to enable the DTMF generator.
This procedure outputs the selected DTMF signal from the TONED pin.
257
11.4
Typical Use
Figure 11.5 shows an example of the use of the DTMF generator.
24 kΩ
19
TONED
DTMF
2 kΩ
HA16808ANT
20
Vref1
VTref
H8/3637
100 kΩ
+0.47 µF
11
P14
360 k Ω
MUTE
2SC458
Note: Numbers at ends of signal lines are pin numbers of HA16808ANT.
Figure 11.5 Connection to HA16808 ANT
11.5
Application Notes
When using the DTMF generator, note the following point:
Be sure that the DTLR setting (DTL4 to DTL0) matches the system clock frequency at the OSC
pins. Normal DTMF signal output frequencies will not be obtained unless the DTLR setting
matches the OSC frequency.
258
Section 12 A/D Converter
12.1
Overview
The H8/3627 Series includes on-chip a resistance-ladder-based successive-approximation analogto-digital converter, and can convert up to two channels of analog input.
12.1.1
Features
The A/D converter has the following features.
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-bit resolution
2 input channels
Conversion time: approx. 12.4 µs per channel (at 5 MHz operation)
Built-in sample-and-hold function
Interrupt requested on completion of A/D conversion
A/D conversion can be started by external trigger input
259
12.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter.
ADTRG
AMR
Multiplexer
ADSR
AN7
V CC
+
Comparator
–
VCC
V SS
Reference
voltage
VSS
Control logic
Internal data bus
AN6
ADRR
Legend:
AMR: A/D mode register
ADSR: A/D start register
ADRR: A/D result register
IRRAD: A/D converter interrupt request flag
IRRAD
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of the A/D Converter
12.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 12.1 shows the A/D converter pin configuration.
Table 12.1
Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Power supply pin
VCC
Input
Power supply
Ground pin
VSS
Input
Ground and reference voltage
Analog input pin 6
AN 6
Input
Analog input channel 6
Analog input pin 7
AN 7
Input
Analog input channel 7
External trigger input pin
ADTRG
Input
External trigger input for starting A/D conversion
260
12.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 12.2 shows the A/D converter register configuration.
Table 12.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
A/D mode register
AMR
R/W
H'10
H'FFC4
A/D start register
ADSR
R/W
H'7F
H'FFC6
A/D result register
ADRR
R
Undefined
H'FFC5
12.2
Register Descriptions
12.2.1
A/D Result Register (ADRR)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADR7
ADR6
ADR5
ADR4
ADR3
ADR2
ADR1
ADR0
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
The A/D result register (ADRR) is an 8-bit read-only register for holding the results of analog-todigital conversion.
ADRR can be read by the CPU at any time, but the ADRR values during A/D conversion are
undefined.
After A/D conversion is complete, the conversion result is stored in ADRR as 8-bit data; this data
is held in ADRR until the next conversion operation starts.
ADRR is not cleared on reset.
261
12.2.2
A/D Mode Register (AMR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CKS
TRGE
CKS1
—
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
AMR is an 8-bit read/write register for specifying the A/D conversion speed, external trigger
option, and the analog input pins.
Upon reset, AMR is initialized to H'10.
Bit 7—Clock Select (CKS): Bits CKS and CKS1 select the A/D conversion speed.
Conversion Time
Bit 5: CKS1
Bit 7: CKS
Conversion Period
ø = 2 MHz
ø = 5 MHz
0
0
Reserved (initial value)
—
—
1
124/ø
62 µs
24.8 µs
0
62/ø
31 µs
12.4 µs
1
31/ø
15.5 µs
—*
1
Note: * Operation is not guaranteed if the conversion time is less than 12.4 µs. Set the bits to get a
value of at least 12.4 µs.
Bit 6—External Trigger Select (TRGE): Bit 6 enables or disables the start of A/D conversion by
external trigger input.
Bit 6: TRGE
Description
0
Disables start of A/D conversion by external trigger
1
Enables start of A/D conversion by rising or falling edge of external trigger at
pin ADTRG*
(initial value)
Note: * The external trigger (ADTRG) edge is selected by bit IEG4 of the interrupt edge select
register (IEGR). See 3.3.2 for details.
Bit 5—Clock Select 1 (CKS1): Bits CKS and CKS1 select the A/D conversion speed. See bit 7,
clock select (CKS) for details.
Bit 4—Reserved Bit: Bit 4 is reserved; it is always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
262
Bits 3 to 0—Channel Select 3 to 0 (CH3 to CH0): Bits 3 to 0 select the analog input channel.
The channel selection should be made while bit ADSF is cleared to 0.
Bit 3:
CH3
Bit 2:
CH2
Bit 1:
CH1
Bit 0:
CH0
Analog Input Channel
0
0
*
*
No channel selected
1
*
*
Reserved
0
0
*
Reserved
1
0
AN 6
1
AN 7
*
Reserved
1
1
*
(initial value)
Note: * Don’t care
12.2.3
A/D Start Register (ADSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADSF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The A/D start register (ADSR) is an 8-bit read/write register for starting and stopping A/D
conversion.
A/D conversion is started by writing 1 to the A/D start flag (ADSF) or by input of the designated
edge of the external trigger signal, which also sets ADSF to 1. When conversion is complete, the
converted data is set in the A/D result register (ADRR), and at the same time ADSF is cleared
to 0.
Bit 7—A/D Start Flag (ADSF): Bit 7 controls and indicates the start and end of A/D conversion.
Bit 7: ADSF
Description
0
Read access
Indicates the completion of A/D conversion.
Write access
Stops A/D conversion.
Read access
Indicates A/D conversion in progress.
Write access
Starts A/D conversion.
1
(initial value)
Bits 6 to 0—Reserved Bits: Bits 6 to 0 are reserved; they are always read as 1, and cannot be
modified.
263
12.3
Operation
12.3.1
A/D Conversion Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximations, and yields its conversion result as 8-bit
data.
A/D conversion begins when software sets the A/D start flag (bit ADSF) to 1. Bit ADSF keeps a
value of 1 during A/D conversion, and is cleared to 0 automatically when conversion is complete.
The completion of conversion also sets bit IRRAD in interrupt request register 2 (IRR2) to 1. An
A/D conversion end interrupt is requested if bit IENAD in interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2) is
set to 1.
If the conversion time or input channel needs to be changed in the A/D mode register (AMR)
during A/D conversion, bit ADSF should first be cleared to 0, stopping the conversion operation,
in order to avoid malfunction.
12.3.2
Start of A/D Conversion by External Trigger Input
The A/D converter can be made to start A/D conversion by input of an external trigger signal.
External trigger input is enabled at pin ADTRG when bit IRQ4 in port mode register 2 for the I/O
port (PMR2) is set to 1, and bit TRGE in AMR is set to 1. Then when the input signal edge
designated in bit IEG4 of the IRQ edge select register (IEGR) is detected at pin ADTRG, bit
ADSF in ADSR will be set to 1, starting A/D conversion.
Figure 12.2 shows the timing.
ø
Pin ADTRG
(when bit
IEG4 = 0)
ADSF
A/D conversion
Figure 12.2 External Trigger Input Timing
264
12.4
Interrupts
When A/D conversion ends (ADSF changes from 1 to 0), bit IRRAD in interrupt request
register 2 (IRR2) is set to 1.
A/D conversion end interrupts can be enabled or disabled by means of bit IENAD in interrupt
enable register 2 (IENR2).
For further details see 3.3, Interrupts.
12.5
Typical Use
An example of how the A/D converter can be used is given below, using channel 6 (pin AN6) as
the analog input channel. Figure 12.3 shows the operation timing.
1. Bits CH3 to CH0 of the A/D mode register (AMR) are set to 1010, making pin AN6 the analog
input channel. A/D interrupts are enabled by setting bit IENAD to 1, and A/D conversion is
started by setting bit ADSF to 1.
2. When A/D conversion is complete, bit IRRAD is set to 1, and the A/D conversion result is
stored in the A/D result register (ADRR). At the same time ADSF is cleared to 0, and the A/D
converter goes to the idle state.
3. Bit IENAD = 1, so an A/D conversion end interrupt is requested.
4. The A/D interrupt handling routine starts.
5. The A/D conversion result is read and processed.
6. The A/D interrupt handling routine ends.
If ADSF is set to 1 again afterward, A/D conversion starts and steps 2 through 6 take place.
Figures 12.4 and 12.5 show flow charts of procedures for using the A/D converter.
265
Figure 12.3 Typical A/D Converter Operation Timing
266
Idle
A/D conversion starts
A/D conversion (1)
Set *
Set *
Note: * ( ) indicates instruction execution by software.
ADRR
Channel 4 (AN4)
operation state
ADSF
IENAD
Interrupt
(IRRAD)
A/D conversion (2)
A/D conversion result (1)
Read conversion result
Idle
Set *
A/D conversion result (2)
Read conversion result
Idle
Start
Set A/D conversion speed
and input channel
Disable A/D conversion
end interrupt
Start A/D conversion
Read ADSR
No
ADSF = 0?
Yes
Read ADRR data
Yes
Perform A/D
conversion?
No
End
Figure 12.4 Flow Chart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (1) (Polling by Software)
267
Start
Set A/D conversion speed
and input channels
Enable A/D conversion
end interrupt
Start A/D conversion
A/D conversion
end interrupt?
No
Yes
Clear bit IRRAD to
0 in IRR2
Read ADRR data
Yes
Perform A/D
conversion?
No
End
Figure 12.5 Flow Chart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (2) (Interrupts Used)
12.6
Application Notes
• Data in the A/D result register (ADRR) should be read only when the A/D start flag (ADSF) in
the A/D start register (ADSR) is cleared to 0.
• Changing the digital input signal at an adjacent pin during A/D conversion may adversely
affect conversion accuracy.
268
Section 13 Power Supply Circuit
13.1
Overview
The H8/3627 Series incorporates an internal power supply step-down circuit. Use of this circuit
enables the internal power supply to be fixed at a constant level of approximately 3.0 V,
independent of the voltage of the power supply connected to the external VCC pin. As a result, rise
of the current consumption when an external power supply is used at 3.0 V or above can be held
down.
13.2
Configuration of the Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit
Connect the external power supply to the VCC pin, and connect a capacitance of approximately 0.1
µF between CV CC and V SS , as shown in figure 13.1. Use without the capacitance may cause
malfunction.
Note: In the external circuit interface, the external power supply voltage connected to VCC and
the GND potential connected to VSS are the reference levels. For example, for port
input/output levels, the V CC level is the reference for the high level, and the VSS level is
that for the low level.
269
VCC
Step-down circuit
CVCC
Internal logic
Stabilization
capacitance
(approx. 0.1 µF)
Internal
power
supply
C
VSS
C: Capacitor with the standard power supply circuit configuration
Figure 13.1 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Used
270
Section 14 Electrical Characteristics
14.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 14.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 14.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
Value
Unit
Notes
Power supply voltage
VCC, CV CC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
1
Reference level supply voltage
VT ref
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
1
Programming voltage
VPP
–0.3 to +13.0
V
1
Ports other than port B
Vin
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
1
Port B
AVin
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
1
Operating temperature
Topr
–20 to +75
°C
1
Storage temperature
Tstg
–55 to +125
°C
1
Input voltage
Note: 1. Permanent damage may occur to the chip if maximum ratings are exceeded. Normal
operation should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics.
Exceeding these values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.
271
14.2
Electrical Characteristics
14.2.1
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range
The power supply voltage and operating range are indicated by the shaded region in the figures
below.
Note: Caution is required during development, since the guaranteed operating ranges of the chip
and development tools are different.
Power Supply Voltage vs. Oscillator Frequency Range
32.768
fw (kHz)
f OSC (MHz)
10.0
5.0
2.0
2.2* 2.7
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• Active mode (high and medium speeds)
• Sleep mode
Note: * The oscillation start voltage is 2.5 V.
272
2.2*
4.0
• All operating modes
5.5
VCC (V)
Power Supply Voltage vs. Clock Frequency Range
øSUB (kHz)
ø (MHz)
5.0
2.5
16.384
8.192
4.096
0.5
2.2 2.7
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
2.2
• Active mode (high speed)
• Sleep mode (except CPU)
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• Subactive mode
• Subsleep mode (except CPU)
• Watch mode (except CPU)
625.0
ø (kHz)
500.0
312.5
62.5
2.7
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• Active mode (medium speed)
Analog Power Supply Voltage vs. A/D Converter Operating Range
5.0
625.0
ø (kHz)
ø (MHz)
500.0
2.5
0.5
312.5
62.5
2.2 2.7
4.0
• Active (high speed) mode
• Sleep mode
5.5
V CC (V)
2.7
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• Active (medium speed) mode
273
14.2.2
DC Characteristics
Table 14.2 lists the DC characteristics.
Table 14.2 DC Characteristics
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, including subactive mode, unless otherwise
indicated.
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Input high
voltage
VIH
RES,
WKP0 to WKP7,
IRQ0 to IRQ4,
TMIF, TMIG,
SCK1, SCK3,
ADTRG
0.8 V CC
—
VCC +0.3
V
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
0.9 V CC
—
VCC +0.3
SI 1, RXD
0.7 V CC
—
VCC +0.3
V
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
0.8 V CC
—
VCC +0.3
VCC –0.5
—
VCC +0.3
V
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
VCC –0.3
—
VCC +0.3
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PA 1 to PA3,
PB 6, PB7
0.7 V CC
—
VCC +0.3
V
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
0.8 V CC
—
VCC +0.3
RES,
WKP0 to WKP7,
IRQ0 to IRQ4,
TMIF, TMIG,
SCK1, SCK3,
ADTRG
–0.3
—
0.2 V CC
V
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
–0.3
—
0.1 V CC
SI 1, RXD
–0.3
—
0.3 V CC
V
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
–0.3
—
0.2 V CC
–0.3
—
0.5
V
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
–0.3
—
0.3
OSC1
Input low
voltage
VIL
OSC1
Note: Connect pin TEST to VSS .
274
Note
Table 14.2 DC Characteristics (cont)
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, including subactive mode, unless otherwise
indicated.
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Input low
voltage
VIL
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PA 1 to PA3,
PB 6, PB7
–0.3
—
0.3 V CC
V
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
–0.3
—
0.2 V CC
P10 to P17,
P20 to P26,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PA 1 to PA3,
VCC – 1.0 —
—
V
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
–I OH = 1.0 mA
VCC – 0.5 —
—
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
–I OH = 0.5 mA
VCC – 0.5 —
—
–I OH = 0.1 mA
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PA 1 to PA3,
—
—
0.5
P10 to P17,
P20 to P26
—
—
1.5
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 10 mA
—
—
0.6
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 1.6 mA
—
—
0.5
IOL = 0.4 mA
Output
high
voltage
Output
low
voltage
VOH
VOL
V
Note
IOL = 0.4 mA
275
Table 14.2 DC Characteristics (cont)
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, including subactive mode, unless otherwise
indicated.
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Note
Input
leakage
current
|IIL|
RES, P27
—
—
20
µA
3
—
—
1
VIN = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
OSC1,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P26,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PA 1 to PA3,
PB 6, PB7
—
—
1
µA
VIN = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
P10 to P17,
P20 to P26
50
—
300
µA
VCC = 5 V,
VIN = 0 V
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67
—
35
—
All input pins
except power
supply pins
—
—
15
RES
—
—
80
P27
—
—
50
Pull-up
MOS
current
–I P
Input
capacitance
CIN
VCC = 2.7 V,
VIN = 0 V
pF
2
Reference
value
f = 1 MHz,
VIN = 0 V,
Ta = 25°C
3
Notes: 2. Applies to HD6433622, HD6433623, HD6433624, HD6433625, HD6433626, and
HD6433627.
3. Applies to HD6473627.
276
Table 14.2 DC Characteristics (cont)
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, including subactive mode, unless otherwise
indicated.
Applicable
Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Notes
Active mode current IOPE1
dissipation
VCC
—
6
9
mA
Active mode (high
speed), VCC = 5 V,
fosc = 10 MHz
4, 5
IOPE2
VCC
—
2
4
mA
Active mode (medium
speed), VCC = 5 V,
fosc = 10 MHz
4, 5
Sleep mode current ISLEEP
dissipation
VCC
—
3.5
6
mA
VCC = 5 V,
fosc = 10 MHz
4, 5
Subactive mode
current dissipation
VCC
—
12
30
µA
VCC = 2.7 V,
32-kHz crystal oscillator
(ø SUB = øw/2)
4, 5
—
6
—
µA
VCC = 2.7 V,
32-kHz crystal oscillator
(ø SUB = øw/8)
Reference
value
4, 5
Item
Symbol
ISUB
ISUBSP
VCC
—
5
15
µA
VCC = 2.7 V,
32-kHz crystal oscillator
(ø SUB = øw/2)
4, 5
Watch mode current IWATCH
dissipation
VCC
—
—
6
µA
VCC = 2.7 V,
32-kHz crystal oscillator
4, 5
Standby mode
current dissipation
ISTBY
VCC
—
—
5
µA
32-kHz crystal oscillator
not used
4, 5
RAM data retaining
voltage
VRAM
VCC
2
—
—
V
Subsleep mode
current dissipation
Notes: 4. Pin states during current measurement are shown below.
Mode
Other Pins
Internal State
Oscillator Pins
Active mode (high and
mediumspeed)
VCC
Operates
System clock oscillator: Crystal
Subclock oscillator: Pin X1 = VCC
Sleep mode
VCC
Only timer operates
Subactive mode
VCC
Operates
Subsleep mode
VCC
Only timer operates,
CPU stops
Watch mode
VCC
Only time-base clock
operates, CPU stops
Standby mode
VCC
CPU and timers all
stop
System clock oscillator: Crystal
Subclock oscillator: Crystal
System clock oscillator: Crystal
Subclock oscillator: Pin X1 = VCC
5. Excludes current in pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers.
277
Table 14.2 DC Characteristics (cont)
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, including subactive mode, unless otherwise
indicated.
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Allowable output low
current (per pin)
IOL
Output pins except in
ports 1 and 2
—
—
2
mA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Ports 1 and 2
—
—
10
All output pins
—
—
0.5
Output pins except in
ports 1 and 2
—
—
40
Ports 1 and 2
—
—
80
All output pins
—
—
20
All output pins
—
—
2
—
—
0.2
—
—
15
—
—
10
Allowable output low
current (total)
ΣIOL
Allowable output high
current (per pin)
–I OH
Allowable output high
current (total)
Σ–I OH
278
All output pins
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
mA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
mA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
mA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
14.2.3
AC Characteristics
Table 14.3 lists the control signal timing, and tables 14.4 and 14.5 list the serial interface timing.
Table 14.3 Control Signal Timing
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, including subactive mode, unless otherwise
specified.
Applicable
Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
System clock
fOSC
oscillation frequency
OSC1, OSC2
2
—
10
MHz
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
2
—
5
OSC clock (ø OSC)
cycle time
tOSC
OSC1, OSC2
100
—
1000
ns
200
—
1000
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V 1
Figure 14.1
System clock (ø)
cycle time
tcyc
2
—
16
tOSC
—
—
2000
ns
Subclock oscillation
frequency
fW
X1, X2
—
32.768 —
kHz
Watch clock cycle
time (øW )
tW
X1, X2
—
30.5
—
µs
Subclock (øSUB)
cycle time
tsubcyc
2
—
8
tW
2
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
—
—
40
ms
Item
Symbol
Instruction cycle time
Reference
Figure
1
2
Oscillation stabilization time
(crystal oscillator)
trc
OSC1, OSC2
—
—
60
Oscillation
stabilization time
trc
X1, X2
—
—
2
s
External clock high
width
tCPH
OSC1
40
—
—
ns
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V Figure 14.1
80
—
—
External clock low
width
tCPL
40
—
—
ns
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V Figure 14.1
80
—
—
External clock rise
time
tCPr
—
—
15
ns
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V Figure 14.1
—
—
20
External clock fall
time
tCPf
—
—
15
ns
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V Figure 14.1
—
—
20
Pin RES low width
tREL
18
—
—
OSC1
RES
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
VCC = 2.5 V to 5.5 V
tcyc
tsubcyc
Figure 14.2
Notes: 1. A frequency between 1 MHz to 10 MHz is required when an external clock is input.
2. Selected with SA1 and SA0 of system clock control register 2 (SYSCR2).
279
Table 14.3 Control Signal Timing (cont)
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, including subactive mode, unless otherwise
specified.
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Oscillation start
voltage
Vstart
OSC1, OSC2
2.5
—
—
V
X1, X2
2.5
—
—
Input pin high width
tIH
IRQ0 to IRQ4, 2
WKP0 to
WKP7,
ADTRG,
TMIF, TMIG
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
Figure 14.3
Input pin low width
tIL
IRQ0 to IRQ4, 2
WKP0 to
WKP7,
ADTRG,
TMIF, TMIG
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
Figure 14.3
280
Test Condition
Reference
Figure
Table 14.4 Serial Interface Timing (SCI1)
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, including subactive mode, unless otherwise
specified.
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Input serial clock
cycle time
tscyc
SCK1
2
—
—
tcyc
Figure 14.4
Input serial clock
high width
tSCKH
SCK1
0.4
—
—
tscyc
Figure 14.4
Input serial clock
low width
tSCKL
SCK1
0.4
—
—
tscyc
Figure 14.4
Input serial clock
rise time
tSCKr
SCK1
—
—
60
ns
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Figure 14.4
—
—
80
Input serial clock
fall time
tSCKf
—
—
60
ns
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Figure 14.4
—
—
80
Serial output data
delay time
tSOD
—
—
200
ns
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Figure 14.4
—
—
350
Serial input data
setup time
tSIS
200
—
—
ns
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Figure 14.4
400
—
—
Serial input data
hold time
tSIH
200
—
—
ns
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Figure 14.4
400
—
—
SCK1
SO 1
SI 1
SI 1
Test Condition
Reference
Figure
Table 14.5 Serial Interface Timing (SCI3)
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, including subactive mode, unless otherwise
specified.
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
tscyc
4
—
—
tcyc
Figure 14.5
6
—
—
Input clock pulse width
tSCKW
0.4
—
0.6
tscyc
Figure 14.5
Transmit data delay time
(synchronous mode)
tTXD
—
—
1
tcyc
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Figure 14.6
—
—
1
Receive data setup time
(synchronous mode)
tRXS
200
—
—
ns
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Figure 14.6
400
—
—
Receive data hold time
(synchronous mode)
tRXH
200
—
—
ns
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Figure 14.6
400
—
—
Input clock cycle
Asynchronous
Synchronous
Test Condition
Reference
Figure
Symbol
281
14.2.4
A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 14.6 shows the A/D converter characteristics.
Table 14.6 A/D Converter Characteristics
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Analog input
voltage
AV IN
AN6, AN 7
–0.3
—
VCC + 0.3
V
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN
AN6, AN 7
—
—
30
pF
Allowable
signal source
impedance
RAIN
—
—
10
kΩ
Resolution
—
—
8
bit
Non-linearity
error
—
—
±2.0
LSB
Quantization
error
—
—
±0.5
LSB
Absolute
accuracy
—
—
±2.5
LSB
Conversion
time
12.4
—
248
µs
24.8
—
248
µs
282
Test Condition
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V
Notes
14.2.5
DTMF Characteristics
Table 14.7 lists the DTMF generator characteristics.
Table 14.7
DTMF Characteristics
VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75˚C, unless otherwise specified
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Reference level
supply voltage
VTref
VTref
2.2
—
VCC + 0.3 V
DTMF output
voltage (row)
VOR
TONED
550
723
—
mVrms VTref – GND = 2.2 V Figure 14.8
RL = 100 kΩ
1
DTMF output
VOC
voltage (column)
TONED
567
760
—
mVrms VTref – GND = 2.2 V Figure 14.8
RL = 100 kΩ
1
Unit
Test Condition
Notes
DTMF output
distortion
%DISDT TONED
—
3
7
%
VTref – GND = 2.2 V Figure 14.8
RL = 100 kΩ
DTMF output
level
dBCR
—
2.5
—
dB
VTref – GND = 2.2 V Figure 14.8
RL = 100 kΩ
TONED
Notes: 1. V OR and VOC indicate the output voltage during single wave output.
283
14.3
Operation Timing
Figures 14.1 to 14.6 show operation timings.
t OSC
VIH
OSC1
VIL
t CPH
t CPL
t CPr
t CPf
Figure 14.1 System Clock Input Timing
RES
VIL
tREL
Figure 14.2 RES Low Width Timing
IRQ0 to IRQ 4
WKP0 to WKP7
ADTRG
TMIF, TMIG
VIH
VIL
t IL
t IH
Figure 14.3 Input Timing
284
t Scyc
V IH or V OH*
SCK 1
V IL or V OL *
t SCKL
t SCKH
t SCKf
t SCKr
t SOD
VOH*
SO 1
VOL *
t SIS
t SIH
SI 1
Notes: * Output timing reference levels
Output high: VOH = 2.0 V
Output low: VOL = 0.8 V
Refer to figure 14.7 for output load condition.
Figure 14.4 Serial Interface 1 Input/Output Timing
285
t SCKW
SCK 3
t Scyc
Figure 14.5 SCK3 Input Clock Timing
t Scyc
V IH or V OH*
SCK 3
V IL or V OL *
t TXD
TXD
(transmit data)
VOH *
VOL*
t RXS
t RXH
RXD
(receive data)
Notes: * Output timing reference levels
Output high: VOH = 2.0 V
Output low: VOL = 0.8 V
Refer to figure 14.7 for output load condition.
Figure 14.6 Input/Output Timing of Serial Interface 3 in Synchronous Mode
286
14.4
Output Load Circuits
Figure 14.7 shows an output load condition.
VCC
2.4 kΩ
Output pin
30 pF
12 k Ω
Figure 14.7 Output Load Condition
RL = 100 kΩ
TONED
GND
Figure 14.8 TONED Load Circuit
287
288
Appendix A CPU Instruction Set
A.1
Instructions
Operation Notation
Rd8/16
General register (destination) (8 or 16 bits)
Rs8/16
General register (source) (8 or 16 bits)
Rn8/16
General register (8 or 16 bits)
CCR
Condition code register
N
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#xx: 3/8/16
Immediate data (3, 8, or 16 bits)
d: 8/16
Displacement (8 or 16 bits)
@aa: 8/16
Absolute address (8 or 16 bits)
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
Logical AND
∨
Logical OR
⊕
Exclusive logical OR
→
—
Move
Logical complement
Condition Code Notation
Symbol
Modified according to the instruction result
*
Undefined (value not guaranteed)
0
Always cleared to 0
—
Not affected by the instruction execution result
289
Table A.1 lists the H8/300L CPU instruction set.
Instruction Set
B Rs8 → Rd8
MOV.B @Rs, Rd
B @Rs16 → Rd8
MOV.B @(d:16, Rs), Rd
B @(d:16, Rs16) → Rd8
MOV.B @Rs+, Rd
B @Rs16 → Rd8
Rs16+1 → Rs16
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
B @aa:8 → Rd8
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
B @aa:16 → Rd8
MOV.B Rs, @Rd
B Rs8 → @Rd16
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, Rd)
B Rs8 → @(d:16, Rd16)
MOV.B Rs, @–Rd
B Rd16–1 → Rd16
Rs8 → @Rd16
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
B Rs8 → @aa:8
2
— —
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
B Rs8 → @aa:16
4
— —
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
W #xx:16 → Rd
MOV.W Rs, Rd
W Rs16 → Rd16
MOV.W @Rs, Rd
W @Rs16 → Rd16
— —
2
— —
2
4
W @Rs16 → Rd16
Rs16+2 → Rs16
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd
W @aa:16 → Rd16
MOV.W Rs, @Rd
W Rs16 → @Rd16
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, Rd) W Rs16 → @(d:16, Rd16)
MOV.W Rs, @–Rd
W Rd16–2 → Rd16
Rs16 → @Rd16
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16
W Rs16 → @aa:16
POP Rd
W @SP → Rd16
SP+2 → SP
290
— —
2
— —
2
— —
4
— —
2
— —
4
— —
2
— —
4
— —
2
— —
2
MOV.W @(d:16, Rs), Rd W @(d:16, Rs16) → Rd16
MOV.W @Rs+, Rd
— —
— —
4
— —
2
— —
4
2
— —
— —
4
— —
2
— —
4
2
— —
— —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
MOV.B Rs, Rd
2
0 — 2
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
H N Z V C
B #xx:8 → Rd8
0 — 4
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
I
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
No. of States
Condition Code
0 — 4
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
0 — 6
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
Table A.1
0 — 6
0 — 2
0 — 4
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 4
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 4
0 — 2
0 — 4
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 4
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 6
Instruction Set (cont)
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8+#xx:8 → Rd8
ADD.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8+Rs8 → Rd8
ADD.W Rs, Rd
W Rd16+Rs16 → Rd16
ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8+#xx:8 +C → Rd8
2
2
— —
—
2
—
2
— (1)
2
—
(2)
No. of States
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
I H N Z V C
0 — 6
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
W SP–2 → SP
Rs16 → @SP
Condition Code
↔
↔
PUSH Rs
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
Table A.1
2
2
2
2
B Rd8+Rs8 +C → Rd8
2
—
ADDS.W #1, Rd
W Rd16+1 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 2
ADDS.W #2, Rd
W Rd16+2 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 2
INC.B Rd
B Rd8+1 → Rd8
2
— —
DAA.B Rd
B Rd8 decimal adjust → Rd8
2
— *
SUB.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8–Rs8 → Rd8
2
—
SUB.W Rs, Rd
W Rd16–Rs16 → Rd16
2
— (1)
SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8–#xx:8 –C → Rd8
SUBX.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8–Rs8 –C → Rd8
2
—
SUBS.W #1, Rd
W Rd16–1 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 2
SUBS.W #2, Rd
W Rd16–2 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 2
DEC.B Rd
B Rd8–1 → Rd8
2
— —
DAS.B Rd
B Rd8 decimal adjust → Rd8
2
— *
NEG.B Rd
B 0–Rd → Rd
2
—
CMP.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8–#xx:8
—
— 2
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
(2)
↔
(2)
2
* (3) 2
2
2
2
2
— 2
* — 2
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
2
↔ ↔
↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
2
(2)
↔
ADDX.B Rs, Rd
2
2
CMP.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8–Rs8
2
—
CMP.W Rs, Rd
W Rd16–Rs16
2
— (1)
2
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8 × Rs8 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 14
2
291
Instruction Set (cont)
Condition Code
I
H N Z V C
DIVXU.B Rs, Rd
B Rd16÷Rs8 → Rd16 (RdH:
remainder, RdL: quotient)
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8∧#xx:8 → Rd8
AND.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8∧Rs8 → Rd8
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8∨#xx:8 → Rd8
OR.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8∨Rs8 → Rd8
XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8⊕#xx:8 → Rd8
XOR.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8⊕Rs8 → Rd8
2
— —
NOT.B Rd
B Rd → Rd
2
— —
SHAL.B Rd
B
2
— —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
SHAR.B Rd
B
2
— —
2
— —
2
— — 0
2
— —
2
— —
2
— —
2
— —
↔
↔
↔
2
0
↔
2
0
↔
2
0
↔
2
0
↔
2
0
↔
2
0
2
b0
0
C
b0
C
b0
b0
C
C
b7
292
0
↔
0
b0
B
C
b7
2
↔
↔
C
b7
ROTR.B Rd
0 — 2
↔
↔
B
0 — 2
↔
ROTL.B Rd
0 — 2
↔
↔
B
0 — 2
b0
b7
ROTXR.B Rd
0 — 2
↔
↔
B
— —
0 — 2
b0
b7
ROTXL.B Rd
2
— —
0 — 2
↔
↔
B
— —
2
C
b7
SHLR.B Rd
2
— —
↔
↔
B
— — (5) (6) — — 14
— —
2
0
b7
SHLL.B Rd
2
C
b7
2
No. of States
Table A.1
b0
Instruction Set (cont)
BSET #xx:3, Rd
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 1
BSET #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) ← 1
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 1
BSET Rn, Rd
B (Rn8 of Rd8) ← 1
BSET Rn, @Rd
B (Rn8 of @Rd16) ← 1
BSET Rn, @aa:8
B (Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 1
BCLR #xx:3, Rd
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 0
BCLR #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) ← 0
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 0
BCLR Rn, Rd
B (Rn8 of Rd8) ← 0
BCLR Rn, @Rd
B (Rn8 of @Rd16) ← 0
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
B (Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 0
BNOT #xx:3, Rd
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) ←
(#xx:3 of Rd8)
BNOT #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) ←
(#xx:3 of @Rd16)
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ←
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
BNOT Rn, Rd
B (Rn8 of Rd8) ←
(Rn8 of Rd8)
BNOT Rn, @Rd
B (Rn8 of @Rd16) ←
(Rn8 of @Rd16)
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
B (Rn8 of @aa:8) ←
(Rn8 of @aa:8)
BTST #xx:3, Rd
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) → Z
BTST #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) → Z
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → Z
BTST Rn, Rd
B (Rn8 of Rd8) → Z
BTST Rn, @Rd
B (Rn8 of @Rd16) → Z
BTST Rn, @aa:8
B (Rn8 of @aa:8) → Z
2
Condition Code
I
H N Z V C
No. of States
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — —
4
— — —
4
2
— — —
— — —
4
— — —
4
— — —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Table A.1
— — 2
— — 6
— — 6
— — 2
— — 6
— — 6
293
Instruction Set (cont)
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BLD #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BILD #xx:3, Rd
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BILD #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BST #xx:3, Rd
B C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
BST #xx:3, @Rd
B C → (#xx:3 of @Rd16)
BST #xx:3, @aa:8
B C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
BIST #xx:3, Rd
B C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
BIST #xx:3, @Rd
B C → (#xx:3 of @Rd16)
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
B C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
BAND #xx:3, Rd
B C∧(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BAND #xx:3, @Rd
B C∧(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
B C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BIAND #xx:3, Rd
B C∧(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BIAND #xx:3, @Rd
B C∧(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8
B C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BOR #xx:3, Rd
B C∨(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BOR #xx:3, @Rd
B C∨(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BIOR #xx:3, Rd
B C∨(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BIOR #xx:3, @Rd
B C∨(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BXOR #xx:3, Rd
B C⊕(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BXOR #xx:3, @Rd
B C⊕(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
B C⊕(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
294
H N Z V C
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
No. of States
I
— — — — —
4
2
6
6
2
6
6
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
2
Condition Code
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
BLD #xx:3, Rd
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
— — — — —
— — — — —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Table A.1
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
Instruction Set (cont)
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
Branching
Condition
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
Condition Code
I
H N Z V C
No. of States
Table A.1
B C⊕(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
— PC ← PC+d:8
2
— — — — — — 4
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
— PC ← PC+2
2
— — — — — — 4
BHI d:8
C∨Z=0
2
— — — — — — 4
C∨Z=1
2
— — — — — — 4
C=0
2
— — — — — — 4
C=1
2
— — — — — — 4
Z=0
2
— — — — — — 4
BEQ d:8
— If
— condition
is true
— then
— PC ←
PC+d:8
— else next;
—
Z=1
2
— — — — — — 4
BVC d:8
—
V=0
2
— — — — — — 4
BVS d:8
—
V=1
2
— — — — — — 4
BPL d:8
—
N=0
2
— — — — — — 4
BMI d:8
—
N=1
2
— — — — — — 4
BGE d:8
—
N⊕V = 0
2
— — — — — — 4
BLT d:8
—
N⊕V = 1
2
— — — — — — 4
BGT d:8
—
Z ∨ (N⊕V) = 0
2
— — — — — — 4
BLE d:8
—
Z ∨ (N⊕V) = 1
2
— — — — — — 4
JMP @Rn
— PC ← Rn16
JMP @aa:16
— PC ← aa:16
JMP @@aa:8
— PC ← @aa:8
BSR d:8
— SP–2 → SP
PC → @SP
PC ← PC+d:8
JSR @Rn
— SP–2 → SP
PC → @SP
PC ← Rn16
JSR @aa:16
— SP–2 → SP
PC → @SP
PC ← aa:16
BLS d:8
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BNE d:8
4
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
2
↔ ↔
BIXOR #xx:3, @Rd
6
6
— — — — — — 4
4
— — — — — — 6
2
2
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 6
— — — — — — 6
4
— — — — — — 8
295
Instruction Set (cont)
SP–2 → SP
PC → @SP
PC ← @aa:8
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
2
Condition Code
I
H N Z V C
— — — — — — 8
2 — — — — — — 8
RTE
— CCR ← @SP
SP+2 → SP
PC ← @SP
SP+2 → SP
2
SLEEP
— Transit to sleep mode.
LDC #xx:8, CCR
B #xx:8 → CCR
LDC Rs, CCR
B Rs8 → CCR
2
STC CCR, Rd
B CCR → Rd8
2
— — — — — — 2
ANDC #xx:8, CCR
B CCR∧#xx:8 → CCR
2
ORC #xx:8, CCR
B CCR∨#xx:8 → CCR
2
XORC #xx:8, CCR
B CCR⊕#xx:8 → CCR
2
NOP
— PC ← PC+2
2 — — — — — — 2
EEPMOV
— if R4L≠0 then
Repeat @R5 → @R6
R5+1 → R5
R6+1 → R6
R4L–1 → R4L
Until R4L=0
else next;
4 — — — — — — (4)
↔
↔
— PC ← @SP
SP+2 → SP
↔
↔
↔
↔
RTS
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
JSR @@aa:8
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length (Bytes)
No. of States
Table A.1
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
2 — — — — — — 2
2
Notes: (1) Set to 1 when there is a carry or borrow from bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0.
(2) If the result is zero, the previous value of the flag is retained; otherwise the flag is
cleared to 0.
(3) Set to 1 if decimal adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains value prior to
arithmetic operation.
(4) The number of states required for execution is 4n + 9 (n = value of R4L).
(5) Set to 1 if the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
(6) Set to 1 if the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
296
10
2
2
2
2
2
A.2
Operation Code Map
Table A.2 is an operation code map. It shows the operation codes contained in the first byte of the
instruction code (bits 15 to 8 of the first instruction word).
Instruction when first bit of byte 2 (bit 7 of first instruction word) is 0.
Instruction when first bit of byte 2 (bit 7 of first instruction word) is 1.
297
298
OR
XOR
AND
MOV
C
D
E
F
Note: * The PUSH and POP instructions are identical in machine language to MOV instructions.
8
BVC
SUBX
BILD
BIST
BLD
BST
BEQ
MOV
NEG
NOT
LDC
7
B
BIAND
BAND
RTE
BNE
AND
ANDC
6
CMP
BIXOR
BXOR
BSR
BCS
XOR
XORC
5
A
BIOR
BOR
RTS
BCC
OR
ORC
4
ADDX
BTST
BLS
ROTR
ROTXR
LDC
3
9
BCLR
BHI
ROTL
ROTXL
STC
2
ADD
BNOT
DIVXU
BRN
SHAR
SHLR
SLEEP
1
8
7
BSET
MULXU
5
6
BRA
SHAL
SHLL
NOP
0
4
3
2
1
0
Low
SUB
ADD
MOV
BVS
9
JMP
BPL
DEC
INC
A
C
CMP
MOV
BLT
D
JSR
BGT
SUBX
ADDX
E
Bit-manipulation instructions
BGE
MOV *
EEPMOV
BMI
SUBS
ADDS
B
;;;;
High
BLE
DAS
DAA
F
Table A.2
Operation Code Map
A.3
Number of Execution States
The following describes the operation status in each instruction provided for the H8/300 L CPU,
as well as a calculation of the number of execution states. Table A.4 gives the number of cycles
(as the operation status) for such operations as an instruction fetch, data read/write performed
during an instruction execution. Table A.3 gives the number of execution states required for each
cycle (operation status). The total number of states required for the execution of an instruction can
be calculated by using the following equation:
Execution states = I × S I + J × S J + K × S K + L × S L + M × S M + N × S N
Examples: When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, and an on-chip RAM is accessed.
1. BSET #0, @FF00
From table A.4:
I = L = 2, J = K = M = N= 0
From table A.3:
S I = 2, SL = 2
Number of states required for execution = 2 × 2 + 2 × 2 = 8
When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, branch address is read from on-chip ROM,
and on-chip RAM is used for stack area.
2. JSR @@ 30
From table A.4:
I = 2, J = K = 1,
L=M=N=0
From table A.3:
S I = SJ = SK = 2
Number of states required for execution = 2 × 2 + 1 × 2+ 1 × 2 = 8
299
Table A.3
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction
Access Location
Execution Status
(Instruction Cycle)
On-Chip Memory
On-Chip Peripheral Module
2
—
Instruction fetch
SI
Branch address read
SJ
Stack operation
SK
Byte data access
SL
2 or 3*
Word data access
SM
—
Internal operation
SN
1
1
Note: * Depends on which on-chip module is accessed. See 2.9.1, Notes on Data Access for
details.
300
Table A.4
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
ADD
1
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
ADD.B Rs, Rd
1
ADD.W Rs, Rd
1
ADDS.W #1, Rd
1
ADDS.W #2, Rd
1
ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd
1
ADDX.B Rs, Rd
1
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
1
AND.B Rs, Rd
1
ANDC
ANDC #xx:8, CCR
1
BAND
BAND #xx:3, Rd
1
BAND #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
2
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
2
BHI d:8
2
BLS d:8
2
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
2
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
2
BNE d:8
2
BEQ d:8
2
BVC d:8
2
BVS d:8
2
BPL d:8
2
BMI d:8
2
BGE d:8
2
ADDS
ADDX
AND
Bcc
BCLR
BLT d:8
2
BGT d:8
2
BLE d:8
2
BCLR #xx:3, Rd
1
BCLR #xx:3, @Rd
2
2
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BCLR Rn, Rd
1
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
301
Table A.4
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction (cont)
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
BCLR
BCLR Rn, @Rd
2
2
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
2
2
BIAND #xx:3, Rd
1
BIAND #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 2
1
BIAND
BILD
BIOR
BIST
BIXOR
BLD
BNOT
BOR
BSET
302
BILD #xx:3, Rd
1
BILD #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BIOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BIOR #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BIST #xx:3, Rd
1
BIST #xx:3, @Rd
2
2
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BIXOR #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 2
1
BLD #xx:3, Rd
1
BLD #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BNOT #xx:3, Rd
1
BNOT #xx:3, @Rd
2
2
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BNOT Rn, Rd
1
BNOT Rn, @Rd
2
2
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
2
2
BOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BOR #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BSET #xx:3, Rd
1
BSET #xx:3, @Rd
2
2
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BSET Rn, Rd
1
BSET Rn, @Rd
2
2
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
Table A.4
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction (cont)
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
BSET
BSET Rn, @aa:8
2
BSR
BSR d:8
2
BST
BST #xx:3, Rd
1
BST #xx:3, @Rd
2
2
BST #xx:3, @aa:8 2
2
BTST
BXOR
CMP
BTST #xx:3, Rd
1
1
1
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 2
1
BTST Rn, Rd
1
BTST Rn, @Rd
2
1
BTST Rn, @aa:8
2
1
BXOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BXOR #xx:3, @Rd 2
1
BXOR #xx:3,
@aa:8
1
2
CMP. B #xx:8, Rd 1
1
CMP.W Rs, Rd
1
DAA
DAA.B Rd
1
DAS
DAS.B Rd
1
DEC
DEC.B Rd
1
DIVXU
DIVXU.B Rs, Rd
1
EEPMOV EEPMOV
12
2
INC
INC.B Rd
1
JMP
JMP @Rn
2
JMP @aa:16
2
JMP @@aa:8
2
JSR @Rn
2
JSR @aa:16
2
JSR @@aa:8
2
LDC
2
BTST #xx:3, @Rd 2
CMP. B Rs, Rd
JSR
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
LDC #xx:8, CCR
1
LDC Rs, CCR
1
2n+2*
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
Note: n: Initial value in R4L. The source and destination operands are accessed n + 1 times each.
303
Table A.4
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction (cont)
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
MOV
1
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
MOV.B Rs, Rd
1
MOV.B @Rs, Rd
1
1
MOV.B @(d:16, Rs), 2
Rd
1
MOV.B @Rs+, Rd
1
1
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
1
1
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
2
1
MOV.B Rs, @Rd
1
1
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16,
Rd)
2
1
MOV.B Rs, @–Rd
1
1
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
1
1
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
2
1
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
2
MOV.W Rs, Rd
1
MOV.W @Rs, Rd
1
1
MOV.W @(d:16, Rs), 2
Rd
1
MOV.W @Rs+, Rd
2
2
1
1
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd 2
1
MOV.W Rs, @Rd
1
1
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, 2
Rd)
1
MOV.W Rs, @–Rd
1
1
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 2
1
MULXU
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
1
NEG
NEG.B Rd
1
NOP
NOP
1
NOT
NOT.B Rd
1
OR
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
1
OR.B Rs, Rd
1
ORC
ORC #xx:8, CCR
1
ROTL
ROTL.B Rd
1
ROTR
ROTR.B Rd
1
304
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
2
2
12
Table A.4
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction (cont)
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
ROTXL
ROTXL.B Rd
1
ROTXR
ROTXR.B Rd
1
RTE
RTE
2
2
2
RTS
RTS
2
1
2
SHAL
SHAL.B Rd
1
SHAR
SHAR.B Rd
1
SHLL
SHLL.B Rd
1
SHLR
SHLR.B Rd
1
SLEEP
SLEEP
1
STC
STC CCR, Rd
1
SUB
SUB.B Rs, Rd
1
SUB.W Rs, Rd
1
SUBS.W #1, Rd
1
SUBS.W #2, Rd
1
POP
POP Rd
1
1
2
PUSH
PUSH Rs
1
1
2
SUBX
SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd
1
SUBX.B Rs, Rd
1
XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
1
XOR.B Rs, Rd
1
XORC #xx:8, CCR
1
SUBS
XOR
XORC
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
305
Appendix B On-Chip Registers
B.1
I/O Registers (1)
Address Register
(Low)
Name
Bit 7
Bit Names
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
I/O ports
H'90
H'91
H'92
H'93
H'94
H'95
H'96
H'97
H'98
PMR1
IRQ3
IRQ2
IRQ1
—
TMIG
TMOFH TMOFL
TMOW
H'99
PMR2
IRQ0
—
POF1
NCS
SO1
SI1
SCK1
IRQ4
H'9A
PMR6
—
—
—
—
—
TXD
—
—
H'9B
PMR5
WKP7
WKP6
WKP5
WKP4
WKP3
WKP2
WKP1
WKP0
H'9C
PUCR1
PUCR17 PUCR16 PUCR15 PUCR14 PUCR13 PUCR12 PUCR11 PUCR10
H'9D
PUCR2
PUCR27 PUCR26 PUCR25 PUCR24 PUCR23 PUCR22 PUCR21 PUCR20
H'9E
PUCR5
PUCR57 PUCR56 PUCR55 PUCR54 PUCR53 PUCR52 PUCR51 PUCR50
H'9F
PUCR6
PUCR67 PUCR66 PUCR65 PUCR64 PUCR63 PUCR62 PUCR61 PUCR60
H'A0
SCR1
SNC1
SNC0
—
—
CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
H'A1
SCSR1
—
SOL
ORER
—
—
—
—
STF
H'A2
SDRU
SDRU7
SDRU6
SDRU5
SDRU4
SDRU3
SDRU2
SDRU1
SDRU0
H'A3
SDRL
SDRL7
SDRL6
SDRL5
SDRL4
SDRL3
SDRL2
SDRL1
SDRL0
H'A8
SMR
COM
CHR
PE
PM
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
H'A9
BRR
BRR7
BRR6
BRR5
BRR4
BRR3
BRR2
BRR1
BRR0
H'AA
SCR3
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
SCI1
H'A4
H'A5
H'A6
H'A7
Legend:
SCI1: Serial communication interface 1
SCI3: Serial communication interface 3
306
SCI3
Bit Names
Address Register
(Low)
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
H'AB
TDR
TDR7
TDR6
TDR5
TDR4
TDR3
TDR2
TDR1
TDR0
SCI3
H'AC
SSR
TDRE
RDRF
OER
FER
PER
TEND
MPBR
MPBT
H'AD
RDR
RDR7
RDR6
RDR5
RDR4
RDR3
RDR2
RDR1
RDR0
H'B0
TMA
TMA7
TMA6
TMA5
—
TMA3
TMA2
TMA1
TMA0
H'B1
TCA
TCA7
TCA6
TCA5
TCA4
TCA3
TCA2
TCA1
TCA0
H'B2
DTCR
DTEN
—
CLOE
RWOE
CLF1
CLF0
RWF1
RWF0
H'B3
DTLR
—
—
—
DTL4
DTL3
DTL2
DTL1
DTL0
DTMF
generator
H'B6
TCRF
TOLH
CKSH2
CKSH1
CKSH0
TOLL
CKSL2
CKSL1
CKSL0
Timer F
H'B7
TCSRF
OVFH
CMFH
OVIEH
CCLRH
OVFL
CMFL
OVIEL
CCLRL
H'B8
TCFH
TCFH7
TCFH6
TCFH5
TCFH4
TCFH3
TCFH2
TCFH1
TCFH0
H'B9
TCFL
TCFL7
TCFL6
TCFL5
TCFL4
TCFL3
TCFL2
TCFL1
TCFL0
H'BA
OCRFH
OCRFH7 OCRFH6 OCRFH5 OCRFH4 OCRFH3 OCRFH2 OCRFH1 OCRFH0
H'BB
OCRFL
OCRFL7 OCRFL6 OCRFL5 OCRFL4 OCRFL3 OCRFL2 OCRFL1 OCRFL0
H'BC
TMG
OVFH
H'BD
ICRGF
ICRGF7 ICRGF6 ICRGF5 ICRGF4 ICRGF3 ICRGF2 ICRGF1 ICRGF0
H'BE
ICRGR
ICRGR7 ICRGR6 ICRGR5 ICRGR4 ICRGR3 ICRGR2 ICRGR1 ICRGR0
H'C4
AMR
CKS
TRGE
CKS1
—
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
H'C5
ADRR
ADR7
ADR6
ADR5
ADR4
ADR3
ADR2
ADR1
ADR0
H'C6
ADSR
ADSF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'AE
H'AF
Timer A
H'B4
H'B5
OVFL
OVIE
IIEGS
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS1
CKS0
Timer G
H'BF
H'C0
H'C1
H'C2
H'C3
A/D
converter
H'C7
H'C8
H'C9
H'CA
H'CB
H'CC
307
Address Register
(Low)
Name
Bit 7
Bit Names
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
H'CD
H'CE
H'CF
H'D0
H'D1
H'D2
H'D3
I/O ports
H'D4
PDR1
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
H'D5
PDR2
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
H'D8
PDR5
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
H'D9
PDR6
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
H'DA
PDR7
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
H'DB
PDR8
P87
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
H'DD
PDRA
—
—
—
—
PA 3
PA 2
PA 1
—
H'DE
PDRB
PB 7
PB 6
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'D6
H'D7
I/O ports
H'DC
H'DF
H'E0
H'E1
H'E2
H'E3
I/O ports
H'E4
PCR1
PCR17
PCR16
PCR15
PCR14
PCR13
PCR12
PCR11
PCR10
H'E5
PCR2
PCR27
PCR26
PCR25
PCR24
PCR23
PCR22
PCR21
PCR20
H'E8
PCR5
PCR57
PCR56
PCR55
PCR54
PCR53
PCR52
PCR51
PCR50
H'E9
PCR6
PCR67
PCR66
PCR65
PCR64
PCR63
PCR62
PCR61
PCR60
H'EA
PCR7
PCR77
PCR76
PCR75
PCR74
PCR73
PCR72
PCR71
PCR70
H'EB
PCR8
PCR87
PCR86
PCR85
PCR84
PCR83
PCR82
PCR81
PCR80
PCRA
—
—
—
—
PCRA3
PCRA2
PCRA1
—
H'E6
H'E7
H'EC
H'ED
308
I/O ports
Address Register
(Low)
Name
Bit 7
Bit Names
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
H'EE
H'EF
H'F0
SYSCR1 SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
LSON
—
—
—
H'F1
SYSCR2 —
—
—
NESEL
DTON
MSON
SA1
SA0
H'F2
IEGR
—
—
—
IEG4
IEG3
IEG2
IEG1
IEG0
H'F3
IENR1
IENTA
IENS1
IENWP
IEN4
IEN3
IEN2
IEN1
IEN0
H'F4
IENR2
IENDT
IENAD
—
IENTG
IENTFH IENTFL
—
—
H'F6
IRR1
IRRTA
IRRS1
—
IRRI4
IRRI3
IRRI1
IRRI0
H'F7
IRR2
IRRDT
IRRAD
—
IRRTG
IRRTFH IRRTFL
—
—
IWPR
IWPF7
IWPF6
IWPF5
IWPF4
IWPF3
IWPF1
IWPF0
System
control
H'F5
IRRI2
System
control
H'F8
H'F9
IWPF2
System
control
H'FA
H'FB
H'FC
H'FD
H'FE
H'FF
309
B.2
I/O Registers (2)
Register
acronym
Register
name
Address to which the
register is mapped
Name of
on-chip
supporting
module
Multitone generator
MTCR—Multitone control register H'90
Bit
numbers
Bit
Initial bit
values
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DA0E
MTEN
DIR
—
FR1
FR0
FT1
FT0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Names of the
bits. Dashes
(—) indicate
reserved bits.
Possible types of access
R
Read only
W
Write only
R/W Read and write
Fine-tuning counter clock source select
FT1
0
0
1
1
FT0
0
1
0
1
Clock Division Ratio
1tOSC (counter clock = fOSC)
2tOSC (counter clock = fOSC/2)
4tOSC (counter clock = fOSC/4)
8tOSC (counter clock = fOSC/8)
Frame counter clock source select
FR1 FR0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
310
Clock Division Ratio
1tOSC (counter clock = fOSC)
2tOSC (counter clock = fOSC/2)
4tOSC (counter clock = fOSC/4)
8tOSC (counter clock = fOSC/8)
Full name
of bit
Descriptions
of bit settings
PMR1—Port mode register 1
Bit
H'98
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ3
IRQ2
IRQ1
—
TMIG
TMOFH
TMOFL
TMOW
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P10 /TMOW pin function switch
0 Functions as P10 I/O pin
1 Functions as TMOW output pin
P11 /TMOFL pin function switch
0 Functions as P11 I/O pin
1 Functions as TMOFL output pin
P12 /TMOFH pin function switch
0 Functions as P12 I/O pin
1 Functions as TMOFH output pin
P13 /TMIG pin function switch
0 Functions as P13 I/O pin
1 Functions as TMIG input pin
P15 /IRQ 1 pin function switch
0 Functions as P15 I/O pin
1 Functions as IRQ 1 input pin
P16 /IRQ 2 pin function switch
0 Functions as P16 I/O pin
1 Functions as IRQ 2 input pin
P17 /IRQ 3 /TMIF pin function switch
0 Functions as P17 I/O pin
1 Functions as IRQ 3 /TMIF input pin
311
PMR2—Port mode register 2
Bit
H'99
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ0
—
POF1
NCS
SO1
SI1
SCK1
IRQ4
Initial value
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P20 /IRQ 4 /ADTRG pin function switch
0 Functions as P20 I/O pin
1 Functions as IRQ 4 /ADTRG input pin
P21 /SCK 1 pin function switch
0 Functions as P21 I/O pin
1 Functions as SCK 1 I/O pin
P22 /SI 1 pin function switch
0 Functions as P2 2 I/O pin
1 Functions as SI 1 input pin
P23 /SO 1 pin function switch
0 Functions as P2 3 I/O pin
1 Functions as SO 1 output pin
TMIG noise canceller select
0 Noise canceller function not selected
1 Noise canceller function selected
P23 /SO 1 pin PMOS control
0 CMOS output
1 NMOS open drain output
P27 /IRQ 0 pin function switch
0 Functions as P27 input pin
1 Functions as IRQ 0 input pin
312
PMR6—Port mode register 6
Bit
H'9A
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
TXD
—
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
P26/TXD pin function switch
0 Functions as P26 I/O pin
1 Functions as TXD output pin
PMR5—Port mode register 5
Bit
H'9B
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WKP 7
WKP 6
WKP 5
WKP 4
WKP 3
WKP 2
WKP 1
WKP 0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P5n /WKPn pin function switch
0 Functions as P5 n I/O pin
1 Functions as WKPn input pin
PUCR1—Port pull-up control register 1
Bit
7
6
5
(n = 7 to 0)
H'9C
4
3
I/O ports
2
1
0
PUCR17 PUCR16 PUCR15 PUCR14 PUCR13 PUCR12 PUCR11 PUCR10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PUCR2—Port pull-up control register 2
Bit
7
6
5
PUCR27 PUCR26 PUCR5
H'9D
I/O ports
4
3
2
1
0
PUCR4
PUCR3
PUCR2
PUCR1
PUCR0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
313
PUCR5—Port pull-up control register 5
Bit
7
6
5
H'9E
4
3
I/O ports
2
1
0
PUCR57 PUCR56 PUCR55 PUCR54 PUCR53 PUCR52 PUCR51 PUCR50
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PUCR6—Port pull-up control register 6
Bit
7
6
5
H'9F
4
3
I/O ports
2
1
0
PUCR67 PUCR66 PUCR65 PUCR64 PUCR63 PUCR62 PUCR61 PUCR60
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
314
SCR1—Serial control register 1
Bit
H'A0
SCI1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SNC1
SNC0
—
—
CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock select
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
CKS2 CKS1 CKS0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Transfer Clock Cycle
Synchronous
Prescaler
Division
ø = 5 MHz
ø = 2.5 MHz
204.8 µs
409.6 µs
ø/1024
51.2 µs
102.4 µs
ø/256
12.8 µs
25.6 µs
ø/64
6.4 µs
12.8 µs
ø/32
3.2 µs
6.4 µs
ø/16
1.6 µs
3.2 µs
ø/8
0.8 µs
1.6 µs
ø/4
—
0.8 µs
ø/2
Clock source select
0 Clock source is prescaler S, and pin SCK 1 is output pin
1 Clock source is external clock, and pin SCK 1 is input pin
Operation mode select
0 0 8-bit synchronous mode
1 16-bit synchronous mode
1 0 Continuous clock output mode
1 Reserved
315
SCSR1—Serial control/status register 1
Bit
H'A1
SCI1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
SOL
ORER
—
—
—
—
STF
Initial value
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
Read/Write
—
R/W
R/(W)*
—
—
—
R
R/W
Start flag
0 Read
Write
1 Read
Write
Indicates that transfer is stopped
Invalid
Indicates transfer in progress
Starts a transfer operation
Overrun error flag
0 [Clearing condition]
After reading 1, cleared by writing 0
1 [Setting condition]
Set if a clock pulse is input after transfer
is complete, when an external clock is used
Extended data bit
0 Read SO1 pin output level is low
Write SO1 pin output level changes to low
1 Read SO1 pin output level is high
Write SO1 pin output level changes to high
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
SDRU—Serial data register U
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
H'A2
SCI1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SDRU7
SDRU6
SDRU5
SDRU4
SDRU3
SDRU2
SDRU1
SDRU0
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Stores transmit and receive data
8-bit transfer mode: Not used
16-bit transfer mode: Upper 8 bits of data
316
R/W
SDRL—Serial data register L
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
H'A3
SCI1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SDRL7
SDRL6
SDRL5
SDRL4
SDRL3
SDRL2
SDRL1
SDRL0
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Stores transmit and receive data
8-bit transfer mode: 8-bit data
16-bit transfer mode: Lower 8 bits of data
SMR—Serial mode register
Bit
H'A8
SCI3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
COM
CHR
PE
PM
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Multiprocessor mode
0 Multiprocessor communication function disabled
1 Multiprocessor communication function enabled
Clock select 0, 1
0 0 ø clock
1 ø/4 clock
1 0 ø/16 clock
1 ø/64 clock
Stop bit length
0 1 stop bit
1 2 stop bits
Parity mode
0 Even parity
1 Odd parity
Parity enable
0 Parity bit adding and checking disabled
1 Parity bit adding and checking enabled
Character length
0 8-bit data
1 7-bit data
Communication mode
0 Asynchronous mode
1 Synchronous mode
317
BRR—Bit rate register
Bit
H'A9
SCI3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BRR7
BRR6
BRR5
BRR4
BRR3
BRR2
BRR1
BRR0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
318
SCR3—Serial control register 3
Bit
H'AA
SCI3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock enable
Bit 1
CKE1
0
Bit 0
CKE0
0
1
1
0
1
Communication Mode
Asynchronous
Synchronous
Asynchronous
Synchronous
Asynchronous
Synchronous
Asynchronous
Synchronous
Description
Clock Source
Internal clock
Internal clock
Internal clock
Reserved
External clock
External clock
Reserved
Reserved
SCK 3 Pin Function
I/O port
Serial clock output
Clock output
Reserved
Clock output
Serial clock input
Reserved
Reserved
Transmit end interrupt enable
0
1
Transmit end interrupt (TEI) disabled
Transmit end interrupt (TEI) enabled
Multiprocessor interrupt enable
0
Multiprocessor interrupt request disabled (ordinary receive operation)
[Clearing condition]
Multiprocessor bit receives a data value of 1
1
Multiprocessor interrupt request enabled
Until a multiprocessor bit value of 1 is received, the receive data full interrupt (RXI) and receive
error interrupt (ERI) are disabled, and serial status register (SSR) flags RDRF, FER, and
OER are not set.
Receive enable
0
1
Receive operation disabled (RXD is a general I/O port)
Receive operation enabled (RXD is the receive data pin)
Transmit enable
0
1
Transmit operation disabled (TXD is the transmit data pin)
Transmit operation enabled (TXD is the transmit data pin)
Receive interrupt enable
0
1
Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) and receive error interrupt request (ERI) disabled
Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) and receive error interrupt request (ERI) enabled
Transmit interrupt enable
0
1
Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) disabled
Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) enabled
319
TDR—Transmit data register
Bit
H'AB
SCI3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDR7
TDR6
TDR5
TDR4
TDR3
TDR2
TDR1
TDR0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Data to be transferred to TSR
320
SSR—Serial status register
Bit
H'AC
SCI3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
OER
FER
PER
TEND
MPBR
MPBT
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Multiprocessor bit receive
0 Indicates reception of data in which the multiprocessor bit is 0
1 Indicates reception of data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1
Multiprocessor bit transmit
0 The multiprocessor bit in transmit data is 0
1 The multiprocessor bit in transmit data is 1
Transmit end
0 Indicates that transmission is in progress
[Clearing conditions] • After reading TDRE = 1, cleared by writing 0 to TDRE.
• When data is written to TDR by an instruction.
1 Indicates that a transmission has ended
[Setting conditions]
• When bit TE in serial control register 3 (SCR3) is 0.
• If TDRE is set to 1 when the last bit of a transmitted character is sent.
Parity error
0 Indicates that data receiving is in progress or has been completed
[Clearing conditions] After reading PER = 1, cleared by writing 0
1 Indicates that a parity error occurred in data receiving
[Setting conditions]
When the sum of 1s in received data plus the parity bit does not match
the parity mode bit (PM) setting in the serial mode register (SMR)
Framing error
0 Indicates that data receiving is in progress or has been completed
[Clearing conditions] After reading FER = 1, cleared by writing 0
1 Indicates that a framing error occurred in data receiving
[Setting conditions]
The stop bit at the end of receive data is checked and found to be 0
Overrun error
0 Indicates that data receiving is in progress or has been completed
[Clearing conditions] After reading OER = 1, cleared by writing 0
1 Indicates that an overrun error occurred in data receiving
[Setting conditions]
When data receiving is completed while RDRF is set to 1
Receive data register full
0 Indicates there is no receive data in RDR
[Clearing conditions] • After reading RDRF = 1, cleared by writing 0.
• When data is read from RDR by an instruction.
1 Indicates that there is receive data in RDR
[Setting conditions]
When receiving ends normally, with receive data transferred from RSR to RDR
Transmit data register empty
0 Indicates that transmit data written to TDR has not been transferred to TSR
[Clearing conditions] • After reading TDRE = 1, cleared by writing 0.
• When data is written to TDR by an instruction.
1 Indicates that no transmit data has been written to TDR, or the transmit data written to TDR has been transferred to TSR
[Setting conditions]
• When bit TE in serial control register 3 (SCR3) is 0.
• When data is transferred from TDR to TSR.
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
321
RDR—Receive data register
Bit
H'AD
SCI3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RDR7
RDR6
RDR5
RDR4
RDR3
RDR2
RDR1
RDR0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TMA—Timer mode register A
Bit
H'B0
Timer A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TMA7
TMA6
TMA5
—
TMA3
TMA2
TMA1
TMA0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock output select
0 0 0 ø/32
1 ø/16
1 0 ø/8
1 ø/4
1 0 0 ø W /32
1 ø W /16
1 0 ø W /8
1 ø W /4
322
Internal clock select
Prescaler and Divider Ratio
TMA3 TMA2 TMA1 TMA0 or Overflow Period
0
0
0
ø/8192
0
PSS
1
ø/4096
PSS
ø/2048
PSS
1
0
ø/512
PSS
1
1
0
0
ø/256
PSS
1
ø/128
PSS
ø/32
1
0
PSS
ø/8
1
PSS
0
0
0
1s
1
PSW
1
0.5 s
PSW
0.25 s
1
0
PSW
0.03125 s
1
PSW
1
0
0
PSW and TCA are reset
1
1
0
1
Function
Interval
timer
Time
base
TCA—Timer counter A
Bit
H'B1
Timer A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCA7
TCA6
TCA5
TCA4
TCA3
TCA2
TCA1
TCA0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Count value
323
DTCR—DTMF control register
Bit
H'B2
DTMF generator
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTEN
—
CLOE
RWOE
CLF1
CLF0
RWF1
RWF0
Initial value
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DTMF row signal output frequency 1 and 0
RWF1 RWF0
0
0
1
1
0
1
DTMF row signal output frequency
697 Hz (R1)
770 Hz (R2)
852 Hz (R3)
941 Hz (R4)
DTMF column signal output frequency 1 and 0
CLF1 CLF0 DTMF column signal output frequency
1209 Hz (C1)
0
0
1336 Hz (C2)
1
1447 Hz (C3)
0
1
1633 Hz (C4)
1
Row output enable
0 DTMF row signal output is disabled (high-impedance)
1 DTMF row signal output is enabled
Column output enable
0 DTMF column signal output is disabled (high-impedance)
1 DTMF column signal output is enabled
DTMF generator enable
0 DTMF generator is halted
1 DTMF generator operates
324
DTLR—DTMF load register
Bit
H'B3
DTMF generator
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
DTL4
DTL3
DTL2
DTL1
DTL0
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
OSC clock division ratio 4 to 0
DTL4 DTL3 DTL2 DTL1 DTL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
Division Ratio
Illegal setting
Illegal setting
Illegal setting
3
4
…
…
…
…
…
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
*
1
*
*
25
Illegal setting
Illegal setting
1.2 MHz
1.6 MHz
…
…
1
1
1
OSC Clock Frequency
(initial value)
10 MHz
Note: * Don’t care
325
TCRF—Timer control register F
Bit
H'B6
Timer F
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TOLH
CKSH2
CKSH1
CKSH0
TOLL
CKSL2
CKSL1
CKSL0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Toggle output level H
0 Low level
1 High level
Clock select L
0 * * External event (TMIF): Rising or falling edge
1 0 0 Internal clock: ø/32
1 Internal clock: ø/16
1 0 Internal clock: ø/4
1 Internal clock: ø/2
Toggle output level L
0 Low level
1 High level
Clock select H
0 * * 16-bit mode selected. TCFL overflow signals are counted.
1 0 0 Internal clock: ø/32
1 Internal clock: ø/16
1 0 Internal clock: ø/4
1 Internal clock: ø/2
Note: * Don’t care
326
TCSRF—Timer control/status register F
Bit
H'B7
Timer F
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVFH
CMFH
OVIEH
CCLRH
OVFL
CMFL
OVIEL
CCLRL
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)
R/(W)
R/W
R/W
R/(W)
R/(W)
R/W
R/W
Timer overflow interrupt enable L
0 TCFL overflow interrupt disabled
1 TCFL overflow interrupt enabled
Compare match flag L
0 [Clearing condition]
After reading CMFL = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFL
1 [Setting condition]
When the TCFL value matches the OCRFL value
Timer overflow flag L
0 [Clearing condition]
After reading OVFL = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVFL
1 [Setting condition]
When the value of TCFL goes from H'FF to H'00
Counter clear H
0 16-bit mode:
8-bit mode:
1 16-bit mode:
8-bit mode:
TCF clearing by compare match disabled
TCFH clearing by compare match disabled
TCF clearing by compare match enabled
TCFH clearing by compare match enabled
Timer overflow interrupt enable H
0 TCFH overflow interrupt disabled
1 TCFH overflow interrupt enabled
Counter clear L
0 TCFL clearing by compare match disabled
1 TCFL clearing by compare match enabled
Compare match flag H
0 [Clearing condition]
After reading CMFH = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFH
1 [Setting condition]
When the TCFH value matches the OCRFH value
Timer overflow flag H
0 [Clearing condition]
After reading OVFH = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVFH
1 [Setting condition]
When the value of TCFH goes from H'FF to H'00
327
TCFH—8-bit timer counter FH
Bit
H'B8
Timer F
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCFH7
TCFH6
TCFH5
TCFH4
TCFH3
TCFH2
TCFH1
TCFH0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
TCFL—8-bit timer counter FL
Bit
H'B9
Timer F
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCFL7
TCFL6
TCFL5
TCFL4
TCFL3
TCFL2
TCFL1
TCFL0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
OCRFH—Output compare register FH
Bit
7
6
5
H'BA
4
3
Timer F
2
1
0
OCRFH7 OCRFH6 OCRFH5 OCRFH4 OCRFH3 OCRFH2 OCRFH1 OCRFH0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
OCRFL—Output compare register FL
Bit
7
6
5
H'BB
4
3
Timer F
2
1
0
OCRFL7 OCRFL6 OCRFL5 OCRFL4 OCRFL3 OCRFL2 OCRFL1 OCRFL0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
328
TMG—Timer mode register G
Bit
H'BC
Timer G
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVFH
OVFL
OVIE
IIEGS
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock select
0 0 Internal clock:
1 Internal clock:
1 0 Internal clock:
1 Internal clock:
Counter clear
0 0 TCG is not cleared
1 TCG is cleared at the falling edge of the input capture signal
1 0 TCG is cleared at the rising edge of the input capture signal
1 TCG is cleared at both edges of the input capture signal
ø/64
ø/32
ø/2
ø W /2
Input capture interrupt edge select
0 Interrupts are requested at the rising edge of the input capture signal
1 Interrupts are requested at the falling edge of the input capture signal
Timer overflow interrupt enable
0 TCG overflow interrupt disabled
1 TCG overflow interrupt enabled
Timer overflow flag L
0 [Clearing condition]
After reading OVFL = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVFL
1 [Setting condition]
When the value of TCG overflows from H'FF to H'00
Timer overflow flag H
0 [Clearing condition]
After reading OVFH = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVFH
1 [Setting condition]
When the value of TCG overflows from H'FF to H'00
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
329
ICRGF—Input capture register GF
Bit
7
6
H'BD
5
4
3
Timer G
2
1
0
ICRGF7 ICRGF6 ICRGF5 ICRGF4 ICRGF3 ICRGF2 ICRGF1 ICRGF0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ICRGR—Input capture register GR
Bit
7
6
H'BE
5
4
3
Timer G
2
1
0
ICRGR7 ICRGR6 ICRGR5 ICRGR4 ICRGR3 ICRGR2 ICRGR1 ICRGR0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
330
AMR—A/D mode register
Bit
H'C4
A/D converter
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CKS
TRGE
CKS1
—
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channel select
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
CH3 CH2 CH1
0
0
*
1
*
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
CH0
*
*
*
0
1
*
*
Analog input channel
No channel selected
Reserved
Reserved
AN 6
AN 7
Reserved
* Don’t care
External trigger select
0 Disables start of A/D conversion by external trigger
1 Enables start of A/D conversion by rising or falling edge
of external trigger at pin ADTRG
Clock select
Bit 7 Bit 5
CKS CKS1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
Conversion Period
Reserved
124/ø
62/ø
31/ø
Conversion Time
ø = 2 MHz ø = 5 MHz
—
62 µs
31 µs
15.5 µs
—
24.8 µs
12.4 µs
—*
Note: * Operation is not guaranteed if the conversion time is less than 12.4 µs.
Set bits 5 and 7 for a value of at least 12.4 µs.
ADRR—A/D result register
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
H'C5
A/D converter
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADR7
ADR6
ADR5
ADR4
ADR3
ADR2
ADR1
ADR0
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
A/D conversion result
331
ADSR—A/D start register
Bit
H'C6
A/D converter
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADSF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A/D start flag
0 [Read]
Indicates the completion of A/D conversion
[Write]
Stops A/D conversion
1 [Read]
Indicates A/D conversion in progress
[Write]
Starts A/D conversion
PDR1—Port data register 1
Bit
H'D4
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR2—Port data register 2
Bit
H'D5
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR5—Port data register 5
Bit
H'D8
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P5 7
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
332
PDR6—Port data register 6
Bit
H'D9
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P6 7
P66
P6 5
P64
P6 3
P6 2
P6 1
P6 0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR7—Port data register 7
Bit
H'DA
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7 7
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR8—Port data register 8
Bit
H'DB
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P8 7
P86
P8 5
P84
P8 3
P8 2
P8 1
P8 0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDRA—Port data register A
Bit
H'DD
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
PA3
PA 2
PA 1
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
PDRB—Port data register B
Bit
H'DE
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB 7
PB 6
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
Read/Write
333
PCR1—Port control register 1
Bit
H'E4
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR17
PCR16
PCR15
PCR14
PCR13
PCR12
PCR11
PCR10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 1 input/output select
0 Input pin
1 Output pin
PCR2—Port control register 2
Bit
H'E5
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR27
PCR26
PCR25
PCR24
PCR23
PCR22
PCR21
PCR20
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 2 input/output select
0 Input pin
1 Output pin
Note: As P27 is an input-only pin, it becomes a high-impedance output when PCR27 is set to 1.
PCR5—Port control register 5
Bit
H'E8
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR57
PCR56
PCR55
PCR54
PCR53
PCR52
PCR51
PCR50
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 5 input/output select
0 Input pin
1 Output pin
334
PCR6—Port control register 6
Bit
H'E9
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR67
PCR66
PCR65
PCR64
PCR63
PCR62
PCR61
PCR60
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 6 input/output select
0 Input pin
1 Output pin
PCR7—Port control register 7
Bit
H'EA
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR77
PCR76
PCR75
PCR74
PCR73
PCR72
PCR71
PCR70
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 7 input/output select
0 Input pin
1 Output pin
PCR8—Port control register 8
Bit
H'EB
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR87
PCR86
PCR85
PCR84
PCR83
PCR82
PCR81
PCR80
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 8 input/output select
0 Input pin
1 Output pin
335
PCRA—Port control register A
Bit
H'ED
I/O ports
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
PCRA 3
PCRA 2
PCRA 1
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
W
W
W
—
Port A input/output select
0 Input pin
1 Output pin
SYSCR1—System control register 1
Bit
H'F0
System control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
LSON
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
Low speed on flag
0 The CPU operates on the system clock (ø)
1 The CPU operates on the subclock (øSUB )
Standby timer select 2 to 0
0 0 0 Wait time = 8,192 states
1 Wait time = 16,384 states
1 0 Wait time = 32,768 states
1 Wait time = 65,536 states
1 * * Wait time = 131,072 states
Software standby
0 When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active mode, a transition is
made to sleep mode.
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is
made to subsleep mode.
1 When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active mode, a transition is
made to standby mode or watch mode.
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is
made to watch mode.
Note: * Don’t care
336
SYSCR2—System control register 2
Bit
H'F1
System control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
NESEL
DTON
MSON
SA1
SA0
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Medium speed on flag
0 Operates in active (high-speed) mode
1 Operates in active (medium-speed) mode
Subactive mode clock select
0 0 ø W /8
1 ø W /4
1 * ø W /2
Direct transfer on flag
0 When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active mode, a transition is
made to standby mode, watch mode, or sleep mode.
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is
made to watch mode or subsleep mode.
1 When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode, a direct
transition is made to active (medium-speed) mode if SSBY = 0, MSON = 1, and
LSON = 0, or to subactive mode if SSBY = 1, TMA3 = 1, and LSON = 1.
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed) mode, a direct
transition is made to active (high-speed) mode if SSBY = 0, MSON = 0, and
LSON = 0, or to subactive mode if SSBY = 1, TMA3 = 1, and LSON = 1.
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a direct
transition is made to active (high-speed) mode if SSBY = 1, TMA3 = 1, LSON = 0,
and MSON = 0, or to active (medium-speed) mode if SSBY = 1, TMA3 = 1,
LSON = 0, and MSON = 1.
Noise elimination sampling frequency select
0 Sampling rate is øOSC /16
1 Sampling rate is øOSC /4
Note: * Don’t care
337
IEGR—IRQ edge select register
Bit
H'F2
System control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
IEG4
IEG3
IEG2
IEG1
IEG0
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ 0 edge select
0 Falling edge of IRQ 0 pin input is detected
1 Rising edge of IRQ 0 pin input is detected
IRQ 1 edge select
0 Falling edge of IRQ 1 pin input is detected
1 Rising edge of IRQ 1 pin input is detected
IRQ 2 edge select
0 Falling edge of IRQ 2 pin input is detected
1 Rising edge of IRQ 2 pin input is detected
IRQ 3 edge select
0 Falling edge of IRQ 3 /TMIF pin input is detected
1 Rising edge of IRQ 3 /TMIF pin input is detected
IRQ 4 edge select
0 Falling edge of IRQ 4 /ADTRG pin input is detected
1 Rising edge of IRQ 4 /ADTRG pin input is detected
338
IENR1—Interrupt enable register 1
Bit
H'F3
System control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IENTA
IENS1
IENWP
IEN4
IEN3
IEN2
IEN1
IEN0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ 4 to IRQ 0 interrupt enable
0 Disables interrupt requests from IRQ 4 to IRQ 0
1 Enables interrupt requests from IRQ 4 to IRQ 0
Wakeup interrupt enable
0 Disables interrupt requests from WKP7 to WKP0
1 Enables interrupt requests from WKP7 to WKP0
SCI1 interrupt enable
0 Disables SCI1 interrupts
1 Enables SCI1 interrupts
Timer A interrupt enable
0 Disables timer A interrupts
1 Enables timer A interrupts
339
IENR2—Interrupt enable register 2
Bit
H'F4
7
6
5
4
IENDT
IENAD
—
IENTG
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
3
System control
1
0
—
—
0
0
1
R/W
—
—
2
IENTFH IENTFL
Timer FL interrupt enable
0 Disables timer FL interrupts
1 Enables timer FL interrupts
Timer FH interrupt enable
0 Disables timer FH interrupts
1 Enables timer FH interrupts
Timer G interrupt enable
0 Disables timer G interrupts
1 Enables timer G interrupts
A/D converter interrupt enable
0 Disables A/D converter interrupt requests
1 Enables A/D converter interrupt requests
Direct transfer interrupt enable
0 Disables direct transfer interrupt requests
1 Enables direct transfer interrupt requests
340
IRR1—Interrupt request register 1
Bit
H'F6
System control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRRTA
IRRS1
—
IRRI4
IRRI3
IRRI2
IRRI1
IRRI0
Initial value
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W *
R/W *
—
R/W *
R/W *
R/W *
R/W *
R/W *
IRQ 4 to IRQ 0 interrupt request flag
0 [Clearing condition]
When IRRIn = 1, it is cleared by writing 0 to IRRIn.
1 [Setting condition]
When pin IRQ n is set to interrupt input and the designated signal edge is
detected.
SCI1 interrupt request flag
0 [Clearing condition]
When IRRS1 = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1 [Setting condition]
When an SCI1 transfer is completed
(n = 4 to 0)
Timer A interrupt request flag
0 [Clearing condition]
When IRRTA = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1 [Setting condition]
When the timer A counter overflows from H'FF to H'00
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
341
IRR2—Interrupt request register 2
Bit
H'F7
7
6
5
4
IRRDT
IRRAD
—
IRRTG
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W *
R/W *
—
R/W *
R/W *
System control
3
1
0
—
—
0
0
1
R/W *
—
—
2
IRRTFH IRRTFL
Timer FL interrupt request flag
0 [Clearing condition]
When IRRTFL = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1 [Setting condition]
When TCFL matches in 8-bit mode
Timer FH interrupt request flag
0 [Clearing condition]
When IRRTFH = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1 [Setting condition]
When counter FH matches output compare register
FH in 8-bit mode, or when 16-bit counter F (TCFL,
TCFH) matches 16-bit output compare register F
(OCRFL, OCRFH) in 16-bit mode
Timer G interrupt request flag
0 [Clearing condition]
When IRRTG = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1 [Setting condition]
When pin TMIG is set to TMIG input and the designated signal edge is detected
A/D converter interrupt request flag
0 [Clearing condition]
When IRRAD = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1 [Setting condition]
When A/D conversion is completed and ADSF is reset
Direct transfer interrupt request flag
0 [Clearing condition]
When IRRDT = 1, it is cleared by writing 0
1 [Setting condition]
A SLEEP instruction is executed when DTON = 1 and a direct transfer is made
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
342
IWPR—Wakeup interrupt request register
Bit
H'F9
System control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IWPF7
IWPF6
IWPF5
IWPF4
IWPF3
IWPF2
IWPF1
IWPF0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W *
R/W *
R/W *
R/W *
R/W *
R/W *
R/W *
R/W *
Wakeup interrupt request flag
0 [Clearing condition]
When IWPFn = 1, it is cleared by writing 0.
1 [Setting condition]
When pin WKPn is set to interrupt input and a falling signal edge is detected.
(n = 7 to 0)
Note: * Only a write of 0 for flag clearing is possible.
343
Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams
C.1
Port 1 Block Diagrams
SBY (low level during reset
and in standby mode)
Internal
data bus
PUCR17
VCC
VCC
PMR17
P17
PDR17
VSS
PCR17
Timer F module
TMIF
IRQ3
PDR1:
PCR1:
PMR1:
PUCR1:
Port data register 1
Port control register 1
Port mode register 1
Port pull-up control register 1
Figure C.1 (a) Port 1 Block Diagram (Pin P1 7)
344
SBY (low level during reset
and in standby mode)
Internal
data bus
PUCR16
VCC
VCC
PMR16
P16
PDR16
VSS
PCR16
IRQ2
PDR1:
PCR1:
PMR1:
PUCR1:
Port data register 1
Port control register 1
Port mode register 1
Port pull-up control register 1
Figure C.1 (b) Port 1 Block Diagram (Pin P16)
345
SBY (low level during reset
and in standby mode)
Internal
data bus
PUCR15
VCC
VCC
PMR15
P15
PDR15
VSS
PCR15
IRQ1
PDR1:
PCR1:
PMR1:
PUCR1:
Port data register 1
Port control register 1
Port mode register 1
Port pull-up control register 1
Figure C.1 (c) Port 1 Block Diagram (Pin P15)
346
SBY
Internal
data bus
PUCR14
VCC
VCC
P14
PDR14
VSS
PCR14
PDR1: Port data register 1
PCR1: Port control register 1
PUCR1: Port pull-up control register 1
Figure C.1 (d) Port 1 Block Diagram (Pin P14)
347
SBY
Internal
data bus
PUCR13
VCC
VCC
PMR13
P13
PDR13
VSS
PCR13
Timer G module
TMIG
PDR1:
PCR1:
PMR1:
PUCR1:
Port data register 1
Port control register 1
Port mode register 1
Port pull-up control register 1
Figure C.1 (e) Port 1 Block Diagram (Pin P13)
348
Timer F module
TMOFH (P12)
TMOFL (P11)
SBY
Internal
data bus
PUCR1n
VCC
VCC
PMR1n
P1n
PDR1n
VSS
PDR1:
PCR1:
PMR1:
PUCR1:
PCR1n
Port data register 1
Port control register 1
Port mode register 1
Port pull-up control register 1
n = 2, 1
Figure C.1 (f) Port 1 Block Diagram (Pins P12 and P11)
349
Timer A module
TMOW
SBY
Internal
data bus
PUCR10
VCC
VCC
PMR10
P10
PDR10
VSS
PDR1:
PCR1:
PMR1:
PUCR1:
PCR10
Port data register 1
Port control register 1
Port mode register 1
Port pull-up control register 1
Figure C.1 (g) Port 1 Block Diagram (Pin P1 0)
350
C.2
Port 2 Block Diagrams
Internal
data bus
PUCR27
PMR2 7
P2 7
PDR27
PCR27
IRQ 0
PDR2:
PCR2:
PMR2:
PUCR2:
Port data register 2
Port control register 2
Port mode register 2
Port pull-up control register 2
Figure C.2 (a) Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P2 7)
351
SBY
PMR6 2
VCC
SCI3 module
TXD
VCC
PUCR26
P2 6
PDR2 6
Internal
data bus
VSS
PDR2:
PCR2:
PMR6:
PUCR2:
PCR2 6
Port data register 2
Port control register 2
Port mode register 6
Port pull-up control register 2
Figure C.2 (b) Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P26)
352
SBY
SCI3 module
VCC
RE
RXD
VCC
P2 5
PDR2 5
VSS
Internal data bus
PUCR25
PCR2 5
PDR2: Port data register 2
PCR2: Port control register 2
PUCR2: Port pull-up control register 2
Figure C.2 (c) Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P25)
353
SCI3 module
SBY
SCKIE
SCKOE
SCKO
SCKI
PUCR24
VCC
P2 4
PDR2 4
VSS
PCR2 4
PDR2: Port data register 2
PCR2: Port control register 2
PUCR2: Port pull-up control register 2
Figure C.2 (d) Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P24)
354
Internal data bus
VCC
SCI1 module
SO 1
SBY
PMR2 3
Internal
data bus
PUCR2 3
VCC
VCC
PMR2 3
P2 3
PDR2 3
VSS
PCR2 3
PDR2: Port data register 2
PCR2: Port control register 2
PMR2: Port mode register 2
PUCR2: Port pull-up control register 2
Figure C.2 (e) Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P23)
355
SBY
Internal
data bus
PUCR22
VCC
VCC
PMR22
P22
PDR22
VSS
PCR22
SCI module
SI
PDR2:
PCR2:
PMR2:
PUCR2:
Port data register 2
Port control register 2
Port mode register 2
Port pull-up control register 2
Figure C.2 (f) Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P22)
356
SCI module
EXCK
SCKO
SCKI
SBY
PUCR21
VCC
VCC
P2 1
PDR21
VSS
PDR2:
PCR2:
PMR2:
PUCR2:
Internal data bus
PMR2 1
PCR21
Port data register 2
Port control register 2
Port mode register 2
Port pull-up control register 2
Figure C.2 (g) Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P2 1)
357
SBY
Internal
data bus
PUCR2 0
VCC
VCC
PMR2 0
P20
PDR20
VSS
PCR2 0
A/D module
ADTRG
IRQ 4
PDR2:
PCR2:
PMR2:
PUCR2:
Port data register 2
Port control register 2
Port mode register 2
Port pull-up control register 2
Figure C.2 (h) Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P20)
358
C.3
Port 5 Block Diagram
SBY
Internal
data bus
PUCR5n
VCC
VCC
PMR5 n
P5 n
PDR5n
VSS
PCR5n
WKPn
PDR5:
PCR5:
PMR5:
PUCR5:
Port data register 5
Port control register 5
Port mode register 5
Port pull-up control register 5
n = 0 to 7
Figure C.3 Port 5 Block Diagram
359
C.4
Port 6 Block Diagram
SBY
Internal
data bus
PUCR6n
VCC
VCC
P6 n
PDR6n
VSS
PCR6n
PDR6: Port data register 6
PCR6: Port control register 6
PUCR6: Port pull-up control register 6
n = 0 to 7
Figure C.4 Port 6 Block Diagram
360
C.5
Port 7 Block Diagram
SBY
Internal
data bus
VCC
PDR7n
P7n
PCR7n
VSS
PDR7:
PCR7:
Port data register 7
Port control register 7
n = 0 to 7
Figure C.5 Port 7 Block Diagram
361
C.6
Port 8 Block Diagram
SBY
Internal
data bus
VCC
PDR8 n
P8 n
PCR8 n
VSS
PDR8: Port data register 8
PCR8: Port control register 8
n = 0 to 7
Figure C.6 Port 8 Block Diagram
362
C.7
Port A Block Diagram
SBY
Internal
data bus
VCC
PDRA n
PA n
PCRA n
VSS
PDRA: Port data register A
PCRA: Port control register A
n = 1 to 3
Figure C.7 Port A Block Diagram
C.8
Port B Block Diagram
Internal
data bus
PBn
A/D module
DEC
AMR0 to AMR3
V IN
n = 6, 7
Figure C.8 Port B Block Diagram
363
Appendix D Port States in the Different Processing States
Table D.1
Port States Overview
Port
Reset
P17 to P1 0
High
Retained
impedance
Retained
High
Retained
impedance*
Functional Functional
P26 to P2 0
High
Retained
impedance
Retained
High
Retained
impedance*
Functional Functional
P57 to P5 0
High
Retained
impedance
Retained
High
Retained
impedance*
Functional Functional
P67 to P6 0
High
Retained
impedance
Retained
High
Retained
impedance*
Functional Functional
P77 to P7 0
High
Retained
impedance
Retained
High
Retained
impedance
Functional Functional
P87 to P8 0
High
Retained
impedance
Retained
High
Retained
impedance
Functional Functional
PA3 to PA 1 High
Retained
impedance
Retained
High
Retained
impedance
Functional Functional
P27,
PB7, PB6
Sleep
Subsleep Standby
Subactive Active
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
impedance impedance impedance impedance impedance impedance impedance
Note: * High level output when MOS pull-up is in on state.
364
Watch
Appendix E Product Line-Up
Product Type
H8/3627
H8/3626
H8/3625
ZTAT
version
Product Code Mark Code
Standard HD6473627H HD6473627H
products HD6473627FP HD6473627FP
Package
(Hitachi Package Code)
64-pin QFP (FP-64A)
64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)
Mask ROM Standard HD6433627H HD6433627(***)H
version
products HD6433627FP HD6433627(***)FP
64-pin QFP (FP-64A)
Mask ROM Standard HD6433626H HD6433626(***)H
version
products HD6433626FP HD6433626(***)FP
64-pin QFP (FP-64A)
Mask ROM Standard HD6433625H HD6433625(***)H
version
products HD6433625FP HD6433625(***)FP
64-pin QFP (FP-64A)
64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)
64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)
64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)
H8/3624S Mask ROM Standard HD6433624SH HD6433624S(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)
version
products HD6433624SFP HD6433624S(***)FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)
H8/3623S Mask ROM Standard HD6433623SH HD6433623S(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)
version
products HD6433623SFP HD6433623S(***)FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)
H8/3622S Mask ROM Standard HD6433622SH HD6433622S(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)
version
products HD6433622SFP HD6433622S(***)FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)
Note:
(***) in mask ROM versions is the ROM code.
365
Appendix F Package Dimensions
Dimensional drawings of the H8/3627 Series in FP-64A, and FP-64E packages are shown in
figure F.1, and F.2, respectively.
17.2 ± 0.3
Unit: mm
14
33
48
32
0.8
17.2 ± 0.3
49
64
17
1
0.10
*Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
*0.17 ± 0.05
0.15 ± 0.04
3.05 Max
1.0
2.70
0.15 M
0.10 +0.15
–0.10
*0.37 ± 0.08
0.35 ± 0.06
16
1.6
0° – 8°
0.8 ± 0.3
Hitachi Code
JEDEC
EIAJ
Weight (reference value)
FP-64A
—
Conforms
1.2 g
Figure F.1 FP-64A Package Dimensions
Note: In case of inconsistencies arising within figures, dimensional drawings listed in the
Hitachi Semiconductor Packages Manual take precedence and are considered correct.
366
Unit: mm
12.0 ± 0.2
10
48
33
32
0.5
12.0 ± 0.2
49
64
17
0.10
*Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
*0.17 ± 0.05
0.15 ± 0.04
1.25
1.45
0.08 M
1.70 Max
16
0.10 ± 0.10
1
*0.22 ± 0.05
0.20 ± 0.04
1.0
0° – 8°
0.5 ± 0.2
Hitachi Code
JEDEC
EIAJ
Weight (reference value)
FP-64E
—
Conforms
0.4 g
Figure F.2 FP-64E Package Dimensions
367
H8/3627 Series Hardware Manual
Publication Date: 1st Edition, March 1999
Published by:
Electronic Devices Business Group
Hitachi, Ltd.
Edited by:
Technical Documentation Group
UL Media Co., Ltd.
Copyright © Hitachi, Ltd., 1999. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.